HANDBOOK
Access to the Handbook
The Handbook is available on the CITROËN website, in
the "MyCitroën" section or at the following address:
http://service.citroen.com/ACddb/
Access to the Handbook.
Select:
- the language,
- the vehicle, its body style,
- the issue period of your handbook corresponding to the date of 1
st
registration of your vehicle.
Then select:
- the vehicle,
- the issue period corresponding to the date of 1
st
registration of your
vehicle.
Download the content of the vehicle's Handbook.
From the appropriate Store, download the Scan MyCitroën
smartphone application.
This symbol indicates the latest information
available.
1
Welcome
Thank you for choosing a Citroën C5 AIRCROSS.
Your vehicle will be fitted with only some of the equipment described in
this document, depending on its trim level, version and the specification
for the country in which it was sold.
The descriptions and illustrations are given as indications only.
Automobiles CITROËN reserves the right to modify the technical
specifications, equipment and accessories without having to update this
edition of the guide.
If ownership of your vehicle is transferred, please ensure this
Handbook is passed on to the new owner.
All of the instructions and operating recommendations are presented
here to make the most of the vehicle. It is strongly recommended that
you familiarise yourself with it as well as the Maintenance and Warranty
Guide, informing about warranties, servicing and roadside assistance
associated with the vehicle.
Key
Safety warning
Additional information
Contributes to the protection of the environment
Left-hand drive vehicle
Right-hand drive vehicle
Location of the equipment/button described with a black area
2
.
.
Contents
Instrument panels 8
Warning and indicator lamps 11
Indicators 26
Manual test 29
Lighting dimmer 30
Trip computer 31
Touch screen 32
Date and time adjustment 34
Electronic key with remote control function and built-
in key 35
Keyless Entry and Starting 37
Central locking 41
Back-up procedures 41
Doors 44
Boot 44
Hands-free tailgate 45
Alarm 49
Electric windows 51
Panoramic opening sunroof 52
Correct driving position 54
Front seats 54
Steering wheel adjustment 58
Mirrors 58
Rear seats 60
Heating and Ventilation 61
Manual air conditioning 63
Dual-zone automatic air conditioning 64
Recirculation of interior air 67
Front demist – defrost 68
Heated windscreen 68
Rear screen demist – defrost 68
Additional Heating/Ventilation 69
Front ttings 71
Courtesy lamps 75
Interior ambient lighting 75
Boot ttings 76
Lighting control 79
Direction indicators 80
Daytime running lamps/Sidelamps 81
Parking lamps 81
Automatic illumination of headlamps 81
Guide-me-home and welcome lighting 82
Automatic headlamp dipping 83
Headlamp adjustment 84
Cornering lighting 85
Wiper control stalk 85
Changing a wiper blade 87
Automatic windscreen wipers 88
General safety recommendations 89
Hazard warning lamps 89
Horn 90
Emergency or assistance call 90
Electronic stability control (ESC) 91
Advanced Grip Control 95
Hill Assist Descent Control 96
Seat belts 97
Airbags 101
Child seats 104
Deactivating the front passenger airbag 106
ISOFIX mountings and child seats 111
i-Size child seats 114
Child lock 115
Overview
Instruments
Access
Ease of use and comfort
Safety
Lighting and visibility
Eco-driving
Instruments and controls 4
3
.
.
.
Contents
Driving recommendations 116
Anti-theft protection 118
Starting/Switching o the engine with the key 118
Starting/Switching o the engine with Keyless
Entry and Starting 120
Electric parking brake 121
Manual gearbox 125
Automatic gearbox 125
Driving mode 129
Hill start assist 129
Gear eciency indicator 130
Stop & Start 130
Tyre under-ination detection 132
CITROËN ConnectedCAM
®
134
Driving and manoeuvring aids – General
recommendations 135
Speed Limit recognition and recommendation 137
Programmable speed limiter 142
Cruise control – particular recommendations 144
Programmable cruise control 144
Memorising speeds 146
Highway Driver Assist 147
Adaptive Cruise Control 147
Active Lane Keeping Assist 151
Active Safety Brake with Collision Risk Alert and
Intelligent emergency braking assistance 156
Fatigue detection system 159
Active Lane Departure Warning System 161
Active Blind Spot Monitoring System 164
Parking sensors 167
Top Rear Vision – Top 360 Vision 168
Park Assist 173
Fuel tank 180
Compatibility of fuels 181
Towing device 182
Towing device with quickly detachable towball 183
Energy economy mode 186
Snow chains 186
Fitting roof bars 187
Bonnet 188
Engine compartment 189
Checking levels 189
Checks 192
Advice on care and maintenance 194
AdBlue
®
(BlueHDi) 194
Warning triangle 197
Running out of fuel (Diesel) 197
Tool kit 198
Temporary puncture repair kit 199
Spare wheel 203
Changing a bulb 206
Changing a fuse 212
12 V battery 215
Towing the vehicle 219
Dimensions 221
Identication markings 221
Engine technical data and towed loads 222
Engines and towed loads – Petrol 223
Engines and towed loads – Diesel 224
Driving Practical information
In the event of a breakdown
Technical data
Alphabetical index
Access to additional videos
bit.ly/helpPSA
Audio equipment and telematics
CITROËN Connect Radio
CITROËN Connect Nav
4
Overview
Instruments and controls
1. Door mirror and electric window control
panel
2. Bonnet release
3. Dashboard fuses
4. Horn
Driver front airbag
5. Instrument panel
Steering mounted controls
6. Courtesy lamp
Warning lamp display for seat belts and
front passenger airbag
Sunroof and blind controls
Interior rear view mirror
Emergency and assistance call buttons
CITROËN ConnectedCAM
®
7. Touch screen with CITROËN Connect
Radio or CITROËN Connect Nav
8. Ignition switch
or
START/STOP button
9. Gearbox controls
10. Electric parking brake control
11. Wireless charger
12 V socket/USB socket
12. Driving mode (ECO, SPORT) selection
buttons
Hill Assist Descent Control
Advanced Grip Control
13. Glove box
Front passenger airbag deactivation
switch
14. Centre switch panel (lower and upper)
15. Side switch panel
1. External lighting/direction indicator
controls
2. Wiper/screenwash/trip computer controls
3. Steering mounted gear control paddles
(with automatic gearbox)
4. Speed limiter/cruise control controls
5. Audio system setting controls
5
.Overview
Side switch panel
1. Halogen headlamp beam height manual
adjustment
2. Deactivation of the Active Lane Departure
Warning System
3. Hands-free tailgate opening/closing
4. Activation of the Active Lane Keeping
Assist function
5. Programmable heating operation indicator
lamp
6. Activation of the heated windscreen
7. Deactivation of the interior volumetric and
anti-tilt monitoring alarm
Centre switch panel (lower and
upper)
1. Touch screen controls (CITROËN Connect
Radio or CITROËN Connect Nav)
2. Heated seats controls
3. Windscreen and front windows demisting
4. Manual recirculation of the interior air
5. Rear screen demisting/defrosting
6. Ventilation off
7. Locking/Unlocking from the inside
8. Deactivation of Stop & Start
9. Hazard warning lamps
8. Activation/deactivation of the electric child
lock
6
Eco-dr iv ing
As a passenger, if you avoid connecting your
multimedia devices (film, music, video game,
etc.), you will contribute towards limiting the
consumption of electrical energy, and so of
fuel.
Disconnect your portable devices before
leaving the vehicle.
Eco-driving
Eco-driving is a range of everyday practices that allow the motorist to optimise their fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions.
Optimise the use of your gearbox
With a manual gearbox, move off gently and
change up without waiting. While accelerating,
change up early.
With an automatic gearbox, give preference
to automatic mode and avoid pressing the
accelerator pedal heavily or suddenly.
The gear efficiency indicator invites you to
engage the most suitable gear: as soon as the
indication is displayed in the instrument panel,
follow it straight away.
For vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox,
this indicator appears only in manual mode.
Drive smoothly
Maintain a safe distance between vehicles,
use engine braking rather than the
brake pedal, and press the accelerator
progressively. These practices contribute
towards a reduction in fuel consumption and
CO
2
emissions and also help reduce the
background traffic noise.
If your vehicle has cruise control, make use of
the system at speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h)
when the traffic is flowing well.
Control the use of your electrical
equipment
Before moving off, if the passenger
compartment is too warm, ventilate it by
opening the windows and air vents before
using the air conditioning.
Above 31 mph (50 km/h), close the windows
and leave the air vents open.
Consider using equipment that can help
keep the temperature in the passenger
compartment down (sunroof blind and window
blinds, etc.).
Switch off the headlamps and front foglamps
when the ambient light level does not require
their use.
Avoid running the engine before moving off,
particularly in winter; your vehicle will warm up
much faster while driving.
Unless it has automatic regulation, switch off
the air conditioning as soon as the desired
temperature has been reached.
Switch off the demisting and defrosting
controls, if these are not automatically
managed.
Switch off the heated seat as soon as
possible.
.
7
Eco-dr iv ing
Limit the causes of excess
consumption
Spread loads throughout the vehicle; place
the heaviest items at the back of the boot, as
close as possible to the rear seats.
Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and
reduce wind resistance (roof bars, roof rack,
bicycle carrier, trailer, etc.). Preferably, use
a roof box.
Remove roof bars and roof racks after use.
At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and
refit your summer tyres.
Observe the recommendations on
maintenance
Check the tyre pressures regularly, when cold,
referring to the label in the door aperture,
driver's side.
Carry out this check in particular:
- before a long journey,
- at each change of season,
- after a long period out of use.
Do not forget the spare wheel and the tyres on
any trailer or caravan.
Have your vehicle serviced regularly (engine
oil, oil filter, air filter, cabin filter, etc.) and
observe the schedule of operations in the
manufacturer's service schedule.
When filling the tank, do not continue after the
3
rd
cut-off of the nozzle to avoid overflow.
At the wheel of your new vehicle, it is only
after the first 1,900 miles (3,000 kilometres)
that you will see the fuel consumption settle
down to a consistent average.
With a BlueHDi Diesel engine, if the SCR
system is faulty, your vehicle becomes
polluting. Visit a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop as soon as possible to
bring your vehicle's nitrogen oxides emissions
back in line with regulations.
8
Instruments
Instrument panel with dials
Dials
1. Speedometer (mph or km/h).
2. Fuel level indicator.
3. Engine coolant fluid temperature gauge.
4. Rev counter (x 1,000 rpm).
5. Display screen.
Control buttons
Colour display
1. Cruise control or speed limiter settings.
Speed suggested by the speed limit
recognition system.
2. Gear efficiency and/or selector position
indicator, gear and Sport and Snow
modes with an automatic gearbox.
3. Display area: alert message or state
of functions, trip computer, digital
speedometer (mph or km/h), range
associated with the AdBlue
®
and the SCR
system (miles or km), etc.
4 Service indicator, then total distance
recorder (miles or km).
These functions are displayed
successively on switching on the ignition.
5 Trip distance recorder (miles or km).
A. Resetting the service indicator.
Alert log display.
Reminder of servicing information or the
remaining range associated with AdBlue
®
and the SCR system (miles or km).
Tyre pressure status information display.
B. General lighting dimmer.
C. Resetting the trip distance recorder.
Digital instrument panel
This instrument panel can be customised.
The content and availability of information
depends on the display mode selected and the
vehicle's equipment.
Description
Example with the "PERSONAL" display mode.
1. Fuel level indicator.
2. Rev counter (x 1,000 rpm).
3. Gear efficiency indicator.
Status of the automatic gearbox.
Driving mode.
4. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h).
5. Cruise control or speed limiter settings.
6. Display of speed limit signs.
9
1
Instruments
7. Analogue speedometer (mph or km/h).
8. Engine oil temperature gauge.
9. Engine coolant temperature indicator
(°Celsius).
10. Total distance recorder (miles or km).
11. Trip distance recorder (miles or km).
Control button
A. Short press: display the alerts log,
reminder of servicing information or the
remaining range associated with the
AdBlue
®
and the SCR system (miles or
km) and tyre pressure status information
display.
Long press: reset the service indicator or
trip distance recorder (depending on the
context).
Displays
Some lamps have a fixed location, the others
can alter location.
For certain functions that have indicator lamps
for both operation and for deactivation, there is
only one dedicated location.
Permanent information
Whatever the display mode selected, the
instrument panel displays:
- in fixed locations:
• the analogue speedometer,
• the fuel level indicator,
• the engine coolant temperature indicator,
• the distance recorders,
- in variable locations:
• gearbox and gear efficiency indicator
information,
• the digital speedometer,
• status or alert messages displayed
temporarily.
Optional information
Depending on the display mode selected and
active features, additional information can be
displayed:
- the rev counter,
- the trip computer,
- driving aids,
- the speed limiter or cruise control,
- the media currently playing,
- navigation instructions,
- the analogue speedometer,
- engine oil level and temperature
Customisation of the
instrument panel
You can modify the appearance of the
instrument panel by choosing:
- a display colour,
- a display mode.
Display language and units
They depend on the configuration of the
touch screen.
When travelling abroad, the speed must
be shown in the official units of the
country you are driving in (mph, miles or
km/h, km).
As a safety measure, these adjustments
must be carried out with the vehicle
stationary.
Choosing a display colour
F Press Settings in the upper bar of
the touch screen.
F Select "Colour schemes".
F Select a display colour.
10
Instruments
Choice of display mode
Each mode corresponds to the type of
information displayed in the instrument panel.
- "DIALS": standard display of the analogue
and digital speedometers, the rev counter,
the fuel level indicator, the engine coolant
temperature indicator and the distance
recorder.
- "NAVIGATION": standard display,
additionally showing the current navigation
information (map and navigation
instructions).
- "DRIVING": standard display, additionally
showing the current driving aid systems
information.
- "MINIMAL": minimal display with digital
speedometer and the distance recorders
and, in the event of a warning only, the
fuel level indicator and the engine coolant
temperature indicator.
- "PERSONAL": minimal display and
possibility of selecting optional information
to be displayed in the customisable areas
on the left and right.
To enter settings for the "PERSONAL"
display mode and select the information to
be displayed in the customisable areas of the
instrument panel:
To modify the display mode of the instrument
panel:
F Turn the knob located to the left of the
steering wheel to display and scroll through
the different modes on the left-hand side of
the instrument panel.
F Once the selected display mode appears,
press on the knob to validate.
The new display mode is applied instantly.
If the knob is not moved, the selected display
mode is automatically applied after a few
moments.
With CITROËN Connect Radio
F Press Settings in the upper bar
of the touch screen.
F Select "Configuration".
F Select "Instrument panel
personalisation".
With CITROËN Connect Nav
F Press Settings in the upper bar
of the touch screen.
F Select "OPTIONS".
F Select "Instrument panel
personalisation".
F For each personalised display area, left and
right, select a type of information using the
corresponding scroll arrows in the touch
screen:
• "Driving aids".
• "Fault" (empty).
• "Temperatures" (engine oil).
• "Media".
• "Navigation".
• "Trip computer".
• "Vigilance level".
• "Rev counter".
F Confirm to save and quit.
If the current display mode is "PERSONAL", the
new selection is displayed immediately.
As a safety measure, these adjustments
must be carried out with the vehicle
stationary.
11
1
Instruments
Warning and indicator
lamps
Associated warnings
The illumination of a lamp can be accompanied
by an audible signal and/or a message
displayed in a screen.
Relating the type of alert to the operating status
of the vehicle allows you to determine whether
the situation is normal or a fault has occurred:
refer to the description of each lamp for further
information.
When the ignition is switched on
Certain red or orange warning lamps come on
for a few seconds when the ignition is switched
on. These warning lamps should go off as soon
as the engine is started.
For more information on equipment or
a function, refer to the corresponding section.
Persistent warning lamp
When the engine is running or the vehicle is
being driven, the illumination of a red or orange
warning lamp indicates a fault that needs
further investigation, using any associated
message and the description of the warning
lamp in the documentation.
Where a warning lamp remains lit
The references (1), (2) and (3) in the warning
and indicator lamp description indicate whether
you should contact a qualified professional
in addition to the immediate recommended
actions.
(1): You must stop as soon as it is safe to do
so and switch off the ignition.
(2): Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
(3): Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Displayed as symbols, visual indicators
which inform the driver of the occurrence
of a malfunction (warning lamps) or of the
operating status of a system (operation or
deactivation indicator lamps). Certain lamps
light up in two ways (fixed or flashing) and/or in
several colours.
12
Instruments
List of warning and indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations
Red warning/indicator lamps
STOP Fixed, associated
with another warning
lamp, accompanied
by the display of
a message and an
audible signal.
Indicates a serious fault with the
engine, braking system, power
steering, automatic gearbox or
a major electrical fault.
Carry out (1) and then (2).
Engine oil
pressure
Fixed. There is a fault with the engine
lubrication system.
Carry out (1) and then (2).
Maximum
coolant
temperature
Fixed. The temperature of the cooling
system is too high.
Carry out (1), then wait until the engine has cooled
down before topping up to the required level if
necessary. If the problem persists, carry out (2).
Battery charge Fixed. The battery charging circuit has
a fault (dirty or loose terminals, slack
or cut alternator belt, etc.).
Clean and retighten the terminals. If the warning
lamp does not go off when the engine is started, carry
out (2).
Door(s) open Fixed, associated with
a message identifying
the door.
If one of the doors or the boot is not
fully closed (speed below 6 mph
[10 km/h]).
Fixed, associated with
a message identifying
the door, together with
an audible signal.
If one of the doors or the boot is not
fully closed (speed above 6 mph
[10 km/h]).
13
1
Instruments
Seat belt not
fastened/
unfastened
Fixed or flashing
accompanied by an
audible signal.
A seat belt has not been fastened or
has been unfastened.
Electric parking
brake
Fixed. The electric parking brake is applied.
Flashing. The electric parking brake is not
applied automatically.
The application/release is faulty.
Carry out (1): park on level ground (horizontally).
With a manual gearbox, engage a gear.
With an automatic gearbox, place the gear selector
in mode P.
Switch off the ignition and carry out (2).
Braking Fixed. The brake fluid level has dropped
significantly.
Carry out (1), then top up with fluid that complies with
the manufacturer's recommendations. If the problem
persists, carry out (2).
+
Fixed. The electronic brake force
distribution (EBFD) system is faulty.
Carry out (1) and then (2).
Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations
14
Instruments
Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
Fixed. The anti-lock braking system has
a fault.
The vehicle retains conventional braking.
Drive carefully at reduced speed, then carry out (3).
Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations
Service Temporarily on,
accompanied by the
display of a message.
One or more minor anomalies,
for which there is/are no specific
warning lamp, have been detected.
Identify the cause of the anomaly using the message
displayed in the instrument panel.
You can deal with certain anomalies yourself, for
example an open door or the start of saturation of the
particle filter.
For other anomalies, such as a fault with the tyre
under-inflation detection system, carry out (3).
Fixed, accompanied
by the display of
a message.
One or more major anomalies,
for which there is/are no specific
warning lamp, have been detected.
Identify the cause of the anomaly using the message
displayed in the instrument panel, then carry out (3).
+
Service warning lamp
fixed and service
spanner flashing then
fixed.
The servicing interval has been
exceeded.
The vehicle must be serviced as soon as possible.
Only with BlueHDi Diesel engines.
(1): You must stop as soon as it is safe to do
so and switch off the ignition.
(2): Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
(3): Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Orange warning/indicator lamps
15
1
Instruments
Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations
AdBlue
®
On for around
30 seconds when
starting the vehicle,
accompanied by
a message indicating
the remaining driving
range.
The remaining driving range is
between 1,500 and 500 miles
(2,400 and 800 km).
Top up the AdBlue
®
.
Fixed, on switching
on the ignition,
accompanied by an
audible signal and
a message indicating the
remaining driving range.
The remaining driving range is
between 500 and 62 miles (800 and
100 km).
Top up the AdBlue
®
as soon as possible, or carry
out (3).
Flashing,
accompanied by an
audible signal and
a message indicating
the remaining driving
range.
The remaining driving range is less
than 62 miles (100 km).
You must top up the AdBlue
®
to avoid starting
being prevented, or carry out (3).
Flashing,
accompanied by an
audible signal and
a message indicating
that starting is
prevented.
The AdBlue
®
tank is empty: the
starting prevention system required
by legislation prevents starting of the
engine.
To restart the engine, top up the AdBlue
®
or carry
out (2).
It is essential to add at least 5 litres of AdBlue
®
to its
tank.
16
Instruments
Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations
+
+
SCR emissions
control system
Fixed when the ignition is
switched on, accompanied
by an audible signal and
a message.
A fault with the SCR emissions
control system has been detected.
This alert disappears once the exhaust emissions
return to normal levels.
AdBlue
®
warning lamp
flashing, on switching
on the ignition,
associated with the
fixed Service and
Engine self-diagnostic
warning lamps,
accompanied by an
audible signal and
a message indicating
the remaining driving
range.
Depending on the message
displayed, you can continue driving
for up to 685 miles (1,100 km) before
the engine starting prevention
system is triggered.
Carry out (3) as soon as possible to avoid starting
being prevented.
AdBlue
®
warning
lamp flashing, on
switching on the
ignition, associated
with the fixed Service
and Engine self-
diagnostic warning
lamps, accompanied
by an audible signal
and a message
indicating that starting
is prevented.
An engine immobiliser prevents
the engine from restarting (over
the authorised driving limit after
confirmation of a fault with the
emissions control system).
To start the engine, carry out (2).
17
1
Instruments
Engine self-
diagnostic
system
Flashing. The engine management system has
a fault.
There is a risk that the catalytic converter will be destroyed.
Carry out (2) without fail.
Fixed. The emission control system has
a fault.
The warning lamp should go off when the engine is started.
Carry out (3) quickly.
Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations
Collision Risk
Alert/Active
Safety Brake
Flashing. The system is operating. The vehicle brakes briefly so as to reduce the speed
of frontal collision with the vehicle ahead.
Fixed, accompanied
by a message and an
audible signal.
The system has a fault. Carry out (3).
Collision Risk
Alert/Active
Safety Brake
Fixed, accompanied
by the display of
a message.
The system has been deactivated, via
the vehicle configuration menu.
Active Lane
Departure
Warning System
Fixed. The system has been automatically
deactivated or placed on standby.
Flashing. You are about to cross a broken
lane marking without operating the
direction indicators.
The system is activated, then corrects the trajectory
on the side of the lane marking detected.
+
Active Lane
Departure
Warning System
Fixed. The system has a fault. Carry out (3).
18
Instruments
+
Active Lane
Keeping Assist
Fixed, accompanied
by the Service
warning lamp.
The system has a fault. Carry out (3).
Dynamic
stability control
(DSC)/Anti-slip
regulation (ASR)
Fixed. The system is deactivated. The DSC/ASR system is reactivated automatically
when the vehicle is started, and from around 31 mph
(50 km/h).
Below 31 mph (50 km/h), you can reactivate it
manually.
Dynamic
stability control
(DSC)/Anti-slip
regulation (ASR)
Flashing. The DSC/ASR adjustment is
activated if there is a loss of grip or
trajectory.
Fixed. The DSC/ASR system has a fault. Carry out (3).
+
Emergency
brake fault (with
electric parking
brake)
Fixed, accompanied
by the message
"Parking brake fault".
Emergency braking does not have
full power.
If automatic release is not available, use manual
release.
Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations
(1): You must stop as soon as it is safe to do
so and switch off the ignition.
(3): Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
(2): Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
19
1
Instruments
Under-inflation Fixed, accompanied
by an audible signal
and a message.
The pressure in one or more wheels
is too low.
Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as possible.
Reinitialise the detection system after adjusting the
pressure.
+
Under-inflation
warning lamp flashing
then fixed and
Service warning lamp
fixed.
The system is faulty: tyre pressures
are no longer monitored.
Under-inflation detection is no longer monitored.
As soon as possible, check the pressure of the tyres
and carry out (3).
Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations
Diesel engine
pre-heating
Fixed.
The period of
illumination depends
on the climatic
conditions.
The ignition is on. Wait until the warning lamp goes off before starting.
If the engine does not start, switch the ignition off and
then on, wait until the lamp goes off again, then start
the engine.
Front passenger
airbag (ON)
Fixed. The front passenger airbag is
activated.
The control is in the "ON" position.
In this case, do NOT install a "rearward facing"
child seat on the front passenger seat – risk of
serious injury!
Front passenger
airbag (OFF)
Fixed. The front passenger airbag is
deactivated.
The control is in the "OFF" position.
You can install a "rearward facing" child seat, unless
there is a fault with the airbags (Airbags warning lamp
on).
Airbags Fixed. One of the airbags or seat belt
pretensioners is faulty.
Carry out (3).
20
Instruments
Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations
or
Low fuel level
Fixed (warning
lamp or LED) and
needle in the red
zone (depending on
version), accompanied
by an audible signal
and a message.
The audible signal
and the message
are repeated with
increasing frequency
as the level drops
towards zero.
When it first comes on, there
remains approximately 5 litres of
fuel in the tank (reserve).
Refuel without delay to avoid running out of fuel.
Never drive until completely empty, as this could
damage the emissions control and injection systems.
Diesel filter Fixed. The Diesel filter contains water. Risk of damage to the injection system: carry out (2)
without delay.
Particle filter
(Diesel)
Fixed, accompanied
by an audible signal
and a message about
the risk of particle
filter blockage.
This indicates that the particle filter
is beginning to saturate.
As soon as the traffic conditions permit, regenerate
the filter by driving at a speed of at least 37 mph
(60 km/h) until the warning lamp goes off.
Fixed, accompanied by
an audible signal and
a message signalling
that the additive level
in the particle filter is
too low.
This indicates that the level in the
additive tank is low.
Carry out (3).
21
1
Instruments
Deactivation of
the automatic
functions (with
electric parking
brake)
Fixed. The "automatic application" (on
switching off the engine) and
"automatic release" (on acceleration)
functions are deactivated.
In the event of a fault, illumination of
this warning lamp is accompanied by
a message.
Carry out (3) if automatic application/release is no
longer possible.
The brake can be applied or released manually.
+
Automatic
application
(with electric
parking brake)
Fixed, accompanied
by the message
"Parking brake fault".
Automatic application is not
available, the parking brake can only
be used manually.
Use the electric parking brake control lever.
If automatic release is also not available, use manual
release.
Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations
Malfunction
(with electric
parking brake)
Fixed. The electric parking brake has
a fault.
Carry out (3) quickly.
+
Fixed, accompanied
by the message
"Parking brake fault".
You can no longer immobilise the
vehicle with the engine running.
If manual application and release are not working, the
electric parking brake control lever is faulty.
The automatic functions must be used at all times and
are automatically reactivated in the event of failure of
the control lever.
Carry out (2).
22
Instruments
+
+
Malfunction
(with electric
parking brake)
Fixed, accompanied
by the message
"Parking brake fault".
The parking brake is faulty: manual
and automatic functions may not be
working.
When stationary, to immobilise your vehicle:
F Pull and hold the control lever for approximately
7 to 15 seconds, until the indicator lamp comes on
in the instrument panel.
If this procedure does not work, secure your vehicle:
F Park on a level surface.
F With a manual gearbox, engage a gear.
F With an automatic gearbox, select P, then put the
supplied chocks against one of the wheels.
Then carry out (2).
Rear foglamps Fixed. The lamps are on.
Parking sensors Fixed, accompanied
by the display of
a message and an
audible signal.
The system has a fault. Carry out (3).
Foot on the
clutch
Fixed. Stop & Start: the change to START
mode is rejected because the clutch
pedal is not fully depressed.
Fully depress the clutch pedal.
Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations
23
1
Instruments
+
+
Hill start assist Fixed. The system has a fault. Carry out (3).
Power steering Fixed. The power steering has a fault.
Drive carefully at moderate speed, then carry out (3).
Stop & Start Fixed, accompanied
by the display of
a message.
The Stop & Start system is
deactivated.
The engine will not switch off at the next traffic stop.
Press the button to reactivate the Stop & Start.
Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations
Green warning/indicator lamps
Stop & Start Fixed.
When the vehicle stops, the Stop &
Start puts the engine into STOP mode.
Flashing temporarily. STOP mode is momentarily
unavailable or START mode is
automatically triggered.
(1): You must stop as soon as it is safe to do
so and switch off the ignition.
(3): Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
(2): Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
24
Instruments
Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations
Park Assist Fixed. The function is active.
Active Lane
Keeping Assist
Fixed. The function has been activated. All the conditions have been met: the system is
operating.
Direction
indicators
Flashing with audible
signal.
The direction indicators are on.
Sidelamps Fixed. The lamps are on.
Dipped beam
headlamps
Fixed. The lamps are on.
+
or
Automatic
headlamp
dipping
Fixed. The function has been activated in
the touch screen (Driving/Vehicle
menu).
The lighting control stalk is in the
"AUTO" position.
25
1
Instruments
Front foglamps Fixed. The front foglamps are on.
Automatic
wiping
Fixed. Automatic front wiping is activated.
Blue warning/indicator lamps
Main beam
headlamps
Fixed. The main beams are on.
Warning/indicator lamp State Cause Actions/Observations
Black/white warning/indicator lamps
(grey)
Hill Assist
Descent
Fixed. The function has been activated,
but is currently paused because the
speed is too high.
Reduce the vehicle speed to below 19 mph (30 km/h).
26
Instruments
Indicators
Service indicator
The service indicator is displayed on the instrument panel. Depending on the vehicle version:
- the distance recorder display line indicates the distance remaining before the next service is
due, or the distance travelled since it was due preceded by the sign "-".
- an alert message indicates the distance remaining, as well as the period before the next service
is due or how long it is overdue.
Warning/indicator
lamp
State Cause
Actions/
Observations
Service
spanner
Lights up temporarily
when the ignition is
switched on.
Between 620 and
1,860 miles (1,000 and
3,000 km) remain before
the next service is due.
Fixed, when the
ignition is switched
on.
The service is due in
less than 620 miles
(1,000 km).
Have your vehicle
serviced very soon.
+
Service
spanner
flashing
Flashing then fixed, when
the ignition is switched on.
(With BlueHDi Diesel
engines, associated
with the Service warning
lamp).
The servicing interval
has been exceeded.
Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as
possible.
Resetting the service indicator
The service indicator must be reset after each
service.
If you have carried out the service on your
vehicle yourself:
F switch off the ignition,
F press and hold this button,
F switch on the ignition; the distance recorder
display begins a countdown,
F release the button when =0 is displayed; the
spanner disappears.
Following this operation, if you wish to
disconnect the battery, lock the vehicle
and wait at least five minutes for the reset
to be registered.
27
1
Instruments
Retrieving the service
information
You can access the service information at any
time in the instrument panel.
The distance indicated (in miles or
kilometres) is calculated according to the
distance covered and the time elapsed
since the last service.
The alert may be triggered close to a due
date.
F Press this button to temporarily display the
service information.
Engine oil level indicator
(Depending on version.)
On versions fitted with an electric oil level
indicator, the state of the engine oil level is
displayed in the instrument panel for a few
seconds after switching the ignition on, after
the servicing information, in the form of
messages.
The level read will only be correct if the
vehicle is on level ground and the engine
has been off for more than 30 minutes.
Low oil level
This is indicated by the display of a message
prompting you to top up, accompanied by the
Service warning lamp and an audible signal.
If the low oil level is confirmed by a check using
the dipstick, the level must be topped up to
avoid damage to the engine.
For more information on Checking levels,
refer to the corresponding section.
Oil level indicator fault
This is signalled by the display of the "Oil
level measurement invalid" message in the
instrument panel.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
In the event of a fault with the electric
indicator, the oil level is no longer
monitored.
If the system is faulty, you must check the
engine oil level using the manual dipstick
located under the bonnet.
For more information on Checking levels,
refer to the corresponding section.
Engine coolant temperature
gauge
With the engine running:
- in zone A, the temperature is correct,
- in zone B, the temperature is too high; the
associated warning lamp and the central
STOP warning lamp come on in red in the
instrument panel, accompanied by the
display of a message and an audible signal.
28
Instruments
You must stop the vehicle as soon as it is
safe to do so.
Wait a few minutes before switching off the
engine.
After switching off the ignition, carefully
open the bonnet and check the coolant
level.
For more information on Checking levels,
refer to the corresponding section.
AdBlue
®
range indicators
(BlueHDi)
The Diesel BlueHDi engines are equipped with
a system that associates the SCR (Selective
Catalytic Reduction) emissions control system
and the Diesel particle filter (DPF) for the
treatment of exhaust gases. They cannot
function without AdBlue
®
fluid.
The engine starting prevention system
required by regulations is activated
automatically once the AdBlue
®
tank is
empty. It is then no longer possible to
start the engine until the minimum level of
AdBlue
®
has been topped up.
Manual display of the range
While the range is greater than 1,500 miles
(2,400 km), it is not displayed automatically.
F Press this button to temporarily display the
driving range.
Actions required related to a lack
of AdBlue
®
The following warning lamps light up when the
quantity of AdBlue
®
is lower than the reserve
level corresponding to a range of 1,500 miles
(2,400 km).
Together with the warning lamps, messages
regularly remind you of the need to top up to
avoid engine starting being prevented. Refer to
the Warning and indicator lamps section for
details of the messages displayed.
For more information on AdBlue
®
(BlueHDi engines), and in particular on
topping up, refer to the corresponding
section.
Warning/
indicator
lamps lit
Action
Remaining
range
Top up.
Between 1,500 miles
and 500 miles
(2,400 km and 800 km)
Top up as soon
as possible.
Between 500 miles
and 62 miles
(800 km and 100 km)
A top-up is
vital, there is
the risk that the
engine will be
prevented from
starting.
Between
62 miles
and 0 miles
(100 km and
0 km)
To be able
to restart the
engine, add at
least 5 litres of
AdBlue
®
to its
tank.
0 miles (0 km)
29
1
Instruments
Malfunction of the SCR
emissions control system
Malfunction detection
If a malfunction is detected,
these warning lamps come on,
accompanied by an audible signal
and the display of an "Emissions
fault" message.
The alert is triggered while driving as soon
as the fault is detected for the first time, then
when switching on the ignition for subsequent
journeys, while the fault persists.
If it is a temporary fault, the alert
disappears during the next journey,
after self-diagnostic checks of the SCR
emissions control system.
Malfunction conrmed during the
permitted driving phase (between
685 miles and 0 miles (1,100 km and 0 km))
If the warning lamp is still on after 31 miles
(50 km) of driving, the fault in the SCR system
is confirmed.
Have the system checked by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as
possible.
Starting prevented
Every time the ignition is switched on, the
message "Emissions fault: Starting prevented"
is displayed.
To be able to restart the engine, call
on a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
The AdBlue warning lamp flashes,
accompanied by the display of a message
("Emissions fault: Starting prevented in x
miles") indicating the remaining range in miles
or kilometres.
While driving, the message is displayed every
30 seconds. The alert is repeated when
switching on the ignition.
You can continue driving for up to 685 miles
(1,100 km) before the engine starting
prevention system is triggered.
Manual test in the
instrument panel
This function allows you, at any time, to check
certain indicators and display the alerts log.
F With the engine running, briefly press this
button.
The following information is displayed in the
instrument panel:
- the engine oil level,
- when the next service is due,
- the driving range for the AdBlue and the
SCR system for BlueHDi Diesel versions,
- display of the state of pressure of the tyres,
- current alerts.
This information is also displayed
automatically every time the ignition is
switched on.
30
Instruments
Distance recorders
The total and trip distances are displayed for
thirty seconds when the ignition is switched off,
when the driver's door is opened and when the
vehicle is locked or unlocked.
When travelling abroad, you may need to
change the units of distance and speed:
The display of distance and speed must
be expressed in the official unit of the
country (km or miles). The change of units
is done via the screen configuration menu,
with the vehicle stationary.
Total distance recorder
It measures the total distance travelled by the
vehicle since its first registration.
Trip distance recorder
It measures the distance travelled since it was
reset by the driver.
Resetting the trip recorder
F With the ignition on, press the button until
zeros appear.
Lighting dimmer
This system allows the brightness of the
instruments and controls to be adjusted to suit
the ambient light level.
With buttons
With CITROËN Connect
Radio
F Press this button to select the
Settings menu.
F Select "Brightness".
F Adjust the brightness by pressing
the arrows or moving the slider.
The settings are applied immediately.
F Press outside the settings window to exit.
With the lamps on, press button A to increase
the brightness of the instruments and controls
You can also switch off the screen:
F Press this button to select the
Settings menu.
F Select "Dark".
The screen goes off completely.
F Press the screen again (anywhere on its
surface) to activate it.
and the vehicle's ambient lighting or button B
to reduce it.
Release the button when the desired level is
reached.
31
1
Instruments
Trip computer
Information displayed about the current journey
(range, fuel consumption, average speed, etc.).
Display of the different trip computer tabs
With instrument panels with dials
The display of trip computer data is selected by
pressing on the end of the wiper control stalk or
by rotating the thumb wheel situated to the left
of the steering wheel.
F Press this button, located on the end of the
wiper control stalk, to display the different
tabs in turn.
Display of data in the
instrument panel
- The current information with:
• the range,
• the current fuel consumption,
• the Stop & Start time counter.
- Trip "1" with:
• the average speed,
• the average fuel consumption,
• the distance travelled,
for the first trip.
- Trip "2" with:
• the average speed,
• the average fuel consumption,
• the distance travelled,
for the second trip.
Trip reset
F When the desired trip is displayed, press
the button on the end of the wiper control
stalk for more than 2 seconds.
Trips "1" and "2" are independent and are used
identically.
With CITROËN Connect Nav
F Press this button to select the
Settings menu.
F Select "OPTIONS".
F Select "Screen configuration".
F Select the "Brightness" tab.
F Adjust the brightness by pressing
the arrows or moving the slider.
F Press this button to save and exit.
You can also switch off the screen:
F Press this button to select the
Settings menu.
F Select "Switch off screen".
The screen goes off completely.
F Press the screen again (anywhere on its
surface) to activate it.
With digital instrument panel
Trip computer data is displayed permanently
when you select the display mode "DRIVING"
or "PERSONAL", depending on version.
In all other display modes, pressing the end of
the wiper control stalk will cause this data to
appear temporarily in a specific window.
32
Instruments
Average fuel consumption
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
Calculated since the last trip
computer reset.
Average speed
(mph or km/h)
Calculated since the last trip
computer reset.
Distance travelled
(miles or km)
Calculated since the last trip
computer reset.
Stop & Start time counter
(minutes/seconds or hours/minutes)
If your vehicle is fitted with Stop & Start, a time
counter calculates the time spent in STOP
mode during a journey.
It resets to zero every time the ignition is
switched on.
Current fuel consumption
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
Calculated during the last few
seconds.
This value may vary following a change in
the style of driving or the terrain, resulting
in a significant change in the current fuel
consumption.
When the range falls below 19 miles (30 km),
dashes are displayed.
After filling with at least 5 litres of fuel, the
range is recalculated and is displayed if it
exceeds 62 miles (100 km).
If dashes instead of figures continue
to be displayed when driving, contact
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Touch screen
This system gives access to:
- the permanent display of the time and
the exterior temperature (a blue symbol
appears when there is a risk of ice).
- the heating/air conditioning controls.
- the menus for adjusting settings for vehicle
functions and systems.
- the audio system and telephone controls
and the display of associated information.
- the display of visual manoeuvring aid
functions (visual parking sensor information,
Park Assist, etc.).
- Internet services and the display of
associated information.
and, depending on equipment, it gives access
to:
- the mode and intensity adjustment for the
massage function of the front seats.
- the navigation system controls and the
display of associated information.
This function is only displayed from 19 mph
(30 km/h).
A few definitions…
Range
(miles or km)
The distance which can
still be travelled with the
fuel remaining in the tank
(depending on the average
fuel consumption over the
last few miles (kilometres)
travelled).
33
1
Instruments
Use the buttons arranged below the touch
screen for access to the menus, then press the
virtual buttons in the touch screen.
Some menus may display across two pages:
press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
second page.
For safety reasons, the vehicle must
always be stationary for the driver to
perform operations that require close
attention.
Some functions are not accessible when
driving.
Principles
To deactivate/activate a function, select "OFF"
or "ON".
After a few moments with no action on the
second page, the first page is displayed
automatically.
Menus
Radio Media.
See the "Audio equipment and telematics" section.
Air conditioning.
Settings for temperature, air flow,
etc.
Driving or Vehicle.**
Activation, deactivation and settings
for certain functions.
Telephone.
See the "Audio equipment and telematics" section.
Applications.
Display of available connected
services and access to the Eco-
coaching function.
Confirm.
Return to the previous page or
confirm.
Connected navigation.*
See the "Audio equipment and
telematics" section.
** Depending on equipment.
The functions accessible from this menu are
arranged on two tabs: "Driving functions" and
"Vehicle settings".
Settings for a function.
Access to additional information on
the function.
* The availability of connected navigation
services is confirmed by the display of
the TomTom Traffic logo on the map. For
more information, refer to the connected
navigation section.
For more information on the Manual air
conditioning and the Dual-zone automatic
air conditioning, refer to the corresponding
sections.
Volume adjustment/mute.
See the "Audio equipment and
telematics" section.
Press with three fingers on the touch
screen to show all of the menu buttons.
For the other functions, refer to the "Audio
equipment and telematics" section.
Information banner(s)
Certain information is displayed permanently in
the touch screen banner(s).
34
Instruments
CITROËN Connect Nav side banners
Left-hand side
- Exterior temperature (a blue warning lamp
appears when there is a risk of ice).
- Access to the Settings of the touch screen
and digital instrument panel (date/time,
languages, units, etc.).
- Reminder of the air conditioning information,
and direct access to the corresponding
menu.
Right-hand side
- Time.
- Notifications.
- Reminder of the air conditioning information,
and direct access to the corresponding
menu.
Date and time adjustment
With CITROËN Connect
Radio
F Select the Settings menu in
the upper banner of the touch
screen.
F Select "Configuration".
F Select "Date and time".
F Select "Date" or "Time".
F Choose the display formats.
F Change the date and/or time using the
numeric keypad.
F Confirm with "OK".
With CITROËN Connect Nav
Setting of the time and date is only available if
synchronisation with the GPS is deactivated.
F Select the Settings menu in the
touch screen banner.
F Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
F Select "Setting the time-date".
F Select the "Date" or "Time" tab.
F Set the date and/or time using the numeric
keypad.
F Confirm with "OK".
Additional settings
You can choose:
- The time zone.
- The display format of the date and time
(12h/24h).
- The summer time management function
(+1 hour).
- The synchronisation with GPS (UTC).
The system does not automatically
manage the change between winter and
summer time (depending on the country
of sale).
CITROËN Connect Radio upper
banner
- Time and exterior temperature (a blue
warning lamp appears when there is a risk
of ice).
- Reminder of the air conditioning information,
and direct access to the corresponding
menu.
- Reminder of the Radio Media and
Telephone menus information.
- Notifications.
- Access to the Settings of the touch screen
and digital instrument panel (date/time,
languages, units, etc.).
35
2
Acc ess
Electronic key with remote
control function and built-
in key
Remote control function
The remote control includes a conventional key
that allows the central locking/unlocking of the
vehicle using the door lock and the starting and
switching off of the engine.
Back-up procedures allow the vehicle to be
locked/unlocked in the event of a failure of
the remote control, the central locking, the
battery, etc. For more information on the Back-
up procedures, refer to the corresponding
section.
Integral key
The remote control can be used for the
following functions, depending on version:
- unlocking/locking/deadlocking the vehicle
and the fuel filler flap,
- unlocking – opening/closing the boot,
- remote switching on of the lighting,
- activating/deactivating the alarm,
- locating the vehicle,
- opening/closing the windows,
- closing the sunroof and the blind,
- locating the vehicle,
- activating the vehicle's electronic
immobiliser.
The key built into the remote control can be
used for the following operations, depending
on version:
- unlocking/locking/deadlocking the vehicle,
- activation/deactivation of the mechanical
child lock,
- activation/deactivation of the front
passenger airbag,
- back-up unlocking/locking of the doors.
Without Keyless Entry and Starting
With Keyless Entry and Starting
Unlocking the vehicle
With the remote control
F To unfold or fold the key, press the button.
F To eject the key or put it back in place, pull
and hold the button.
F Press this button to unlock the
vehicle.
Unlocking is signalled by rapid flashing of
the direction indicators for a few seconds.
Depending on version, the door mirrors unfold
and the welcome lighting comes on.
36
Acc ess
Selective unlocking
Driver's door and fuel filler flap
F Press the unlocking button.
F Press it again to unlock the other doors and
the boot.
The complete or selective unlocking and the
alarm deactivation, depending on version,
is confirmed by flashing of the direction
indicators.
Depending on version, the door mirrors unfold.
Opening the windows
With the key
F Turn the key in the driver's door lock
towards the front of the vehicle to unlock.
Selective unlocking and opening
of the tailgate
The settings for the selective tailgate unlocking
and motorised operation are made in the
vehicle configuration menu.
F Make a long press on the button
to unlock the boot and trigger the
motorised opening of the tailgate.
If selective unlocking of the tailgate is
deactivated, pressing the button unlocks
the whole vehicle.
If motorised operation of the tailgate is
deactivated, pressing the button releases
the tailgate.
To lock the vehicle, it is necessary to close
the tailgate again.
Locking the vehicle
With the remote control
F Press this button to lock the
vehicle.
Locking is confirmed by fixed illumination of
the direction indicators for approximately two
seconds. Depending on version, the door
mirrors fold.
If one of the doors or the boot is still open,
the central locking does not work; the vehicle
locks, then immediately unlocks, identifiable by
the locks making a rebound sound.
When the vehicle is locked, if it is
unlocked without the opening of a door
or the boot, it will automatically lock itself
again after thirty seconds.
The automatic folding and unfolding of the
door mirrors can be deactivated via the
vehicle's configuration menu.
With the key
F Turn the key in the driver's door lock
towards the rear of the vehicle to lock it.
Check that the doors and boot are fully
closed.
Closing the windows and sunroof
Maintaining pressure on the locking button
allows the windows and, depending on version,
the sunroof to be closed to the desired position.
This operation also closes the sunroof blind.
Depending on version, holding the
unlocking button pressed for more
than 3 seconds opens the windows.
The windows stop when the button is released.
By default, selective tailgate unlocking is
activated and and motorised operation is
deactivated.
The doors and fuel filler flap remain locked.
37
2
Acc ess
Ensure that no person or object could
prevent the correct closing of the windows
and sunroof.
If, on versions with alarm, you want to
leave the windows and/or sunroof partly
open, you must first deactivate the
volumetric alarm protection.
For more information on the Alarm, refer
to the corresponding section.
Deadlocking
Deadlocking deactivates the exterior
and interior door controls, as well as the
central locking button on the dashboard.
The horn remains operational.
You must therefore never leave anyone
inside the vehicle when it is deadlocked.
If your vehicle is fitted with an alarm,
activation is confirmed by fixed
illumination of the direction indicators for
a few seconds.
With the remote control
F Within 5 seconds of locking the
vehicle, press the button again to
deadlock it.
With the key
F Within 5 seconds of locking the vehicle, turn
the key to the rear again to deadlock it.
Locating your vehicle
This function allows you to identify your vehicle
from a distance, particularly in poor light. Your
vehicle must be locked.
F Press this button. The courtesy
lamps will come on and the
direction indicators will flash for
a few seconds.
Welcome lighting
Availability of this function depends on version.
F Briefly press this button. The
sidelamps, dipped beam
headlamps, number plate lamps
and door mirror spotlamps come
on for 30 seconds.
Pressing again before the end of the timed
period switches off the lamps immediately.
Keyless Entry and
Starting
This system allows the unlocking, locking
and starting of the vehicle, while carrying the
electronic key in the recognition zone "A".
38
Acc ess
The electronic key is also used as
a remote control. For more information
on the Remote control, refer to the
corresponding section.
Unlocking the vehicle
Complete unlocking
F With the electronic key in recognition
zone A, pass your hand behind the door
handle of one of the front doors or press the
tailgate opening control (at the left of the
control).
If the motorised tailgate opening control is
activated, this action triggers its automatic
opening.
Opening the windows
Depending on version, keeping your hand
behind the door handle or maintaining the
press on the tailgate opening control allows the
windows to be opened to the desired position.
Flashing of the direction indicators for a few
seconds signals:
- unlocking of the vehicle for versions without
alarm,
- deactivation of the alarm for other versions.
Depending on version, the door mirrors unfold.
Selective unlocking
Driver's door and fuel flap
F Pass your hand behind the driver's door
handle.
F To unlock the complete vehicle, pass
your hand behind the handle of one of the
passenger doors, with the electronic key
close to the passenger door, or press the
tailgate opening control with the electronic
key close to the rear of the vehicle.
The setting for selective unlocking of
the driver's door is done in the vehicle
configuration menu.
When unlocking the driver's door, flashing
of the direction indicators for a few seconds
signals:
- selective unlocking of the vehicle for
versions without alarm,
- deactivation of the alarm for other versions.
Depending on version, the door mirrors unfold.
Selective unlocking of the
tailgate
F Press the tailgate opening control to unlock
just the tailgate.
The doors remain locked.
If selective unlocking of the tailgate is
deactivated, pressing this control also
unlocks the doors.
Activation or deactivation of selective
unlocking of the tailgate is done in
the Vehicle/Driving menu of the
touch screen.
39
2
Acc ess
If one of the doors or the boot is still open
or if the electronic key for the Keyless
Entry and Starting system has been left
inside the vehicle, the central locking does
not take place.
If the vehicle is unlocked inadvertently
and there is then no action on the doors
or boot, the vehicle will automatically lock
itself again after about 30 seconds.
If fitted to your vehicle, the alarm will also
be reactivated automatically.
The automatic folding and unfolding of the
door mirrors can be deactivated via the
vehicle's configuration menu.
As a safety measure, never leave the
vehicle without taking the electronic key
for the Keyless Entry and Starting system
with you, even for a short period.
Be aware of the risk of theft of the vehicle
when the electronic key for the Keyless
Entry and Starting system is in one of the
defined zones with the vehicle unlocked.
In order to preserve the battery in the
electronic key and the vehicle's battery,
the "hands-free" functions are put into
long-term standby after 21 days without
use. To restore these functions, press
one of the remote control buttons or start
the engine with the electronic key in the
reader.
For more information on Starting/
Switching off the engine with Keyless
Entry and Starting, refer to the
corresponding section.
Locking the vehicle
Normal locking
Closing the windows and the sunroof
Maintaining pressure on the door handle or
the tailgate control allows the windows and,
depending on version, the sunroof to be closed
to the desired position.
This operation also closes the sunroof blind.
F With the electronic key in recognition
zone A, press on the door handle of one of
the front doors (at the markings) or on the
locking control located on the tailgate (on
the right of the control).
It is not possible to lock the vehicle if one of the
electronic keys is left inside the vehicle.
Make sure that no item or person could
prevent the correct closing of the windows
and sunroof.
Be particularly aware of children when
operating the windows.
Illumination of the direction indicators for a few
seconds signals:
- the locking of the vehicle for versions
without alarm,
- the activation of the alarm for other
versions.
Depending on version, the door mirrors fold.
For safety and theft protection reasons,
never leave the electronic key in the
vehicle, even when you are close to it.
40
Acc ess
Accumulations (water, dust, grime, salt
etc.) on the inner surface of the door
handle may affect detection.
If cleaning the inner surface of the door
handle using a cloth does not restore
detection, contact a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
A sudden splash of water (stream of water,
high pressure jet washer, etc.) may be
identified by the system as the desire to
open the vehicle.
Deadlocking
Deadlocking deactivates the exterior
and interior door controls, as well as the
central locking button on the dashboard.
The horn remains operational.
You must therefore never leave anyone
inside the vehicle when it is deadlocked.
F With the electronic key in recognition
zone A, press once with your finger or
thumb on the door handle of one of the front
doors (at the markings) or on the locking
control located on the tailgate (at the right of
the control) to lock the vehicle.
F Within 5 seconds, press the door handle
again to deadlock the vehicle.
Advice
Remote control
The high frequency remote control is
a sensitive system; do not operate it while
it is in your pocket as there is a possibility
that it may unlock the vehicle, without you
being aware of it.
Do not press the buttons of your remote
control out of range of your vehicle.
It might stop working. It will then be
necessary to reinitialise it again.
The remote control does not operate when
the key is in the ignition switch, even when
the ignition is switched off.
Electrical interference
The Keyless Entry and Starting electronic
key may not operate if close to certain
electronic devices: telephone, laptop
computer, strong magnetic fields, etc.
Anti-theft protection
Do not make any modifications to the
electronic engine immobiliser system; this
could cause malfunctions.
For vehicles with an ignition switch, do
not forget to remove the key and turn the
steering wheel to engage the steering
lock.
Locking the vehicle
Driving with the doors locked could make
it more difficult for the emergency services
to enter the vehicle in an emergency.
As a safety precaution (with children on
board), remove the key from the ignition or
take the electronic key when leaving the
vehicle, even for a short time.
Purchasing a second-hand vehicle
Have the key codes memorised by
a CITROËN dealer, to ensure that the
keys in your possession are the only ones
which can start the vehicle.
41
2
Acc ess
Central locking
Manual
F Press this button to operate the central
locking of the vehicle (doors, boot and
fuel filler flap) from inside the vehicle. The
indicator lamp in the button comes on.
F Pressing the button again unlocks the
vehicle completely. The indicator lamp in
the button goes off.
The indicator lamp also goes off when
unlocking one or more doors.
The central locking does not take place if
one of the doors is open.
When locking/deadlocking from the
outside
When the vehicle is locked or deadlocked
from the outside, the red indicator lamp
flashes and the button is inactive.
F After normal locking, pull one of the
interior door controls to unlock the
vehicle.
F After deadlocking, it is necessary to
use the remote control, Keyless Entry
and Starting or the integral key to
unlock the vehicle.
Automatic (anti-intrusion
security)
To activate/deactivate this function (activated
by default):
Transporting long or bulky objects
Pressing the central locking button
unlocks the vehicle.
Above 6 mph (10 km/h), this unlocking is
temporary.
F Press the button until an audible
signal is heard and a message
appears in the screen.
Back-up procedures
Lost keys, remote control,
electronic key
Visit a CITROËN dealer with the vehicle's
registration certificate, your personal
identification documents and if possible, the
label bearing the key code.
The CITROËN dealer will be able to retrieve the
key code and the transponder code required to
order a new key
Complete unlocking/locking
of the vehicle with the key
Use these procedures in the following cases:
- remote control battery discharged,
- remote control fault,
- battery failure,
- vehicle in an area subject to strong
electromagnetic interference.
In the first case, change the remote control
battery.
In the second case, reinitialise the remote
control.
Refer to the corresponding sections.
42
Acc ess
If the vehicle is fitted with an alarm, this
function will not be activated when locking
with the key.
If the alarm is activated, the siren sounds
on opening the door; switch on the ignition
to stop it.
Central locking not
functioning
Use these procedures in the following cases:
- central locking fault,
- battery disconnected or discharged.
In the event of a malfunction with the
central locking system, the battery must
be disconnected to lock the boot and thus
ensure that the vehicle is locked fully.
Driver's door
F Turn the key towards the rear of the vehicle
to lock it, or towards the front to unlock it.
Passenger doors
Unlocking
F Pull the interior door opening handle.
Locking
F Open the door.
F For the rear doors, check that the child
lock is not on. Refer to the corresponding
section.
F Remove the black cap on the edge of the
door (example: right-hand rear door), using
the key.
F Without forcing, insert the key into the
aperture; then, without turning it, move the
latch sideways towards the inside of the
door.
F Remove the key and refit the black cap.
F Close the doors and check from the outside
that the vehicle is locked.
Changing the battery
A message is displayed in the instrument panel
when the battery needs changing.
Version without Keyless Entry and Starting
Battery type: CR1620/3 volts.
F Insert the key in the door lock.
F Turn the key towards the front/rear to lock/
unlock the vehicle.
F Turn the key rearwards again within
5 seconds of locking to deadlock the
vehicle.
For versions without alarm, the lighting of the
direction indicators for a few seconds confirms
that the procedure has completed correctly.
43
2
Acc ess
Version with Keyless Entry and Starting
Battery type: CR2032/3 volts.
F Unclip the cover by inserting a small
screwdriver in the slot and raise the cover.
F Remove the flat battery from its housing.
F Insert the new battery with the correct
polarity and clip the cover onto the housing.
Do not throw remote control batteries
away as they contain metals which are
harmful to the environment. Take them
to an approved collection point.
Reinitialising the remote
control
F Reinitialise the remote control.
For more information on Reinitialising the
remote control, refer to the corresponding
section.
Following replacement of the battery or in
the event of a remote control fault, it may be
necessary to reinitialise the remote control.
If the problem persists, contact
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop as soon as possible.
Version without Keyless Entry
and Starting
F Switch off the ignition.
F Turn the key to position 2 (Ignition on).
F Immediately press the closed padlock
button for a few seconds.
F Switch off the ignition and remove the key
from the switch.
The remote control is now fully operational
again.
Version with Keyless Entry and
Starting
F Place the mechanical key (integral with the
remote control) in the lock to unlock your
vehicle.
F Place the electronic key against the back-up
reader on the steering column and hold it
there until the ignition is switched on.
F With a manual gearbox, place the gear
lever in neutral then depress the clutch
pedal fully.
44
Acc ess
F With an automatic gearbox, from mode P,
fully depress the brake pedal.
F Switch on the ignition by pressing the
"START/STOP" button.
The electronic key is now fully operational
again.
If the fault persists after reinitialisation, contact
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop
without delay.
Doors
Opening
From outside
F After unlocking the vehicle or with the
electronic key of the Keyless Entry and
Starting system in the recognition zone, pull
the door handle.
When selective unlocking is activated, the
first press of the remote control unlocking
button permits unlocking of the driver's
door only.
From inside
F Pull the interior opening control of a front
door; this unlocks the vehicle completely.
When selective unlocking is activated:
- opening the driver's door unlocks the
driver's door only (if the vehicle has not
already been completely unlocked),
- opening one of the passenger doors
unlocks the rest of the vehicle.
The interior opening control on a rear door
does not work if the child lock is on.
For more information on the Child lock,
refer to the corresponding section.
Closing
When a door is not closed correctly:
- with the engine running or the vehicle
moving (speed below 6 mph (10 km/h)), a
message appears in the screen.
- with the vehicle moving (speed above
6 mph (10 km/h)), a message appears in
the screen, accompanied by an audible
signal.
Boot
Opening
F With the vehicle unlocked or with the
electronic key of the Keyless Entry and
Starting system in the recognition zone,
press the left-hand button on the central
tailgate control.
F Lift the tailgate.
When selective unlocking is activated, the
electronic key must be close to the rear of
the vehicle.
45
2
Acc ess
For more information on the Remote control
or on the Keyless Entry and Starting, refer to
the corresponding section.
If there is a fault or if it is difficult to move
the tailgate when opening or closing
it, have it checked as soon as possible
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to prevent the problem
becoming worse, and potentially causing
the tailgate to drop and thereby inflicting
serious injuries.
The tailgate is not designed to support
a bicycle carrier.
Closing
F Lower the tailgate using the interior grab
handle.
If the tailgate is not fully closed:
- with the engine running or the vehicle
moving (speed below 6 mph (10 km/h)), a
message appears in the screen.
- with the vehicle moving (speed above
6 mph (10 km/h)), a message appears in
the screen, accompanied by an audible
signal.
Back-up release
To manually unlock the boot in the event of
a battery or central locking failure.
To unlock the boot
F Fold the rear seats to gain access to the
lock from inside the boot.
F Insert a small screwdriver into hole A of the
lock.
F Move the latch to the left.
To re-lock the boot
If the problem persists, the boot will remain
locked after opening and closing.
Hands-free tailgate
The motorised tailgate must only be operated
with the vehicle stationary.
Check that there is enough space to
allow for the movement of the motorised
tailgate.
Never introduce a finger in the locking
system of the motorised tailgate – risk of
a serious injury!
Safety anti-pinch
The motorised tailgate has an obstacle
detection system that automatically interrupts
and reverses its movement by a few degrees to
allow the obstacle to be cleared.
Please note that this anti-pinch system is not
active at the end of the closing travel (around
1 cm from completely closed).
46
Acc ess
To avoid the risk of injury through pinching
or trapping, before and during operation of
the motorised tailgate:
- ensure that there is no-one close to the
rear of the vehicle,
- monitor the activity of your passengers,
particularly any children.
Bicycle carrier/Towing device
The motorised tailgate is not designed to
support a bicycle carrier.
When installing a bicycle carrier on a towing
device with connection of a cable to the towing
socket, the motorised operation of the tailgate
will be automatically deactivated.
If using a towing device or bicycle carrier not
recommended by CITROËN, it is essential
to deactivate the motorised operation of the
tailgate.
Motorised operation
Activation/deactivation of the
motorised operation of the tailgate is
done in the Driving/Vehicle menu of
the touch screen.
There are several ways of operating the
tailgate:
Opening/Closing
F Press and hold the central button A of the
electronic key.
or
F Press the exterior tailgate control B with the
electronic key on your person.
The tailgate opens, either completely
by default, or to the position memorised
beforehand.
If motorised operation is not activated,
these actions release the tailgate.
The request to open the tailgate with one
of the controls A, B or E enables you to
unlock the vehicle or the tailgate alone
beforehand, if selective unlocking of the
boot is activated.
Closing the tailgate with the "hands-free"
access function enables you to lock the
vehicle.
This function is deactivated by default.
A. using the electronic key of the Keyless
Entry and Starting system,
B. using the exterior tailgate control,
C. using the interior tailgate control,
D. using the control on the dashboard,
E. using the "hands-free" access below the
rear bumper.
or
F Press the interior tailgate control C (closing
only).
or
F Press twice in succession on the dashboard
control D.
or
F With the electronic key on your person, use
the "hands-free" access E by performing a
"kicking" movement below the rear bumper.
The command is confirmed by an audible
signal.
47
2
Acc ess
It is possible to interrupt the operation of
the tailgate at any point.
Pressing one of these controls again
interrupts the movement that is underway.
Following the interruption of a movement,
pressing one of these controls again
reverses the movement.
"Hands-Free Tailgate Access"
The "Hands-Free Tailgate Access"
function is activated/deactivated in
the Driving/Vehicle menu of the
touch screen.
Ensure that you are steady on your
feet before performing the quick foot
movement.
Take care not to touch the exhaust system
which may be hot – risk of burns!
Automatic locking using the "Hands-
Free Tailgate Access" function
Memorising an opening
position
To memorise a position, in order to limit the
motorised tailgate opening angle:
F move the tailgate to the desired position
manually or by pressing the button,
F press button C or the exterior control B
for more than 3 seconds (memorisation is
confirmed by a brief audible signal).
Saving is not available until the height of
opening is more than or equal to 1 metre
between the low position and the high
position of the tailgate.
To delete the memorised position:
F open the tailgate to any position,
F press button C or the exterior control B
for more than 3 seconds (the deletion is
confirmed by a long audible signal).
Manual operation
The tailgate can be manoeuvred by hand, even
with motorised operation activated.
The tailgate must be stationary.
When opening and closing a motorised tailgate
manually, there is no assistance from gas
struts. Resistance to opening and closing is
therefore entirely normal.
This function is deactivated by default.
Press this button to activate/deactivate
automatic locking of the vehicle when closing
the tailgate using the "Hands-Free Tailgate
Access" function (confirmed by lighting/
extinction of the green indicator lamp).
Repeatedly opening and closing the
motorised tailgate can cause overheating
of its electric motor, after which opening
and closing will not be possible.
Allow at least 10 minutes for the electric
motor to cool down before operating the
tailgate again.
If you are unable to wait, operate it
manually.
48
Acc ess
Manual closing of the
motorised tailgate in case
of failure
This operation is only necessary in the case
of failure of the tailgate motor.
If the failure originates from the battery, it is
recommended to recharge it or change it with
the tailgate closed.
In this situation, a significant force may be
needed to close the tailgate.
F Close it gently without slamming, as slowly
as possible, by pushing at the centre of the
tailgate.
Do not lower the tailgate by pushing at one
of its sides – risk of damage!
Precautions in use
To avoid unwanted opening of the tailgate
when using the towing device:
- deactivate the "Hands-Free Tailgate
Access" function in advance in your
vehicle's configuration menu,
- or remove the electronic key from the
recognition zone, with the tailgate
closed.
In wintry conditions
To avoid any operating problems, remove
the snow or wait until the ice melts before
requesting motorised opening of the
tailgate.
When washing
When washing the vehicle in an automatic
car wash, do not forget to lock your vehicle
to avoid the risk of unexpected opening.
Recommendations related
to the "Hands-Free Tailgate
Access" function
If several kicking movements to operate the
tailgate have no effect, wait a few seconds
before trying again.
The function automatically deactivates in heavy
rain or following a build-up of snow.
If it does not work, check that the electronic key
is not exposed to a source of electromagnetic
pollution (smartphone, etc.).
The function may not work correctly with
a prosthetic leg.
The function may not work correctly if your
vehicle is fitted with a towing device.
In some circumstances, the tailgate may open
or close by itself, particularly if:
- you hitch or unhitch a trailer,
- you fit or remove a bicycle carrier,
- you load or unload bicycles from a bicycle
carrier,
- you place or lift something behind the
vehicle,
- an animal approaches the rear bumper,
- you are washing your vehicle,
- your vehicle is being serviced,
- you are accessing the spare wheel
(depending on version).
To avoid such operating problems, keep the
electronic key away from the recognition zone
or deactivate "Hands-Free Tailgate Access".
After installing a towing device, it is
essential to contact a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop so that it is taken
into account by the detection system.
Otherwise, risk of "Hands-Free Tailgate
Access" function failure.
Back-up release
To manually unlock the boot in the event of
a battery or central locking failure.
49
2
Acc ess
Unlocking
F Fold the rear seats to gain access to the
lock from inside the boot.
F Insert a small screwdriver into hole A of the
lock to unlock the tailgate.
F Move the latch to the left.
Locking after closing
If the fault persists after closing again, the boot
will remain locked.
Alarm
System which protects and provides a deterrent
against theft and break-ins. It provides the
following types of monitoring:
- Exterior perimeter:
The system checks whether the vehicle is
opened. The alarm is triggered if anyone
tries to open a door, the boot or the bonnet.
- Interior volumetric:
The system checks for any variation of the
volume in the passenger compartment.
The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks
a window, enters the passenger
compartment or moves inside the vehicle.
- Anti-tilt:
The system checks for any change in
the attitude of the vehicle. The alarm is
triggered if the vehicle is lifted, moved or
knocked.
Self-protection function: the system
checks for the disabling of its own
components. The alarm is triggered
if the battery, button or siren wiring is
disconnected or damaged.
For all work on the alarm system,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Locking the vehicle with full
alarm system
Activation
F Switch off the engine and exit the vehicle.
F Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the
remote control or the "Keyless Entry and
Starting" system.
When the monitoring system is active, the
indicator lamp in the button flashes once per
second and the direction indicators come on for
about 2 seconds.
The exterior perimeter monitoring is activated
after 5 seconds and the interior volumetric and
anti-tilt monitoring after 45 seconds.
If an opening (door, boot, bonnet, etc.)
is incorrectly closed, the vehicle is
not locked, but the exterior perimeter
monitoring will be activated after
45 seconds, at the same time as the
interior volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring.
Deactivation
F Unlock the vehicle using the remote control
or the "Keyless Entry and Starting" system.
With the remote control:
50
Acc ess
The monitoring system is deactivated: the
indicator lamp in the button goes off and the
direction indicators flash for about 2 seconds.
If the vehicle automatically locks itself
again (as happens if a door or the boot
is not opened within 30 seconds of
unlocking), the monitoring system is
automatically reactivated.
Triggering of the alarm
This is indicated by sounding of the siren and
flashing of the direction indicators for thirty
seconds.
The volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring functions
remain active until the tenth successive time
the alarm is triggered.
When the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
control or the "Keyless Entry and Starting"
system, rapid flashing of the indicator lamp
in the button informs you that the alarm was
triggered during your absence. When the
ignition is switched on, this flashing stops
immediately.
Locking the vehicle
with exterior perimeter
monitoring only
short press
long press
Deactivate the interior volumetric monitoring
to avoid unwanted triggering of the alarm in
certain cases such as:
- leaving a pet in the vehicle,
- leaving a window partially open,
- washing your vehicle,
- changing a wheel,
- having your vehicle towed,
- transport by ship.
Deactivating the interior
volumetric and anti-tilt
monitoring
F Get out of the vehicle.
F Immediately lock the vehicle using the
remote control or the "Keyless Entry and
Starting" system.
Reactivating the interior
volumetric and anti-tilt
monitoring
F Deactivate the exterior perimeter monitoring
by unlocking the vehicle using the remote
control or the "Keyless Entry and Starting"
system.
F Reactivate the alarm system normally.
Locking the vehicle without
activating the alarm
F Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key
(integral to the remote control) in the driver's
door lock.
Failure of the remote
control
To deactivate the monitoring functions:
F unlock the vehicle using the key (integral to
the remote control) in the driver's door lock,
F Open the door; this sets off the alarm.
F Upon switching on the ignition the alarm
stops. The button indicator lamp goes off.
F Switch off the ignition and within
10 seconds, press this button until the
indicator lamp is on continuously.
The exterior perimeter monitoring alone is
activated: the indicator lamp flashes once per
second.
To take effect, this deactivation must be carried
out after each time the ignition is switched off.
51
2
Acc ess
Operating fault
When the ignition is switched on, fixed
illumination of the indicator lamp in the button
indicates a fault with the system.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
Electric windows
Manual operation
To open or close the window, press or pull the
switch gently, without exceeding the point of
resistance. The window stops as soon as the
switch is released.
Automatic operation
F To open/close the window, press/pull the
switch beyond the resistance point: the
window opens/closes completely when the
switch is released.
Operating the switch again stops the movement
of the window.
The electric window switches remain
operational for approximately 45 seconds
after switching off the ignition.
Once this time has elapsed, the electric
windows will not operate. To reactivate
them, switch the ignition on again.
Deactivating the rear
controls for the rear
windows
1. Left-hand front.
2. Right-hand front.
3. Right-hand rear.
4. Left-hand rear.
5. Deactivation of the electric window
controls located at the rear seats.
Safety anti-pinch
When the window rises and meets an obstacle,
it stops and immediately partially lowers again.
The red indicator lamp in the button comes
on, accompanied by a message confirming
activation of the system. It remains on for as
long as the deactivation is maintained.
Use of the rear electric windows from the
driver's controls remains possible.
For your children's safety, press switch
5 to prevent operation of the rear windows
irrespective of their positions.
Reinitialising the electric
windows
Following reconnection of the battery, or if
the windows move abnormally, the anti-pinch
function must be reinitialised.
The safety anti-pinch function is not active
during these operations.
For each of the windows:
F Lower the window fully, then raise it; it will
rise in steps of a few centimetres each time
the control is pressed. Repeat the operation
until the window is fully closed.
F Continue to pull the switch for at least one
second after reaching the window closed
position.
52
Acc ess
Panoramic opening
sunroof
The panoramic sunroof consists of a movable
glass panel that slides over the roof and a blind
that can be opened independently. Opening the
sunroof automatically opens the blind.
F To operate the panoramic opening sunroof
or the blind, use the buttons in the roof
console.
A. Sunroof blind control
B. Sunroof control
The sunroof or blind can be operated when the
ignition is turned on (if the battery is charged
enough), with the engine running, in STOP
mode of Stop & Start, and up to 45 seconds
after turning off the ignition or after locking the
vehicle.
Before operating the sunroof or blind
control buttons, ensure that no object or
person might prevent the movement.
Be particularly aware of children when
operating the sunroof or blind.
If the sunroof or blind meets an obstacle
during operation, you must reverse the
movement of the sunroof or blind. To do
this, press the switch concerned.
The driver must ensure that passengers
use the sunroof and blind correctly.
Anti-pinch system
If the sunroof or blind encounters an obstacle
when closing, the movement is automatically
reversed.
The roof anti-pinch system is designed to be
effective at speeds of up to 75 mph (120 km/h).
Precautions
Do not put your head or arms through
the open sunroof when driving – risk of
serious injury!
Ensure that any luggage or accessories
carried on the roof bars do not interfere
with the movement of the sunroof.
Do not place heavy loads on the movable
glass panel of the sunroof.
If the sunroof is wet, following a shower
or washing the vehicle, wait until it is
completely dry before opening.
Do not operate the sunroof if it is covered
by snow or ice – risk of damage!
Use only plastic scrapers to remove snow
or ice from the sunroof.
If an electric window meets an obstacle
during operation, the movement of the
window must be reversed. To do this,
press the switch concerned.
When the driver operates the passengers'
electric window switches, it is important
to ensure that nothing can prevent the
window from closing properly.
It is important to ensure that the
passengers use the electric windows
correctly.
Be particularly aware of children when
operating the windows.
Be aware of passengers and/or other
persons present when closing the
windows using the electronic key or the
"Keyless Entry and Starting" system.
53
2
Acc ess
Check the condition of the sunroof seals
regularly (presence of dust or deposits,
dead leaves, etc.).
If using a car wash, check that the sunroof
is correctly closed in advance and keep
the tip of the high-pressure lance at least
30 centimetres from the seals.
Never leave the vehicle with the sunroof
open.
Operation
When opening the sunroof fully, the movable
glass moves to a partially open position, then
slides over the roof. All intermediate positions
are allowed.
Depending on the speed of the vehicle,
the partially open position may vary to
improve the acoustics.
Opening and closing
F To open the sunroof or the blind, use the
part of the button located towards the rear.
F To close the sunroof or the blind, use the
part of the button located towards the front.
Operation of buttons
F Pressing a button beyond its point of
resistance directly opens or closes the
sunroof fully.
F Pressing the button down again stops the
current movement.
F If you hold a button (without going beyond
the point of resistance), the movement of
the sunroof or blind stops when you release
the button.
F When the sunroof is closed: pressing once
without passing the point of resistance
moves it to a partially open position.
F When the sunroof is partially open: pressing
once without passing the point of resistance
opens or closes it fully.
You can close the sunroof and windows,
then the blind, by pressing and holding the
door locking control. The movement stops
when you release the locking control.
Closing of the blind is limited by the
position of the sunroof: the blind cannot go
further than the front of the mobile glass.
During simultaneous movements of the
sunroof and blind, the blind automatically
stops or resumes movement depending on
the position of the sunroof.
Reinitialisation
Following reconnection of the battery or in
the event of a fault or jerky movement of the
sunroof or blind, reinitialisation is required.
F Check that nothing is interfering with the
sunroof or blind and that the seals are
clean.
F With the ignition on, fully close the sunroof
and blind.
F Press and hold the front part of button B,
until the sunroof and blind move slightly,
then hold for a further 1 second before
releasing.
F Wait 2 seconds and then press and hold
the front part of button B. The blind and the
sunroof will open and close, one after the
other. When both are completely closed
again, hold for a further 2 seconds and
release.
If there is an operating fault, restart the
whole procedure.
54
Ease of use and comfort
Correct driving position
Before taking to the road and to make the most
of the ergonomic layout of the instruments and
controls, carry out these adjustments in the
following order:
- the height of the head restraint,
- the seat backrest angle,
- the seat cushion height,
- the longitudinal position of the seat,
- the height and reach of the steering wheel,
- the rear view mirror and door mirrors.
Once these adjustments have been made,
check the instrument panel can be viewed
correctly from your driving position.
Front seats
Caution when moving the
front seats
For safety reasons, only adjust seats
when the vehicle is stationary.
Before moving the seat backwards, ensure
that there is no person or object that might
prevent the full travel of the seat.
There is a risk of trapping or pinching
passengers if present in the rear seats or
of jamming the seat if large objects are
placed on the floor behind the seat.
Front head restraints
Adjusting the height
The adjustment is correct when the upper
edge of the head restraint is level with the
top of the head.
'Two-way' adjustment model
'Four-way' adjustment model
Upwards:
F pull the head restraint up to the desired
position; the head restraint can be felt to
click into position.
Downwards:
F press lug A and push the head restraint
down to the desired position.
Upwards:
F pull the head restraint up to the desired
position; the head restraint can be felt to
click into position.
3
55
Ease of use and comfort
Adjusting the angle
'Four-way' adjustment model
Downwards:
F press and hold button B and push the head
restraint down to the desired position.
F press and hold button B and push the
lower part of the head restraint forwards or
backwards.
Removing a head restraint
F Press the lug(s) A (depending on version)
to unlock the head restraint and remove it
completely,
F Stow the head restraint securely.
Retting a head restraint
F Introduce the head restraint rods into the
guides in the seat backrest.
F Push the head restraint down as far as it will
go.
F Press the lug(s) A (depending on version) to
release the head restraint and push it down.
F Adjust the height of the head restraint.
Never drive with the head restraints
removed; they should be in place and
correctly adjusted for the occupant of the
seat.
Manually-adjusted seats
F Pull the head restraint up as far as it will go.
Longitudinal
F Raise the control bar and slide the seat
forwards or backwards.
F Turn the knob forwards or rearwards.
Lumbar support
(driver only)
F Turn the knob forwards or backwards to
obtain the desired level of lumbar support.
Backrest angle
F Release the bar to lock the seat in position
on one of the runners.
56
Ease of use and comfort
Height
F Pull the control upwards to raise or push
it downwards to lower, as many times as
necessary to obtain the position required.
Electrically-adjusted seats
To avoid discharging the battery, carry
out these adjustments with the engine
running.
Longitudinal adjustment
Backrest angle
F Tilt the control forwards or rearwards.
Electric lumbar adjustment
The control allows independent adjustment of
the depth and vertical position of the lumbar
support.
F Press and hold the front or rear
of the control to increase or
reduce the lumbar support.
F Press and hold the top or bottom
of the control to raise or lower the
lumbar support area.
Seat cushion height and angle
Comfort functions
Storing driving positions
(Depending on the country of sale.)
Associated with the electrically-adjusted
driver's seat, this function allows two driving
positions to be memorised, to make these
adjustments easier if there are frequent driver
changes.
It takes account of the electric adjustments of
the seat and the door mirrors.
F Push the control forwards or rearwards to
slide the seat.
F Tilt the rear of the control upwards or
downwards to obtain the required height.
F Tilt the front of the control upwards or
downwards to obtain the required angle.
3
57
Ease of use and comfort
Using buttons M/1/2
F Take your seat and switch on the ignition.
F Adjust your seat and the door mirrors.
F Press button M, then press button 1 or
2 within 4 seconds.
An audible signal confirms the memorisation.
Memorising a new position cancels the
previous position.
Recalling a stored position
With the ignition on or engine running
F Press button 1 or 2 to recall the
corresponding position.
An audible signal sounds when the adjustment
is finished.
You can interrupt the current movement by
pressing button M, 1 or 2 or by using one of the
seat adjustment controls.
A stored position cannot be recalled while
driving.
Recalling stored positions is deactivated
45 seconds after switching off the ignition.
Heated seats
F Press the button corresponding to your
seat.
F Each press changes the level of heating; the
corresponding number of indicator lamps
come on (low/medium/high).
F Press the button again until all the indicator
lamps are off.
The state of the system stays in the memory
when the ignition is switched off.
Do not use the function when the seat is
not occupied.
Reduce the intensity of the heating as
soon as possible.
When the seat and passenger
compartment have reached an adequate
temperature, stop the function; reducing
the consumption of electrical current
reduces fuel consumption.
Prolonged use is not recommended for
persons with sensitive skin.
There is a risk of burns for people whose
perception of heat is impaired (illness,
taking medication, etc.).
There is a risk of overheating the system if
material with insulating properties is used,
such as cushions or seat covers.
Do not use the system:
- if wearing damp clothing,
- if child seats are fitted.
To avoid breaking the heating element in
the seat:
- do not place heavy objects on the seat,
- do not kneel or stand on the seat,
- do not place sharp objects on the seat,
- do not spill liquids onto the seat.
To avoid the risk of short-circuit:
- do not use liquid products for cleaning
the seat,
- never use the heating function when
the seat is damp.
Multi-point massage
System with a choice of type of massage and
adjustment of its intensity.
This system operates with the engine running,
as well as in STOP mode of Stop & Start.
58
Ease of use and comfort
The massage settings are adjusted in the touch
screen.
The function is activated using the button on
the front seat.
F Press this button; its indicator
lamp comes on.
The function is activated immediately with the
last settings memorised and the settings page
is displayed in the touch screen.
If the settings suit you and you make no
changes, the display returns to its original
state.
If you want to change the settings:
F select another type of massage from the
five offered,
F select a massage intensity from the three
levels offered: "1" (Low), "2" (Normal) or "3"
(High).
The changes are applied immediately.
Once activated, the system starts a one hour
massage cycle, made up of sequences of
6 minutes of massage followed by 4 minutes
at rest.
The system stops automatically at the end of
the cycle; the indicator lamp for the button goes
off.
Steering wheel adjustment
F When stationary, pull the control A to
release the steering wheel.
F Adjust the height and reach to suit your
driving position.
F Push the control A to lock the steering
wheel.
For safety reasons, these adjustments
must only be carried out with the vehicle
stationary.
Mirrors
Door mirrors
Each fitted with an adjustable mirror glass
providing the lateral rearward vision necessary
for overtaking or parking.
Demisting/Defrosting
If fitted to your vehicle, the
demisting/defrosting of the door
mirrors is done by pressing the rear
screen defrosting control.
Adjustment
They can also be folded for parking in narrow
spaces.
For more information on Rear screen demist –
defrost, refer to the corresponding section.
F Move control A to the right or to the left to
select the corresponding mirror.
F Move control B in any of the four directions
to adjust.
F Return control A to its central position.
3
59
Ease of use and comfort
As a safety measure, the mirrors should
be adjusted to reduce the blind spots.
The objects that you see in the mirrors are
in fact closer than they appear.
Take this into account in order to
correctly judge the distance of vehicles
approaching from behind.
Folding
F From outside: lock the vehicle using the
remote control or the key.
F From inside: with the
ignition on, pull the control
A from the central position
rearwards.
If the mirrors are folded using control
A, they will not unfold when the vehicle
is unlocked. It will be necessary to pull
control A again.
Unfolding
F From outside: unlock the vehicle using the
remote control or the key.
F From inside: with the ignition on, pull
the control A from the central position
rearwards.
The folding and unfolding of the door
mirrors when locking or unlocking the
vehicle can be deactivated via the vehicle
configuration menu.
If necessary, the mirrors can be folded
manually.
Automatic tilting in reverse gear
System which automatically tilts the mirrors
downwards to assist with parking manoeuvres
in reverse gear.
With the engine running, on engaging reverse
gear, the mirror glasses tilt downwards.
They return to their initial position:
- a few seconds after coming out of reverse
gear,
- once the speed of the vehicle exceeds
6 mph (10 km/h),
- on switching off the engine.
This function is activated/
deactivated via the "Vehicle
settings" tab in the Driving/Vehicle
menu of the touch screen.
Rear view mirror
Equipped with an anti-dazzle system, which
darkens the mirror glass and reduces the
nuisance to the driver caused by the sun,
headlamps from other vehicles, etc.
Manual model
Adjustment
F Adjust the mirror so that the glass is
directed correctly in the "day" position.
Day/night position
F Pull the lever to change to the "night" anti-
dazzle position.
F Push the lever to change to the normal
"day" position.
60
Ease of use and comfort
Rear seats
The 3 seats of the 2
nd
row are independent
and of the same width. Their backrests are
adjustable to adapt the boot load space.
Rear head restraints
The rear head restraints can be removed.
To remove a head restraint:
F pull the head restraint as far up as it will go,
F press the lugs A to release the head
restraint and remove it completely,
F stow the head restraint.
To refit a head restraint:
F insert the head restraint rods into the guides
in the corresponding seat backrest,
F push the head restraint down as far as it will
go,
F press the lugs A to release the head
restraint and push it fully down.
Never drive with passengers seated at
the rear when the head restraints are
removed; they must be in place and in the
high position.
Longitudinal adjustment
Seat operations must only be done with
the vehicle stationary.
Each seat can be adjusted individually.
F Raise the control and slide the seat
forwards or backwards.
They have two positions:
- a high position, for when the seat is in use:
F pull the head restraint fully up.
- a low position, for stowing, when the seat
is not in use:
F press the lugs A to release the head
restraint and push it fully down.
Once the backrest is folded, it is no longer
possible to slide the seat.
Automatic "electrochrome" model
This system automatically and progressively
changes between day and night use by means
of a sensor measuring the light coming from the
rear of the vehicle.
In order to ensure optimum visibility during
your manoeuvres, the mirror lightens
automatically when reverse gear is
engaged.
3
61
Ease of use and comfort
Backrest angle
Several adjustment positions are possible.
F Move the seat forward.
F Pull the strap forward, then tilt the backrest
to the desired position.
Folding the backrests
The backrests must only be operated with
the vehicle stationary.
Preliminary operations:
F lower the head restraints,
F if necessary, move the front seats forward,
F check that no person or object could
interfere with the folding of the backrests
(clothing, luggage, etc.),
Repositioning the backrests
Before raising the backrest of the outer
seats to the normal position, please
retrieve the seat belt and hold it during the
operation.
F check that the outer seat belts are properly
tensioned along the pillars, that the central
belt is stowed and that the tongues of the
three belts are correctly in the storage
position.
F Pull the strap 1 firmly to release the
backrest.
F Guide the backrest 2 down to the horizontal
position.
F Put the backrest 2 in the upright position
and push firmly to latch it home.
Please note: an incorrectly latched
backrest compromises the safety of
passengers in the event of sudden braking
or an impact.
The contents of the boot may be thrown
forward – risk of serious injury!
F Check that the release strap 1 has correctly
returned to its position.
F Ensure that the outer seat belts are not
trapped during the operation.
Heating and Ventilation
Air entry
The air circulating in the passenger
compartment is filtered and originates either
from the outside via the grille located at the
base of the windscreen, or from the inside in air
recirculation mode.
Controls
The controls are accessible in the "Air
conditioning" menu of the touch screen and
are also grouped together on the control panel
of the centre console.
62
Ease of use and comfort
Air distribution
6. Air outlets to the rear footwells.
7. Adjustable air vents with blower,
depending on version.
Advice
1. Windscreen demisting/defrosting vents.
2. Front side window demisting/defrosting
vents.
3. Side adjustable and closable air vents.
4. Central adjustable and closable air vents.
5. Air outlets to the front footwells.
Using the ventilation and air
conditioning system
F To ensure that the air is distributed
evenly, keep the external air intake
grilles at the base of the windscreen,
the nozzles, the vents, the air outlets
and the air extractor in the boot free
from obstructions.
F Do not cover the sunshine sensor,
located on the dashboard; this is used
for regulation of the automatic air
conditioning system.
F Operate the air conditioning system for
at least 5 to 10 minutes once or twice
a month to keep it in perfect working
order.
F If the system does not produce cold air,
switch it off and contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
When towing the maximum load on
a steep gradient in high temperatures,
switching off the air conditioning increases
the available engine power and so
improves the towing ability.
Avoid driving for too long with the
ventilation off and prolonged operation
with recirculation of interior air – risk of
misting and deterioration of the air quality!
If the interior temperature is very high
after the vehicle has stood for a long
time in the sunshine, air the passenger
compartment for a few moments.
Put the air flow control at a setting high
enough to quickly change the air in the
passenger compartment.
The condensation created by the air
conditioning results in a discharge of water
under the vehicle which is perfectly normal.
3
63
Ease of use and comfort
Servicing the ventilation and air
conditioning system
F Ensure that the cabin filter is in good
condition and have the filter elements
replaced regularly.
We recommend the use of a combined
cabin filter. Thanks to its special active
additive, it contributes to the purification of
the air breathed by the occupants and the
cleanliness of the passenger compartment
(reduction of allergic symptoms, bad
odours and greasy deposits).
F To ensure correct operation of the air
conditioning system, have it checked
according to the recommendations in
the Maintenance and Warranty Guide.
Stop & Start
The heating and air conditioning systems
only work when the engine is running.
Temporarily deactivate the Stop &
Start system to maintain a comfortable
temperature in the passenger
compartment.
For more information on Stop & Start,
refer to the corresponding section.
Manual air conditioning
Press the Air conditioning menu
button located under the touch
screen to display the system
controls page.
The air conditioning system operates only with
the engine running.
Temperature adjustment
F Press one of the arrows 6 to decrease (blue)
or increase (red) the value.
The value indicated corresponds to a level of
comfort and not to a precise temperature.
For maximum cooling or heating of the
passenger compartment, press the
temperature setting button down or up
until LO or HI is displayed.
Air flow adjustment
F Press one of the buttons 5 to increase (+) or
decrease (-) the speed of the ventilation fan.
The air flow symbol (a fan) is filled in
progressively as the speed of the fan is
increased.
By reducing the air flow to a minimum, you are
stopping ventilation.
Avoid driving for too long without
ventilation – risk of condensation and
deterioration of air quality!
1. Automatic visibility programme.
2. Recirculation of interior air.
3. Rear screen demisting – defrosting.
4. System off.
5. Air flow adjustment.
6. Temperature adjustment.
7. Air distribution adjustment.
8. Air conditioning on/off.
9. Maximum air conditioning.
64
Ease of use and comfort
Air distribution adjustment
You can vary the air distribution in the
passenger compartment using the three
buttons 7.
Windscreen and side windows.
Central and side air vents.
Footwells.
Each press on a button activates or deactivates
the function. The indicator lamp is on when the
button is activated. For a uniform distribution
of air in the passenger compartment, the three
buttons can be activated simultaneously.
Maximum air conditioning
The system automatically adjusts the
temperature setting to the lowest possible, the
air distribution towards the centre and outer
vents, the air flow to maximum.
F Press button 9 to activate/deactivate the
function; its indicator lamp comes on/goes
off.
Automatic visibility
programme
For more information on the button 1
"Automatic Visibility Programme", refer to
the section "Front demist – defrost".
Air conditioning on/off
The air conditioning is designed to operate
effectively in all seasons, with the windows
closed.
It enables you to:
- lower the temperature in summer,
- increase the effectiveness of the demisting
in winter, above 3°C.
F Press button 8 to activate/deactivate the air
conditioning system.
When the indicator lamp is on, the air
conditioning function is activated.
The air conditioning does not operate when
the air flow adjustment is inhibited.
To obtain cool air more quickly, you can
use recirculation of the interior air for a few
moments. Then return to the intake of
exterior air.
Switching off the air conditioning may result
in some discomfort (humidity, misting).
System switch-off
Avoid driving for long periods with
the system off – risk of misting and
deterioration of air quality!
Pressing any button reactivates the
system with the settings that were in use
before the deactivation.
F Press button 4; its indicator lamp comes
on and all the other indicator lamps of the
system go off.
This action deactivates all functions of the air
conditioning system.
Temperature is no longer regulated. A slight
flow of air can still be felt, resulting from the
forward movement of the vehicle.
Dual-zone automatic air
conditioning
Press the Air conditioning menu
button located under the touch
screen to display the system
controls page.
3
65
Ease of use and comfort
11. Access to the secondary page.
12. Passenger compartment pre-conditioning
(depending on version).
13. Selection of adjustment for the automatic
comfort programme (Soft/Normal/Fast).
14. Mono-zone/Dual-zone.
15. "AQS" (Air Quality System) function
(depending on version).
The air conditioning system operates with
the engine running, but the ventilation and its
controls are available with the ignition on.
Operation of the air conditioning and regulation
of temperature, air flow and air distribution
in the passenger compartment are regulated
automatically.
Temperature adjustment
The driver and front passenger can each set
the temperature independently of one another.
F Press one of the buttons 6 to decrease
(blue) or increase (red) the value.
1. Automatic visibility programme.
2. Recirculation of interior air.
3. Rear screen demisting – defrosting.
4. System off.
5. Air flow adjustment.
6. Temperature adjustment.
7. Air distribution adjustment.
8. Air conditioning on/off.
9. Maximum air conditioning.
10. Activation of automatic comfort
programme.
The value indicated corresponds to a level of
comfort and not to a precise temperature.
It is recommended that you avoid a difference
of more than 3 in the settings for left and right.
For maximum cooling or heating of the
passenger compartment, press the
temperature setting button down or up
until LO or HI is displayed.
Automatic comfort
programme
F Press button 10 "AUTO" to activate
automatic mode of the air conditioning
system.
When the indicator lamp in the button is on, the
air conditioning system operates automatically:
the system manages the temperature, air
flow and air distribution in the passenger
compartment in an optimum way according to
the comfort level you have selected.
It is possible to adjust the intensity of the
automatic comfort programme by choosing one
of the settings offered in the secondary page,
accessible from button 11 "OPTIONS".
To change the current setting, shown by
illumination of the corresponding indicator
lamp, press button 13 repeatedly until the
desired mode is displayed:
"Soft": provides soft and quiet operation by
limiting air flow.
66
Ease of use and comfort
"Normal": offers the best compromise between
a comfortable temperature and quiet operation
(default setting).
"Fast": provides strong and effective air flow.
Use the "Normal" or "Fast" modes to ensure
the comfort of passengers in the rear seats.
This setting is associated with automatic mode
only. However, on deactivation of AUTO mode,
the indicator lamp for the last setting remains
on.
Changing the setting does not reactivate AUTO
mode if this was deactivated.
In cold weather with the engine cold, the
air flow is increased gradually until the
comfort setting has been reached, in order
to limit the delivery of cold air into the
passenger compartment.
On entering the vehicle, if the interior
temperature is much colder or warmer
than the comfort setting requested, there
is no need to alter the value displayed
to more quickly reach the required level
of comfort. The system automatically
corrects the temperature difference as
quickly as possible.
Automatic visibility
programme
For more information on the button 1
"Automatic Visibility Programme", refer to
the section "Front demist – defrost".
"Air Quality System" (AQS)
function
Using a pollution sensor, this function
automatically activates recirculation of the
interior air once a certain level of polluting
substances in the exterior air is detected.
When the air quality returns to a satisfactory
level, recirculation of interior air is automatically
deactivated.
This function is not designed to detect
unpleasant odours.
Recirculation is automatically activated when
the front screenwash is used or when reverse
gear is engaged.
The function does not operate if the exterior
temperature is below 5°C, to avoid the risk of
misting of the windscreen and side windows.
To activate or deactivate the function, go
to the secondary page by using button 11
"OPTIONS", then press button 15.
Manual control
You can manually adjust one or more of these
functions, while retaining automatic control of
the other functions by the system:
- air flow, button 5,
- air distribution, button 7,
As soon as you change a setting, the indicator
lamp for the button 10 "AUTO" goes out.
F Press button 10 again to reactivate the
automatic comfort programme.
Air ow adjustment
F Press one of the buttons 5 to increase (+) or
decrease (-) the fan speed.
The air flow symbol (a fan) is filled in
progressively as the speed of the fan is
increased.
By reducing the air flow to minimum, you are
stopping ventilation.
"OFF" is displayed alongside the fan.
Avoid driving for too long without
ventilation – risk of condensation and
deterioration of air quality!
3
67
Ease of use and comfort
Air distribution adjustment
You can vary the air distribution in the passenger
compartment using the three buttons 7.
Windscreen and side windows.
Central and side air vents.
Footwells.
Each press on a button activates or deactivates
the function. The indicator lamp is on when the
button is activated. For a uniform distribution
of air in the passenger compartment, the three
buttons can be activated simultaneously.
In AUTO mode, the indicator lamps in all three
buttons 7 are off.
Air conditioning on/off
The air conditioning is designed to operate
effectively in all seasons, with the windows
closed.
It enables you to:
- lower the temperature in summer,
- increase the effectiveness of the demisting
in winter, above 3°C.
F Press button 8 to activate/deactivate the air
conditioning system.
When the indicator lamp is on, the air
conditioning function is activated.
The air conditioning does not operate
when the air flow adjustment is inhibited.
To obtain cool air more quickly, you can
use recirculation of the interior air for
a few moments. Then return to the intake
of exterior air.
Switching off the air conditioning may
result in some discomfort (humidity,
misting).
Mono-zone/Dual-zone
The passenger temperature setting can be
linked to the driver's setting (mono-zone
function).
It is available in the secondary page by
pressing button 11 "OPTIONS".
F Press button 14 to activate the "MONO"
function; its status is displayed as "ON".
The function is automatically deactivated if the
passenger uses their temperature adjustment
buttons (dual-zone function).
Ventilation with the ignition on
When the ignition is switched on, you can
use the ventilation system to adjust the air
flow 5 and air distribution 7 settings in the
passenger compartment, for a period which
depends on the battery charge.
System switch-off
F Press button 4.
Its indicator lamp comes on and all other
indicator lamps for the system go off.
This action deactivates all functions of the air
conditioning system.
By reducing the air flow 5 to a minimum, you
are stopping ventilation.
Temperature is no longer regulated. A slight
flow of air can still be felt, resulting from the
forward movement of the vehicle.
This function does not allow the operation of
the air conditioning system.
Recirculation of interior air
The intake of exterior air prevents the formation
of mist on the windscreen and side windows.
Recirculation of the interior air isolates the
passenger compartment from outside odours
and fumes and allows the temperature required
in the passenger compartment to be reached
more rapidly.
F Press this button to activate/
deactivate the function (confirmed
by the illumination/extinction of the
indicator lamp).
The system activates automatically when
reverse gear is engaged.
68
Ease of use and comfort
Front demist – defrost
Automatic visibility
programme
The automatic visibility programme allows the
windscreen and side windows to be demisted
or defrosted as quickly as possible.
F Press this button to activate/
deactivate the function.
When the indicator lamp is on, the function is
activated.
The system automatically manages the air
conditioning (depending on version), air
flow and air intake, and provides optimum
distribution towards the windscreen and side
windows.
The system allows the manual modification of
air flow without causing automatic deactivation
of the automatic visibility programme.
With Stop & Start, when demisting –
defrosting has been activated, STOP
mode is not available.
In wintry conditions, remove all snow or
ice on the camera on the windscreen
before moving off.
Otherwise, this can affect the function
of the equipment associated with the
camera.
Heated windscreen
In cold weather, this system heats the bottom of
the windscreen, as well as the areas alongside
the windscreen pillars.
Without changing the settings for the air
conditioning system, it allows faster release
of the windscreen wiper blades when they
are frozen to the windscreen and helps avoid
the accumulation of snow resulting from the
operation of the windscreen wipers.
Switching on/off
F With the engine running, press this button to
activate/deactivate the function (confirmed
by the illumination/extinction of the indicator
lamp).
The function is active as soon as the outside
temperature drops below 0°C. It is deactivated
automatically each time the engine is switched
off.
Rear screen demist –
defrost
On/Off
F Press this button to demist/defrost
the rear screen and, depending
on version, the door mirrors
(confirmed by the illumination/
extinction of the indicator lamp).
Demisting/defrosting switches off automatically
to prevent an excessive consumption of
current.
3
69
Ease of use and comfort
Switch off the demisting/defrosting of the
rear screen and door mirrors as soon as
possible to reduce fuel consumption.
Rear screen demisting – defrosting can
only be operated when the engine is
running.
Additional Heating/
Ventilation
Heating
This is an additional and separate system
which heats the passenger compartment and
improves defrosting performance.
This indicator lamp is lit while the
system is programmed or set in
operation remotely via the remote
control.
It flashes during the whole duration
of the heating and goes off at the end
of the heating cycle or when stopped
using the remote control.
Ventilation
This system allows ventilation of the passenger
compartment with exterior air to improve the
temperature experienced on entering the
vehicle in summer.
Programming
You can programme the heating or ventilation
to come on using the second page of the "Air
conditioning" menu of the touch screen.
F Press the "Air conditioning"
menu.
F Press the "OPTIONS" tab.
F Press "Temperature
programming".
F Press the "Parameters" tab to select
"Heating" mode to heat the engine and
passenger compartment or "Ventilation"
mode to ventilate the passenger
compartment.
F Press the "Status" tab to activate/deactivate
the system.
F Then programme/preset the activation time
for each selection.
F Press "OK" to confirm.
Long range remote control
This enables you to switch the heating in
the passenger compartment on or off from
a distance.
The range of the remote control is about
0.6 miles (1 km) in open country.
Switching on
F Pressing and holding this button
starts the heating immediately
(confirmed by the temporary
illumination of the green indicator
lamp).
70
Ease of use and comfort
Changing the battery
If the indicator lamp in the remote control
becomes orange, the state of charge of the
battery is low.
If the indicator lamp is not on, the battery is
discharged.
F Use a coin to unscrew the cap and replace
the battery.
Do not throw remote control batteries
away as they contain metals which are
harmful to the environment. Take them
to an approved collection point.
The maximum heating period is about
45 minutes depending on the climatic
conditions.
The additional heating system is powered
by the fuel in the vehicle's fuel tank.
Before use, ensure that there is enough
fuel in the tank.
If the tank level is on reserve, the system
cannot be used.
The ventilation is activated provided that
the battery is sufficiently charged.
The heating is activated provided that:
- the battery is sufficiently charged,
- the fuel level is adequate,
- the engine has been started since the
previous heating cycle.
To avoid the risks of poisoning or
asphyxia, the programmable heating must
not be used, even for short periods, in
a closed environment such as a garage or
workshop which is not equipped with an
exhaust gas extraction system.
Do not park the vehicle on a flammable
surface (dry grass, dead leaves, paper,
etc.) – risk of fire!
Glazed surfaces such as the rear screen
or windscreen can become very hot in
places.
Never put objects on these surfaces;
never touch these surfaces – risk of burns!
Always switch off the additional heating
while refuelling – risk of fire or explosion!
The indicator lamp in the remote control
flashes for about 2 seconds if the vehicle
has not received the signal.
You should then move to a different
location and repeat the command.
Switching o
F Pressing and holding this button
stops the heating immediately
(confirmed by the temporary
illumination of the red indicator
lamp).
3
71
Ease of use and comfort
Front ttings
6. USB socket
Cigarette lighter/12 V accessory socket
(120W)
7. Storage compartment
8. Storage compartment or Wireless charger
9. Cup holders
10. Front armrest with storage compartment
11. USB charger socket
Sun visor
F With the ignition on, raise the concealing
flap; the mirror is illuminated automatically.
This sun visor is also equipped with a ticket
holder.
Glove box
F To open the glove box, raise the handle.
The glove box is lit when the lid is opened.
1. Grab handle
2. Sun visor
3. Storage compartment below the steering
wheel
Card holder
4. Illuminated glove box
5. Door pockets
It houses the front passenger airbag
deactivation switch.
Never drive with the glove box open when
a passenger is at the front – it may cause
injury during sharp deceleration!
72
Ease of use and comfort
Cigarette lighter/12 V
accessory socket(s)
F To use the cigarette lighter, press it in
and wait a few seconds until it pops out
automatically.
F To use a 12 V accessory (max. power:
120 W), remove the cigarette lighter and
connect an appropriate adapter.
You can use this socket to connect a telephone
charger, a bottle warmer, etc.
After use, put the cigarette lighter back into
place straight away.
The connection of an electrical device
not approved by CITROËN, such as
a USB charger, may adversely affect the
operation of vehicle electrical systems,
causing faults such as poor radio
reception or interference with displays in
the screens.
USB sockets
The USB socket located at the front
also allows a smartphone to be
connected by MirrorLink
TM
, Android
Auto
®
or CarPlay
®
, so that certain
smartphone applications can be used
on the touch screen.
When the USB socket is used, the
portable device charges automatically.
While charging, a message is displayed
if the power consumption of the portable
device exceeds the amperage supplied by
the vehicle.
For more information on how to use this
equipment, refer to the Audio equipment
and telematics section.
Wireless smartphone
charger
It allows the wireless charging of a portable
device, such as a smartphone, using the
principle of magnetic induction, based on the Qi
1.1 standard.
The portable device to be charged must be
compatible with the Qi standard, either by
design or by using a compatible holder or shell.
The charging area is identified by the Qi
symbol.
They allow the connection of a portable device,
such as an iPod
®
-type digital audio player, to
charge the device.
To achieve the best results, it is necessary to
use a cable made or approved by the device
manufacturer.
These applications can be managed using the
steering mounted controls or those of the audio
system.
3
73
Ease of use and comfort
Operation
The charger works with the engine running and
in STOP mode of Stop & Start.
Charging is managed by the smartphone.
For versions with Keyless Entry and Starting,
operation of the charger may be interrupted
when opening a door or switching off the
ignition.
Charging
F With the charging area clear, place a device
at its centre.
The system only supports charging one
portable device at a time.
Once the portable device is detected, the
charge indicator lamp comes on in green. It
stays lit for the whole time that the battery is
being charged.
Do not leave any metal objects (coins,
keys, vehicle remote control, etc.) in
the charging area while a device is
being charged – risk of overheating or
interrupting the charging process!
Checking operation
The status of the indicator lamp allows the
operation of the charger to be monitored.
Status of the
indicator lamp
Meaning
Off Engine switched off.
No compatible portable
device detected.
Charging finished.
Fixed, green Compatible portable
device detected.
Charging.
Flashing, orange Foreign object detected
in the charging zone.
Portable device not
correctly centred in the
charging zone.
Fixed, orange Fault with the portable
device's battery meter.
Temperature of the
portable device's battery
too high.
Charger fault.
Front armrest
It includes a refrigerated storage space
(depending on version) and is illuminated when
the cover is opened.
If the indicator lamp is lit orange:
- remove the portable device, then reposition
it in the middle of the charging zone.
or
- remove the portable device and try again in
a quarter of an hour.
If the problem persists, have the system
checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
74
Ease of use and comfort
Opening
Storage
Closing
Mats
Fitting
When fitting the mat for the first time, on the
driver's side, use only the fixings provided in
the wallet attached.
The other mats are simply placed on the
carpet.
Removing/retting
F To remove on the driver's side, move the
seat back and unclip the fixings.
F To refit, position the mat and secure it by
pressing.
F Press the lever beneath the cover.
The cover opens in two parts.
The small removable tray can be installed in
front of or behind the storage space.
A ventilation nozzle circulates fresh air.
F Fold the two parts of the cover back.
To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals:
- only use mats which are suited to the
fixings already present in the vehicle;
these fixings must be used.
- never fit one mat on top of another.
The use of mats not approved by
CITROËN may interfere with access to
the pedals and hinder the operation of the
cruise control/speed limiter.
The mats approved by CITROËN have two
fixings located below the seat.
3
75
Ease of use and comfort
Courtesy lamps
Interior ambient lighting
The dimmed passenger compartment lighting
improves visibility in the vehicle when the light
is poor.
At night, the interior ambient lighting comes on
automatically when the sidelamps are switched
on.
Depending on version, the ambient lighting
includes:
- two LEDs located in the front courtesy lamp.
- a light source in the storage compartment at
the front of the centre console.
- a light source for each of the front footwells.
- illuminated bezels for the front cup holders.
- a light source for each of the interior door
opening controls.
The ambient lighting switches off automatically
when the sidelamps are switched off.
1. Front courtesy lamp
2. Front map reading lamps
3. Rear courtesy lamp
4. Rear map reading lamps (depending on
version)
Front and rear courtesy lamps
In this position, the courtesy
lamp comes on gradually:
- when the vehicle is locked,
- when the ignition is switched on,
- 30 seconds after the last door is closed.
Permanently off.
Permanent lighting.
In "permanent lighting" mode, the lighting time varies
according to the circumstances:
- when the ignition is off, approximately ten minutes,
- in energy economy mode, approximately thirty
seconds,
- with the engine running, unlimited.
When the front courtesy lamp is in the
"permanent lighting" position, the rear
courtesy lamp also comes on, except if it
is in the "permanently off" position.
To switch off the rear courtesy lamp, put it
in the "permanently off" position.
Front and rear map reading
lamps
F With the ignition on, operate the
corresponding switch.
Take care not to put anything in contact
with the courtesy lamps.
- on unlocking the vehicle,
- on removing the key from the ignition,
- on opening a door,
- on activating the remote control locking
button, in order to locate your vehicle.
It switches off gradually:
The interior ambient lighting can
be activated or deactivated and its
brightness adjusted in the Driving/
Vehicle menu of the touch screen.
76
Ease of use and comfort
Boot ttings
1. Load space cover
2. 12 V accessory socket (120 W)
3. Boot lamp
4. Movable cross-piece of the rear seats (to
increase the volume of the boot)
5. Stowing rings
6. Adjustable boot floor (2 positions)
7. Storage wells/tool box under the floor
The stowing rings are designed to secure
luggage using different types of retaining
nets.
Such nets are available as an option or as
an accessory.
For more information, contact a CITROËN
dealer.
For the installation of a high load retaining
net, refer to the corresponding section.
Load space cover
It is in two parts:
- a fixed part with an open storage space,
- a movable part which rises when the boot is
opened, with an open storage space.
To remove the load space cover:
F unhook the two cords 1,
F gently lift the movable part 2, then unclip it
on each side 3,
F unclip the fixed part on each side 4, then
remove the load space cover.
When sharp deceleration occurs, objects
placed on the load space cover can turn
into projectiles.
12 V accessory socket
F To connect a 12 V accessory (max. power:
120 W), remove the cap and connect an
appropriate adapter.
F Switch on the ignition.
The connection of an electrical device
not approved by CITROËN, such as
a USB charger, may adversely affect the
operation of vehicle electrical systems,
causing faults such as poor radio
reception or interference with displays in
the screens.
3
77
Ease of use and comfort
High load retaining net
It offers protection to the occupants when
very sharp braking occurs.
This removable net allows the entire loading
volume up to the roof to be used:
- behind the front seats (1
st
row) when the
rear seats are folded down,
- behind the rear seats (2
nd
row) when the
load space cover is removed.
Behind the front seats
F Fold down the rear seats.
F Insert the ends of the bar, one after the
other, into the fixing points in the roof.
F Attach the net's straps to the upper
anchoring points, located in the housing of
the Top Tether fixings.
F Pull on the straps to stretch the net.
Behind the rear seats
2-position boot floor
This two-position floor allows the boot volume
to be optimised using the lateral stops located
on the sides:
- High position (100 kg max): to obtain a flat
floor up to the front seats, when the rear
seats are folded down.
- Low position (150 kg max): maximum boot
volume.
F Remove the load space cover.
F Insert the ends of the bar, one after the
other, into the fixing points of the roof.
F Attach the straps of the net to the lower
rings, located on each side trim of the boot.
F Pull on the straps to stretch the net.
78
Ease of use and comfort
Ensure that the boot is empty before
moving the boot floor.
Storage well
To increase the boot volume with the floor in
the low position:
F Pull the cross-piece of the rear seats up
vertically to the level of the markings to
remove it.
F To put it back in place, push it as far as it will
go, until it engages.
F Raise the boot floor as much as possible to
access the storage well.
Depending on version, it includes:
- a temporary puncture repair kit with the
vehicle tools,
- a spare wheel with the vehicle tools.
To change the height:
F Lift and pull the floor towards you using its
central handle, then use the lateral stops to
move it.
F Push the floor all the way forwards to place
it in the desired position.
Boot lighting
This comes on automatically when the boot is
opened and goes off automatically when the
boot is closed.
The lighting time varies according to the
circumstances:
- when the ignition is off, approximately
ten minutes,
- in energy economy mode,
approximately thirty seconds,
- with the engine running, unlimited.
79
4
Lighting and visibility
Lighting control
In some weather conditions (e.g. low
temperature or humidity), the presence
of misting on the internal surface of the
glass of the headlamps and rear lamps is
normal; it disappears after the lamps have
been on for a few minutes.
If one or more lamps fails, a message
asks you to check the lamp or lamps
concerned.
Travelling abroad
The design of the dipped beam headlamps
allows, without modification, driving in
a country that drives on the other side
of the road to the country in which your
vehicle was sold.
Never look too closely at the luminous
beam of "Full LED" headlamps: risk of
serious eye injury.
Main lighting
Automatic illumination of headlamps/
Daytime running lamps.
Sidelamps only.
Dipped or main beam headlamps.
Headlamp dipping
Foglamps
Rear foglamps
They operate with the dipped or
main beam headlamps on.
F Rotate the ring forwards to switch them on
and rearwards to switch them off.
When the lighting is switched off automatically
("AUTO" position), the foglamps and the dipped
beam headlamps will remain on.
Front and rear foglamps
They operate with the dipped beam
headlamps on, in manual or auto
mode.
Pull the stalk to switch between dipped and
main beam headlamps.
80
Lighting and visibility
Turn and release the ring:
F once forwards to switch on the front
foglamps and then a second time for the
rear foglamps.
F once rearwards to switch off the rear
foglamps and then a second time for the
front foglamps.
If the lighting is switched off automatically
("AUTO" position) or the dipped beam
headlamps are switched off manually, the
foglamps and sidelamps remain on.
F Turn the ring rearwards to switch the
foglamps off; the sidelamps will then switch
off.
In good or rainy weather, both day and
night, using the front foglamps and the
rear foglamp is prohibited. In these
situations, the power of their beams may
dazzle other drivers. They should only be
used in fog or falling snow.
In these weather conditions, it is your
responsibility to switch on the foglamps
and dipped beam headlamps manually as
the sunshine sensor may detect sufficient
light.
Switch off the foglamps when they are no
longer necessary.
Switching off of the lighting when the
ignition is switched off
On switching off the ignition, all of the
lighting turns off immediately, except for
dipped beam if automatic guide-me-home
lighting is activated.
Switching on the lighting after
switching off the ignition
From the AUTO position, move the main
lighting ring to the desired position or,
from another position, move the ring to the
AUTO position then to a position.
On opening the driver's door a temporary
audible signal warns the driver that the
lighting is on.
It will go off automatically after a period of
time that depends on the state of charge
in battery (entering energy economy
mode).
Direction indicators
Three flashes
F Press briefly upwards or downwards,
without going beyond the point of
resistance; the direction indicators will flash
3 times.
F Left or right: lower or raise the lighting
control stalk, beyond the point of resistance.
81
4
Lighting and visibility
Daytime running lamps/
sidelamps
The front and rear lamps light up automatically
when the engine starts.
They provide the following functions:
- Daytime running lamps (lighting control
stalk at position "AUTO" with adequate light
level).
- Sidelamps (lighting control stalk at "AUTO"
position with low light levels or "Sidelamps
only" or "Dipped/main beam headlamps").
The LEDs are brighter when operating as
daytime running lamps.
Parking lamps
Side markers for the vehicle by illumination of
the sidelamps on the traffic side only.
Automatic illumination of
headlamps
When the ring is at the "AUTO" position and
a low level of ambient light is detected by the
rain/sunshine sensor, the number plate lamps,
sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps are
switched on automatically, without any action
on the part of the driver. They can also come
on if rain is detected, at the same time as
automatic operation of the windscreen wipers.
As soon as the brightness returns to
a sufficient level or after the windscreen wipers
are switched off, the lamps are switched off
automatically.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction of
the sunshine sensor, the lighting
comes on and this warning lamp is
displayed in the instrument panel,
accompanied by an audible signal
and/or a message.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
Do not cover the sunshine sensor, linked
with the rain sensor and located at the
top centre of the windscreen behind the
interior rear view mirror; the associated
functions would no longer be controlled.
In fog or snow, the sunshine sensor may
detect sufficient light. In this case, the
lighting will not come on automatically.
F Depending on version, within one minute
of switching off the ignition, operate the
lighting control stalk up or down depending
on the traffic side (for example: when
parking on the left; lighting control stalk
upwards; the right-hand sidelamps come
on).
This is confirmed by an audible signal and
illumination of the corresponding direction
indicator lamp in the instrument panel.
To switch off the parking lamps, return the
lighting control stalk to the central position.
82
Lighting and visibility
Guide-me-home and
welcome lighting
Automatic
With the ring in the "AUTO" position, if the
brightness is low, the dipped beam headlamps
come on automatically when the ignition is
switched off.
The activation, deactivation
and the duration of the guide-
me-home lighting are set in the
Driving/Vehicle menu of the touch
screen.
Manual
Switching on/off
F With the ignition off, "flash" the headlamps
using the lighting control stalk to switch the
function on/off.
Manual guide-me-home lighting goes off
automatically at the end of a given period of
time.
Automatic exterior welcome
lighting
With the "Automatic illumination of headlamps"
function activated, under low ambient light, the
sidelamps, dipped beam headlamps and door
mirror spotlamps come on automatically when
the vehicle is unlocked.
Activation, deactivation and
the duration of the exterior
welcome lighting are set in the
Driving/Vehicle menu of the touch
screen.
Welcome lighting
Availability of this function depends on version.
F Make a short press on this
remote control button.
Pressing again before the end of the timed
period switches off the lighting immediately.
Door mirror spotlamps
Switching on/o
When the front courtesy lamp
switch is in this position, the
spotlamps come on automatically:
The sidelamps, dipped beam headlamps,
number plate lamps and door mirror spotlamps
come on for 30 seconds.
To make your approach to the vehicle easier,
these illuminate:
- the zones facing the driver's and
passenger's doors,
- the zones forward of the mirror and
rearward of the front doors.
- on unlocking the vehicle,
- on opening a door,
- when a request to locate the vehicle is
received from the remote control.
83
4
Lighting and visibility
Whatever the position of the front courtesy
lamp switch, they also come on with the
exterior welcome lighting and the guide-me-
home lighting.
Automatic headlamp
dipping
This system automatically changes between
dipped and main beam headlamps according
to the brightness and driving conditions, using
a camera located at the top of the windscreen.
This system is a driving aid.
The driver remains responsible for the
vehicle's lighting, its correct use for the
prevailing conditions of light, visibility and
traffic, and for observation of driving and
vehicle regulations.
The system will be operational as soon as
you exceed 16 mph (25 km/h).
If the speed drops below 9 mph (15 km/h),
the system no longer operates.
Activation/Deactivation
F Turn the lighting control stalk ring to the
"AUTO" position.
F In the Vehicle/Driving menu,
select the "Driving functions"
tab, then "Automatic headlamp
dip".
Until deactivated, the lighting system changes
to "automatic illumination of headlamps" mode.
The status of the system remains in memory
when the ignition is switched off.
Operation
If the ambient light level is sufficient and/or if
the traffic conditions do not allow illumination of
the main beam headlamps:
- dipped beam is kept on, these
indicator lamps come on in the
instrument panel.
If the ambient light level is very low and the
traffic conditions permit:
- main beam comes on
automatically: these indicator
lamps come on in the instrument
panel.
When the system detects thick fog, it
temporarily deactivates the function.
As soon as the vehicle leaves the area of thick
fog, the function reactivates automatically.
This indicator lamp goes off while
the function is deactivated.
Pause
If the situation requires a change of headlamp
beam, the driver can take over at any time.
F Flashing the headlamps pauses the function
and the system changes to "automatic
illumination of headlamps" mode:
- if the "AUTO" and "Dipped beam"
indicator lamps are on, the system
changes to main beam,
They go off automatically after 30 seconds.
84
Lighting and visibility
Automatic adjustment
of "Full LED" technology
headlamps
If a fault occurs, this warning lamp
comes on in the instrument panel,
accompanied by a message and an
audible signal.
Do not touch the "Full LED" technology
headlamps – risk of electrocution!
This system automatically adjusts the height
of the beams from this type of headlamp,
according to the load in the vehicle, to avoid
causing a nuisance to other road users.
The system then places the headlamp beams
in the lowest position.
Have the system checked by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
- if the "AUTO" and "Main beam" indicator
lamps are on, the system changes to
dipped beam.
To reactivate the function, flash the headlamps
again.
The system may suffer interference or not
work correctly:
- under poor visibility conditions (snow,
heavy rain, etc.),
- if the windscreen is dirty, misted or
obscured (by a sticker, etc.) in front of
the camera,
- if the vehicle is facing highly reflective
signs.
When the system detects thick fog, it
temporarily deactivates the function.
The system is not able to detect:
- road users that do not have their own
lighting, such as pedestrians,
- vehicles whose lighting is obscured
(for example: vehicles running behind
a safety barrier on a motorway),
- vehicles at the top or bottom of
a steep slope, on winding roads, on
crossroads.
Headlamp adjustment
Manual adjustment of the
halogen headlamps
To avoid causing a nuisance to other road
users, the height of the halogen headlamps
should be adjusted according to the load in the
vehicle.
0 Driver only or driver + front passenger.
1 5 people.
4 5 people + loads in the boot.
5 Driver + loads in the boot.
The initial setting is position "0".
85
4
Lighting and visibility
Cornering lighting
If fitted to the vehicle, this system makes use
of the beam from a front foglamp to illuminate
the inside of a bend, when the main or dipped
beam headlamps are on and the vehicle speed
is below 25 mph (40 km/h) (urban driving,
winding road, junctions, parking manoeuvres,
etc.).
Without cornering lighting
With cornering lighting
Activation/Deactivation
The cornering lighting can be
activated or deactivated in the
Vehicle/Driving menu of the touch
screen.
Switching on
This system starts:
- when the corresponding direction indicator
is switched on,
or
- from a certain angle of rotation of the
steering wheel.
Switching off
The system does not operate:
- below a certain angle of rotation of the
steering wheel,
- above 25 mph (40 km/h),
- when reverse gear is engaged.
Wiper control stalk
Programming
Your vehicle may also include some functions
that can be configured:
- automatic windscreen wipers,
- rear wiping on engaging reverse gear.
In wintry conditions, remove snow, ice or
frost present on the windscreen, around
the wiper arms and blades and the
windscreen seal, before operating the
wipers.
Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windscreen. Under extremely hot or cold
conditions, ensure that the wiper blades
are not stuck to the windscreen before
operating the wipers.
86
Lighting and visibility
Reverse gear
When reverse gear is engaged, the rear wiper
will come into operation automatically if the
front windscreen wipers are operating.
The system is activated or deactivated via the
vehicle settings menu in the screen.
This function is activated by default.
In the event of snow or hard frost or
if a bicycle carrier is fitted to a towing
device, deactivate the automatic rear
wiper via the vehicle parameters menu.
Front screenwash
F Pull the wiper control stalk towards you and
hold.
The screenwash and windscreen wiper operate
for as long as the control stalk is pulled.
Termination of the screenwash is followed by
a final wiping cycle.
With manual wiping
With AUTO wiping
Windscreen wipers
To select the wiping speed: raise or lower the
stalk to the desired position.
Fast wiping (heavy rain).
Normal wiping (moderate rain).
Intermittent wiping (proportional to
the speed of the vehicle).
Off.
Single wipe (press down or pull
the stalk briefly towards you, then
release).
or
Automatic wiping (press down,
then release).
Single wipe (pull the stalk briefly
towards you).
Rear wiper
To select the rear wiper: turn the ring to place
the desired symbol against the marking.
Off.
Intermittent wipe.
Wash-wipe.
Turn the ring fully; the rear screen wash, then
the rear wiper automatically operate for a set
duration.
87
4
Lighting and visibility
The screenwash jets are integrated in the
tips of each arm.
The screenwash fluid is sprayed along the
length of the wiper blade. This improves
visibility and reduces the consumption of
screenwash fluid.
In some cases, depending on the contents
or colour of the liquid and on the exterior
brightness, the liquid spray may be hardly
noticeable.
To avoid damaging the wiper blades, do
not operate the windscreen washer if the
windscreen washer reservoir is empty.
Only operate the windscreen washer if
there is no risk of the fluid freezing on the
windscreen and hindering visibility. Always
use windscreen washer fluid suitable for
low temperatures during the winter period.
Special position of the
windscreen wipers
This maintenance position is used for cleaning
or replacement of the wiper blades. It can also
be useful, in winter (ice, snow), to release the
wiper blades from the windscreen.
To maintain the effectiveness of the flat
wiper blades, it is advisable to:
- handle them with care,
- clean them regularly using soapy
water,
- avoid using them to retain cardboard
on the windscreen,
- replace them at the first signs of wear.
Before removing a front wiper blade
F Within one minute of switching off the
ignition, any operation of the wiper control
stalk will position the wiper blades vertically.
F Proceed with the desired operation or the
replacement of the wiper blades.
After retting a front wiper blade
F To return the wiper blades to their initial
position, switch on the ignition and operate
the wiper control stalk.
Changing a wiper blade
Removing/retting at the front
F Carry out these wiper blade replacement
operations from the driver's side.
F Starting with the wiper blade farthest from
you, hold each arm by the rigid section and
raise it as far as possible.
Take care not to hold the arms at the jet
locations.
Do not touch the wiper blade as you may
cause irreparable damage.
Do not release them while moving them –
risk of damaging the windscreen!
88
Lighting and visibility
Switching off
F Give the control stalk a further brief push
downwards or place the control stalk in
another position (Int, 1 or 2).
This indicator lamp goes off in the
instrument panel, accompanied by
a message.
The automatic windscreen wipers must be
reactivated by pushing the control stalk
downwards, if the ignition has been off for
more than one minute.
Malfunction
If a fault occurs with automatic wiping, the
wipers will operate in intermittent mode.
Have them checked by a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
Do not cover the rain sensor linked to the
sunshine sensor and located at the top
centre of the windscreen.
Switch off the automatic wipers when using
an automatic car wash.
In winter, it is advisable to wait until the
windscreen is completely clear of ice before
activating the automatic windscreen wipers.
F Clean the windscreen using screenwash
fluid.
Do not apply "Rain X" type water-repellent
products.
F Unclip the worn wiper blade closest to you
and remove it.
F Install the new wiper blade and clip it to the
arm.
F Repeat the procedure for the other wiper
blade.
F Starting with the wiper blade closest to
you, once again hold each arm by the rigid
section, then fold it carefully, guiding it to
the windscreen.
Removing/retting at the rear
F Hold the arm by the rigid section and raise it
as far as possible.
F Clean the rear window using screenwash
fluid.
F Unclip the worn wiper blade and remove it.
F Install the new wiper blade and clip it to the
arm.
F Once again hold the arm by the rigid section
then fold it carefully, guiding it to the rear
window.
Automatic windscreen
wipers
The windscreen wipers operate automatically,
adapting their speed to the intensity of the
rainfall without any action on the part of the
driver.
Detection of rainfall is by means of a sensor at
the top centre of the windscreen, behind the
rear view mirror.
Switching on
F Give the control stalk a brief push
downwards.
A wiping cycle confirms that the instruction has
been accepted.
This indicator lamp comes on in the
instrument panel, accompanied by
the display of a message.
89
5
Safety
General safety
recommendations
Labels are affixed in different locations on
your vehicle. They include safety warnings
and vehicle identification information. Do
not remove them: they are an integral part
of your vehicle.
For any work on your vehicle, use
a qualified workshop that has the technical
information, skills and equipment required,
all of which a CITROËN dealer is able to
provide.
Depending on country regulations, some
safety equipment may be compulsory:
high visibility safety vests, warning
triangles, breathalysers, spare bulbs,
spare fuses, fire extinguisher, first aid kit,
mud flaps at the rear of the vehicle, etc.
We draw your attention to the following
points:
- The fitting of electrical equipment
or accessories not approved by
CITROËN may cause excessive
current consumption and faults and
failures with the electrical system of
your vehicle. Contact a CITROËN
dealer for information on the range of
recommended accessories.
- As a safety measure, access to
the diagnostic socket, used for the
vehicle's electronic systems, is
reserved strictly for CITROËN dealers
or qualified workshop, equipped
with the special tools required (risk
of malfunctions of the vehicle's
electronic systems that could cause
breakdowns or serious accidents).
The manufacturer cannot be held
responsible if this advice is not
followed.
- Any modification or adaptation not
intended or authorised by CITROËN
or carried out without meeting the
technical requirements defined by
the manufacturer will result in the
suspension of the legal and contractual
warranties.
Installation of accessory radio
communication transmitters
Before installing a radio communication
transmitter with an external aerial, you
must without fail contact a CITROËN
dealer for the specification of transmitters
which can be fitted (frequency, maximum
power, aerial position, specific installation
requirements), in line with the Vehicle
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive
(2004/104/EC).
Hazard warning lamps
F When you press this red button, all four
direction indicators flash.
They can operate with the ignition off.
90
Safety
Automatic operation of
hazard warning lamps
When braking in an emergency, depending on
the force of deceleration, the hazard warning
lamps come on automatically. They switch off
automatically when you next accelerate.
It is also possible to switch them off by pressing
the button.
Horn
Emergency or assistance
call
Localised Emergency Call
* In accordance with the general conditions of
service available from dealers and subject
to technological and technical limitations.
** As per the geographic coverage of
"Localised Emergency Call", "Localised
Assistance Call" and the official national
language chosen by the owner of the
vehicle.
The list of countries covered and of
telematic services is available from dealers
or on the website for your country.
In an emergency, press button 1 for more than
2 seconds.
The flashing LED and a voice message confirm
that the call has been made to the "Localised
Emergency Call" call centre*.
Pressing this button again immediately cancels
the request; the LED goes off.
The LED remains on (without flashing) when
communication is established.
It goes off at the end of the call.
"Localised Emergency Call" immediately
locates your vehicle, contacts you in your own
language**, and – if necessary – requests
the appropriate public emergency services to
be sent**. In countries where the service is
not operational, or where the locating service
has been expressly refused, the call is sent
directly to the emergency services (112) without
location.
If an impact is detected by the airbag
control unit, an emergency call is made
automatically and independently of the
deployment of any airbags.
Operation of the system
F Press the central part of the multifunction
steering wheel.
When the ignition is switched on, the indicator
lamp comes on for 3 seconds indicating that
the system is operating correctly.
If the indicator lamp lights up continuously red:
there is a system fault.
If the indicator lamp flashes red: replace the
back-up battery.
In either case, emergency and assistance calls
may not function.
Contact a qualified repairer as soon as
possible.
91
5
Safety
The system's fault does not prevent the
vehicle from being driven.
Localised Assistance Call
** As per the geographic coverage of
"Localised Emergency Call", "Localised
Assistance Call" and the official national
language chosen by the owner of the
vehicle.
The list of countries covered and of
telematic services is available from dealers
or on the website for your country.
Press button 2 for more than 2 seconds to
request assistance if the vehicle breaks down
(confirmed by a voice message** ).
Pressing this button again immediately cancels
the request (confirmed by a voice message).
Geolocation
Deactivate/reactivate geolocation by
simultaneously pressing buttons 1 and 2 and
then a single press of button 2 to confirm.
If you purchased your vehicle outside the
CITROËN dealer network, we invite you to
have a dealer check the configuration of
these services and, if desired, modify it to
suit your wishes. In a multilingual country,
configuration is possible in the official
national language of your choice.
For technical reasons, in particular to
improve the quality of telematic services
for customers, the Manufacturer reserves
the right to carry out updates to the
vehicle's on-board telematic system at
any time.
If you benefit from the Citroën Connect
Box offer with the SOS and assistance
pack included, there are additional
services available to you in your personal
space, via the website for your country.
Electronic stability control
(ESC)
Electronic stability control programme
comprising the following systems:
- Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) and
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBFD).
- Emergency braking assistance (EBA).
- Anti-slip regulation (ASR).
- Dynamic stability control (DSC).
- Trailer stability assist (TSA).
Definitions
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
and electronic brake force
distribution (EBFD)
These systems improve the stability and
manoeuvrability of your vehicle when braking
and contribute towards improved control in
corners, in particular on poor or slippery road
surfaces.
The ABS prevents wheel lock in the event of
emergency braking.
The EBFD manages the braking pressure
wheel by wheel.
92
Safety
Emergency braking assistance
(EBA)
In an emergency, this system enables you to
reach the optimum braking pressure more
quickly and therefore reduce the stopping
distance.
It is triggered in relation to the speed at which
the brake pedal is pressed. This is felt by
a reduction in the resistance of the pedal and
an increase in braking efficiency.
Anti-slip regulation (ASR)
This system optimises traction in order to
avoid wheel slip by acting on the brakes of
the driving wheels and on the engine. It also
improves the directional stability of the vehicle
on acceleration.
Dynamic stability control (DSC)
If there is a difference between the path
followed by the vehicle and that required by the
driver, this system monitors each wheel and
automatically acts on the brake of one or more
wheels and on the engine to return the vehicle
to the required path, within the limits of the laws
of physics.
Trailer stability assist (TSA)
This system allows control of the vehicle to be
retained when towing a trailer, so as to avoid
the risk of snaking.
Anti-lock braking system
(ABS) and electronic brake
force distribution (EBFD)
The fixed illumination of this warning
lamp signals that there is a fault with
the ABS.
Illumination of this warning lamp,
coupled with the STOP and ABS
warning lamps, accompanied by the
display of a message and an audible
signal, signals that there is a fault
with the electronic brake force
distribution (EBFD).
Normal operation of the ABS may make
itself felt by slight vibrations of the brake
pedal.
When braking in an emergency, press
very firmly and maintain this pressure.
When changing wheels (tyres and rims),
ensure that these are approved for your
vehicle.
After an impact, have these systems
checked by a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
Intelligent traction control
system ("Snow motion")
The vehicle retains conventional braking. Drive
carefully at moderate speed.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop as soon as possible.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Call a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Depending on version, your vehicle has
a system to help driving on snow: intelligent
traction control.
This system detects situations of poor surface
grip that could make it difficult to move off
or make progress on deep fresh snow or
compacted snow.
In these situations, the intelligent traction
control limits the amount of wheel spin to
provide the best traction and trajectory control
for your vehicle.
93
5
Safety
The use of snow tyres is strongly
recommended on surfaces offering low
levels of grip.
Anti-slip regulation (ASR)/
Dynamic stability control
(DSC)
Operation
These systems are activated automatically
every time the vehicle is started.
They come into operation in the event of
a problem with grip or trajectory.
Deactivation
In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle
which is bogged down, stuck in snow, on soft
ground, etc.), it may be advisable to deactivate
these systems, so that the wheels can turn
freely and regain grip.
Reactivate these systems as soon as the level
of grip permits.
With Advanced Grip Control
F Place the dial in this position.
With the touch screen
The deactivation is carried out via the
Driving/Vehicle menu.
It is confirmed by the illumination of
this warning lamp in the instrument
panel and the display of a message.
This is indicated by this warning
lamp flashing in the instrument
panel.
Reactivation
These systems are reactivated automatically
each time the ignition is switched back on or
above 31 mph (50 km/h).
Below 31 mph (50 km/h), you can reactivate
them manually.
With Advanced Grip Control
F Place the dial in a different
position to this.
With the touch screen
The reactivation is carried out via the
Driving/Vehicle menu.
It is confirmed by this warning lamp
going out in the instrument panel and
the display of a message.
Malfunction
Illumination of this warning lamp,
accompanied by the display of
a message and an audible signal,
indicates a fault with the system.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the systems checked.
94
Safety
ASR/DSC
These systems offer increased safety
in normal driving, but they should not
encourage the driver to take extra risks or
drive at high speed.
It is in conditions of reduced grip (rain,
snow, ice) that the risk of loss of grip
increases. It is therefore important for your
safety to keep these systems activated in
all conditions, and particularly in difficult
conditions.
The correct operation of these
systems depends on observation of
the manufacturer's recommendations
regarding both the wheels (tyres and
rims), braking and electronic components
and the assembly and repair procedures
used by CITROËN dealers.
The use of snow tyres is recommended,
in order to be able to benefit from the
efficiency of these systems in winter
conditions.
In this case, it is essential to equip the
four wheels with tyres approved for your
vehicle.
Trailer stability assist (TSA)
When towing, this system reduces the risk of
the vehicle or trailer swaying.
Operation
The system is activated automatically when the
ignition is switched on.
The electronic stability control (ESC) must not
have any faults.
If the system detects oscillations (snaking) in
the movement of the trailer at speeds between
37 and 99 mph (60 and 160 km/h), it acts
on the brakes to stabilise the trailer and, if
necessary, reduces the engine power to slow
down the vehicle.
The correction is signalled by the
flashing of this warning lamp in the
instrument panel and illumination of
the brake lamps.
For information on the weights and towed
loads, refer to the "Technical data" section or
the registration certificate for your vehicle.
To ensure complete safety while driving with
a Towbar device, refer to the corresponding
section.
Operating fault
Should a fault occur with the system,
this warning lamp comes on in the
instrument panel, accompanied by
the display of a message and an
audible signal.
The trailer stability assist system offers
increased safety in normal driving,
provided that the recommendations on
towing a trailer are observed. It should not
encourage the driver to take risks, such
as towing a trailer in adverse operating
conditions (overloading, failure to observe
the trailer nose weight, worn or under-
inflated tyres, faulty braking system, etc.)
or drive at too high a speed.
In certain cases, snaking of the trailer
may not be detected by the ESC system,
particularly with a light trailer.
When driving on slippery or poor surfaces,
the system may not be able to prevent
sudden snaking of the trailer.
If you continue to tow a trailer, reduce your
speed and drive carefully!
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the system checked.
95
5
Safety
Advanced Grip Control
Special patented traction control system which
improves traction on snow, mud and sand.
This system, the operation of which has been
optimised for each situation, allows you to
manoeuvre in most conditions of poor grip
(encountered during touring use).
Associated with all-season M+S (Mud and
Snow) tyres, this system offers a compromise
between safety, adhesion and traction.
The accelerator pedal should be pressed
sufficiently to allow the system to use the power
of the engine. Operation at high engine speeds
is completely normal.
A five-position selector knob allows you to
choose the setting best suited to the driving
conditions encountered.
An indicator lamp associated with each mode
comes on, accompanied by the display of
a message to confirm your choice.
Operating modes
Standard (ESC)
This mode is calibrated for a low
level of wheel spin, based on the
different levels of grip normally
encountered on the road.
Every time the ignition is switched off, the
system automatically resets to this mode.
Snow
This mode adapts its strategy to
the conditions of grip encountered
for each of the two front wheels on
moving off.
(mode active up to 50 mph
(80 km/h))
All terrain (mud, damp grass,
etc.)
This mode, when moving off, allows
considerable spin on the wheel with
the least grip to optimise clearing of
the mud and to regain grip. At the
same time, the wheel with the most
grip is controlled in such a way
as to transmit as much torque as
possible.
When moving, the system optimises wheel spin
to respond to the driver's requirements as fully
as possible.
(mode active up to 31 mph (50 km/h))
Sand
This mode allows little spin on the
two driving wheels at the same time
to allow the vehicle to move forward
and limit the risks of getting stuck in
the sand.
(mode active up to 75 mph
(120 km/h))
Do not use the other modes on sand as
the vehicle may become stuck.
96
Safety
You can deactivate the ASR
and DSC systems by turning
the knob to the "OFF" position.
Recommendations
Your vehicle is designed principally to
drive on tarmac roads but it allows you to
occasionally drive on other less passable
terrain.
However, it does not permit off-road
driving such as:
- crossing and driving on terrain which
could damage the underbody or strip
away components (fuel pipe, fuel
cooler, etc.) due to obstacles or stones
in particular,
- driving on terrain with steep gradients
and poor grip,
- crossing a stream.
Hill Assist Descent
Control
System that provides assistance when
descending on loose or soft surfaces (gravel,
mud, etc.) or a steep gradient.
This system reduces the risk of slip or loss
of control of the vehicle when descending,
whether going forward or in reverse.
During a descent, it assists the driver in
maintaining a constant speed, depending
on the gear engaged, while progressively
releasing the brakes.
For the system to activate, the slope must
be greater than 5%.
The system can be used with the gearbox
in neutral.
Otherwise engage a gear corresponding
to the speed to prevent the engine stalling.
With an automatic gearbox, the system
can be used with the selector at N, D or R.
When the system is regulating, the Active
Safety Brake system is automatically
deactivated.
The system is not available:
- if the speed of the vehicle is above
43 mph (70 km/h),
- if the speed of the vehicle is being
controlled by the Adaptive Cruise
Control, depending on the type of
gearbox.
Operation
Switching on
By default, the system is not selected.
The state of the function is not saved when the
ignition is switched off.
The driver can select the system when
the engine is running, when the vehicle is
stationary or when moving at speeds up to
approximately 31 mph (50 km/h).
The ASR and DSC systems will no longer
act on the engine operation or the brakes
in the event of an involuntary change of
trajectory.
These systems are reactivated
automatically from 31 mph (50 km/h) or
every time the ignition is switched on.
With instrument panels with dials
F To select the system, at a speed
below 31 mph (50 km/h), press
this button until its indicator lamp
comes on; up; this indicator lamp
appears in green in the instrument
panel.
97
5
Safety
F When the vehicle begins its descent, you
can release the accelerator and brake
pedals; the system regulates the speed:
The system becomes active at a speed below
19 mph (30 km/h).
With digital instrument panel
F To select the system, at a speed
below 31 mph (50 km/h), press
this button until its green indicator
lamp comes on; this indicator lamp
comes on in grey in the instrument
panel.
F The system becomes active at
a speed below 19 mph (30 km/h);
this indicator lamp comes on in
green in the instrument panel.
- if the gearbox is in first or second
gear, the speed decreases and the
indicator lamp flashes rapidly,
- if the gearbox is in neutral or if
the clutch pedal is depressed, the
speed decreases and the indicator
lamp flashes slowly; in this case,
the maintained descent speed is
lower.
On a descent, with the vehicle stationary, if you
release the accelerator and brake pedals, the
system will release the brakes to set the vehicle
gradually in motion.
The brake lamps light up automatically when
the system is regulating.
If the speed exceeds 19 mph (30 km/h),
regulation is paused automatically, the indicator
lamp goes back to grey in the instrument panel,
but the green indicator lamp in the button
remains on.
Regulation resumes automatically when the
speed falls below 19 mph (30 km/h) again, if the
slope and pedal release conditions are met.
You can depress the accelerator or brake pedal
again at any time.
Switching o
Malfunction
If a fault occurs with the system, a message is
displayed in the instrument panel.
F Press this button until its indicator lamp
goes off; the indicator lamp also goes off in
the instrument panel.
Above 43 mph (70 km/h), the system is
automatically deactivated; the indicator lamp in
the button goes off.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
Seat belts
Front seat belts
The front seat belts are fitted with a pyrotechnic
pretensioning and force limiting system.
98
Safety
This system improves safety in the front
seats in the event of a front or side impact.
Depending on the severity of the impact, the
pyrotechnic pretensioning system instantly
tightens the seat belts against the body of the
occupants.
The pyrotechnic pretensioning seat belts are
enabled when the ignition is on.
The force limiter reduces the pressure of the
seat belt on the chest of the occupant, thus
improving their protection.
Fastening
F Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the
buckle.
F Check that the seat belt is fastened
correctly by pulling the strap.
Unfastening
F Press the red button on the buckle.
F Guide the seat belt as it is reeled in.
Height adjustment
F To adjust the height of the anchorage point,
squeeze control A and slide it to the notch
desired.
Rear seat belts
Each of the rear seats has a three-point seat
belt with inertia reel.
The outer seats are fitted with a pyrotechnic
pretensioning and force limiting system.
Before performing any operations on the
rear seats, to avoid damage to the seat
belts, check that:
- the outer seat belts are correctly in the
storage position, lying vertically along
the pillar,
- the central seat belt is stowed.
Fastening
F Pull the strap then insert the tongue in the
buckle.
F Check that the seat belt is fastened
correctly by pulling the strap.
Unfastening
F Press the red button on the buckle.
F Guide the seat belt as it is reeled in.
F On the side seat belts, raise the bar to the
top of the backrest to prevent the tongue
from knocking against the side trim.
Rear central seat belt
The seat belt for the rear central seat is
integrated into the roof.
99
5
Safety
Installation
Removal and storage
F Pull the strap and insert tongue A into the
right-hand buckle (which is on your left
when you are seated in the vehicle).
F Insert tongue B into the left-hand buckle
(which is on your right when you are seated
in the vehicle).
F Check that each buckle is fastened correctly
by pulling the strap.
F Guide the strap as it reels in and take
tongue B, then A to the magnet at the
anchoring point on the roof.
Before performing any operations on the
rear seats, to avoid damage to the seat
belts, check that the outer seat belts are
properly tensioned and attach the tongues
to their anchorage points. The central seat
belt must be completely reeled in.
Seat belts not fastened/
unfastened alerts
Not fastened/unfastened warning lamp
Seat belts not fastened/unfastened
identification warning lamp
Front seat belts not fastened
alerts
When the ignition is switched on, the warning
lamp and the corresponding location warning
lamps light up if the driver and/or the front
passenger have not fastened their seat belts.
At speeds above 12 mph (20 km/h), these
warning lamps flash, accompanied by an
audible signal for two minutes. After that
period, these warning lamps remain lit until the
seat belts have been fastened.
F Press the red button on buckle B, then the
black button on buckle A.
It comes on in red in both the
instrument panel and the front
passenger airbag and seat belts
warning lamps display, once the
system detects that a seat belt is not
fastened or is unfastened.
It comes on in the display: the
illuminated red warning lamps
indicate the location of the not
fastened or unfastened seat
belts.
Seat belts unfastened alert
After the ignition is switched on, the warning
lamp and the corresponding location warning
lamps light up if the driver and/or one or more
passengers unfasten their seat belts.
At speeds above 12 miles (20 km/h), these
warning lamps flash, accompanied by an
audible signal for two minutes. After that
period, these warning lamps remain lit until the
seat belts have been refastened.
100
Safety
Advice
The driver must ensure that passengers
use the seat belts correctly and that they
are all fastened before setting off.
Wherever you are seated in the vehicle,
always fasten your seat belt, even for
short journeys.
Do not interchange the seat belt buckles,
as they will not fulfil their role fully.
The seat belts are equipped with an
inertia reel which allows the strap length
to automatically adjust to your shape.
The seat belt returns to its storage
automatically when it is not used.
The inertia reels are fitted with a device
which automatically locks the strap in the
event of a collision, emergency braking or
if the vehicle rolls over. You can release
the device by pulling the strap firmly and
then releasing it so that it reels in slightly.
Before and after use, ensure that the seat
belt is reeled in correctly.
After folding or moving a seat or rear
bench seat, ensure that the seat belt is
positioned and reeled in correctly.
Installation
The lower part of the strap must be
positioned as low as possible on the
pelvis.
The upper part must be positioned in the
hollow of the shoulder.
In order to be effective, a seat belt must:
- be tightened as close to the body as
possible,
- be pulled in front of you with a smooth
movement, checking that it does not
twist,
- be used to restrain only one person,
- not show any signs of cuts or fraying,
- not be converted or modified in order
not to affect its performance.
Recommendations for children
Use a child seat appropriate to the child's
age, weight and size.
Never use the same seat belt to secure
more than one child.
Never allow a child to travel on your lap.
For more information on Child seats, refer
to the corresponding section.
Servicing
In accordance with current safety
regulations, for all repairs on your
vehicle's seat belts, go to a qualified
workshop with the skills and equipment
needed, which a CITROËN dealer is able
to provide.
Have your seat belts checked regularly
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop, particularly if the straps show
signs of damage.
Clean the seat belt straps with soapy
water or a textile cleaning product, sold by
CITROËN dealers.
In the event of an impact
Depending on the nature and seriousness
of the impacts, the pyrotechnic device
may trigger before and independently of
airbag deployment. Deployment of the
pretensioners is accompanied by a slight
discharge of harmless smoke and a noise,
due to the activation of the pyrotechnic
cartridge incorporated in the system.
In all cases, the airbag warning lamp
comes on.
Following an impact, have the seat belt
system checked, and, if necessary,
replaced, by a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
101
5
Safety
Airbags
General information
System designed to help improve the safety
of the occupants sitting in the front seats and
the rear outer seats in the event of violent
collisions. The airbags supplement the action
of the seat belts fitted with force limiters at the
front seats and at the rear outer seats.
If a collision occurs, the electronic detectors
record and analyse the front and side impacts
sustained in the impact detection zones:
- In the event of violent impact, the airbags
deploy instantly and help better protect
the occupants of the vehicle; immediately
after the impact, the airbags deflate rapidly
in order not to hinder the visibility or the
possible exit of the occupants,
- in the case of a minor or rear impact or
in certain rollover conditions, the airbags
may not be deployed; the seat belt
alone contributes towards ensuring your
protection in these situations.
The airbags do not operate when the
ignition is switched off.
This equipment will only deploy once. If
a second impact occurs (during the same
or a subsequent accident), the airbag will
not be deployed again.
Impact detection zones
A. Front impact zone.
B. Side impact zone.
The deployment of one or more airbags
is accompanied by a slight emission of
smoke and a noise, due to the detonation
of the pyrotechnic charge incorporated in
the system.
This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive
individuals may experience slight irritation.
The detonation noise associated with the
deployment of one or more airbags may
result in a slight loss of hearing for a short
time.
Front airbags
System which protects the driver and front
passenger in the event of a serious front impact
in order to limit the risk of injury to the head and
chest.
The driver's airbag is fitted in the centre of the
steering wheel; the front passenger airbag is
fitted in the dashboard above the glove box.
These front airbags are adaptive. In
particular, their hardness will decrease in
the presence of an occupant of shorter
height, with the seat adjusted to a forward
longitudinal position.
102
Safety
Deployment
* For more information on Deactivating
the front passenger airbag, refer to the
corresponding section.
They deploy, except the front passenger airbag
if it is deactivated*, in the event of a serious
front impact to all or part of the front impact
zone A.
The front airbag inflates between the thorax
and head of the front occupant of the vehicle
and the steering wheel, driver's side, and the
dashboard, passenger's side, to cushion their
forward movement.
Lateral airbags
At the front
Deployment
They deploy on one side in the event of
a serious side impact applied to all or part of
the side impact zone B.
The lateral airbag inflates between the hip and
shoulder of the vehicle's occupant and the
corresponding door trim panel.
Curtain airbags
System contributing towards greater protection
for the driver and passengers (with the
exception of the rear centre passenger) in the
event of a serious side impact in order to limit
the risk of injury to the side of the head.
Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and
the upper passenger compartment area.
Deployment
It deploys simultaneously with the
corresponding lateral airbag in the event of
a serious side impact applied to all or part of
the side impact zone B.
The curtain airbag inflates between the front
and rear occupants of the vehicle and the
corresponding windows.
Malfunction
If this warning lamp comes on in the
instrument panel, you must contact
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the system
checked.
The airbags may no longer be deployed in the
event of a serious impact.
In the event of a minor impact or bump on
the side of the vehicle or if the vehicle rolls
over, the airbags may not be deployed.
In the event of a rear or front collision,
none of the lateral airbags are deployed.
This system protects the driver and front
passenger in the event of a serious side impact
to mitigate the risk of injury to the chest,
between the hip and the shoulder.
Each lateral airbag is fitted in the seat backrest
frame, door side.
103
5
Safety
Advice
For the airbags to be fully effective,
observe the safety recommendations
below.
Adopt a normal and upright sitting
position.
Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt.
Do not leave anything between the
occupants and the airbags (a child, pet,
object, etc.), nor fix or attach anything
close to or in the way of the airbag release
trajectory; this could cause injuries during
their deployment.
Never modify the original definition of your
vehicle, particularly in the area directly
around the airbags.
After an accident or if the vehicle has
been stolen, have the airbag systems
checked.
All work on the airbag systems must only
be carried out by a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
Even if all of the precautions mentioned
are observed, a risk of injury or of minor
burns to the head, chest or arms cannot
be ruled out when an airbag is deployed.
The bag inflates almost instantly (within
a few milliseconds) then deflates within
the same time discharging the hot gas via
openings provided for this purpose.
Front airbags
Do not drive holding the steering wheel
by its spokes or resting your hands on the
centre part of the wheel.
Passengers must not place their feet on
the dashboard.
Do not smoke as deployment of the
airbags can cause burns or the risk of
injury from a cigarette or pipe.
Never remove or pierce the steering wheel
or hit it violently.
Do not fix or attach anything to the
steering wheel or dashboard, as this
could cause injuries when the airbags are
deployed.
Curtain airbags
Do not fix or attach anything to the roof,
as this could cause head injuries when the
curtain airbag is deployed.
Lateral airbags
Use only approved covers on the seats,
compatible with the deployment of the
lateral airbags. For information on the
range of seat covers suitable for your
vehicle, contact the CITROËN network.
Do not fix or attach anything to the seat
backrests (clothes, etc.), as this could
cause injuries to the thorax or arm when
the lateral airbag is deployed.
Do not sit with the upper part of the body
any nearer to the door than necessary.
The vehicle's front door panels include
side impact sensors.
A damaged door or any unauthorised or
incorrectly executed work (modification or
repair) on the front doors or their interior
trim could compromise the operation of
these sensors – risk of malfunction of the
lateral airbags!
Such work must only be done by
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
104
Safety
General points relating to
child seats
The legislation on carrying children is
specific to each country. Refer to the
legislation in force in your country.
For maximum safety, please observe the
following recommendations:
- In accordance with European regulations,
all children under the age of 12 or less
than one and a half metres tall must
travel in approved child seats suited to
their weight, on seats fitted with a seat belt
or ISOFIX mountings.
- Statistically, the safest seats in your
vehicle for carrying children are the rear
seats.
- A child weighing less than 9 kg must
travel in the "rearward facing" position
both in the front and in the rear.
It is recommended that children travel on
the rear seats of your vehicle:
- "rearward facing" up to the age of 3,
- "forward facing" over the age of 3.
Ensure that the seat belt is positioned and
tightened correctly.
For child seats with a support leg, ensure
that the support leg is in firm and steady
contact with the floor.
At the front: if necessary, adjust the
passenger seat.
At the rear: if necessary, adjust the
relevant front seat.
Remove and stow the head restraint
before installing a child seat with backrest
on a passenger seat. Refit the head
restraint once the child seat has been
removed.
Advice
An incorrectly installed child seat
compromises the child's safety in the
event of an accident.
Ensure that there is no seat belt or seat
belt buckle under the child seat, as this
could destabilise it.
Remember to fasten the seat belts or
the child seat harness keeping the slack
relative to the child's body to a minimum,
even for short journeys.
When installing a child seat using the seat
belt, ensure that the seat belt is tightened
correctly on the child seat and that it
secures the child seat firmly on the seat
of your vehicle. If your passenger seat is
adjustable, move it forwards if necessary.
The head restraint must be removed
before installing a child seat with
a backrest on a passenger seat.
Ensure that the head restraint is stored or
attached securely to prevent it from being
thrown around the vehicle in the event
of sharp braking. Refit the head restraint
once the child seat has been removed.
105
5
Safety
Children at the rear
At rear seating positions, always leave
sufficient space between the front seat
and:
- the "rearward facing" child seat,
- the child's feet for a child seat fitted
"forward facing".
To do this, move the front seat forwards
and, if necessary, straighten its backrest.
For optimal installation of the "forward
facing" child seat, verify that its backrest is
as close as possible to the backrest of the
vehicle seat, if possible in contact with it.
A child seat with ISOFIX or i-Size
mountings must never be installed on the
centre rear passenger seat.
Children at the front
Deactivate the front passenger airbag
when a "rearward facing" child seat is
installed on the front passenger seat.
Otherwise, the child would risk being
seriously injured or killed if the airbag
were deployed.
Installing a booster seat
The chest part of the seat belt must be
positioned on the child's shoulder without
touching the neck.
Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt
passes correctly over the child's thighs.
We recommend using a booster seat with
backrest, equipped with a belt guide at
shoulder level.
Additional protections
To prevent accidental opening of the doors
and rear windows, use the "Child lock".
Take care not to open the rear windows by
more than one third.
To protect young children from the rays
of the sun, fit side blinds on the rear
windows.
As a safety precaution, do not leave:
- a child or children alone and
unattended in a vehicle,
- a child or an animal in a vehicle
which is exposed to the sun, with the
windows closed,
- the keys within reach of children inside
the vehicle.
Child seat at the front
When a child seat is installed on the
front passenger seat, adjust this seat
to the highest position, in the rearmost
longitudinal position, with the backrest
straightened.
"Rearward facing"
The front passenger airbag must be
deactivated. Otherwise, the child risks
being seriously injured or killed if the
airbag is deployed.
"Forward facing"
You must leave the front passenger airbag
active.
106
Safety
Deactivating the front
passenger airbag
You must comply with the following instruction,
repeated by the warning label on both sides of
the passenger sun visor:
NEVER install a rearward facing child
restraint system on a seat protected by an
ACTIVATED FRONT AIRBAG. This could
cause the DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY of
the CHILD.
Passenger airbag OFF
For more information on the Airbags,
refer to the corresponding section.
Deactivating/reactivating
the front passenger airbag
Only the front passenger airbag can be
deactivated.
The control is located in the glove box.
With the ignition off,
F To deactivate, turn the control to the "OFF"
position.
F To reactivate, turn the control to the "ON"
position.
Warning label – Front passenger airbag
To guarantee the safety of your child,
the front passenger airbag must be
deactivated when you install a "rearward
facing" child seat on the front passenger
seat.
Otherwise, the child would risk being
seriously injured or killed if the airbag
were deployed.
When the ignition is switched on:
This indicator lamp comes on and
remains lit to signal the deactivation.
Or
This indicator lamp comes on
for about a minute to signal the
activation.
107
5
Safety
Child seat at the rear
"Rearward facing" and
"Forward facing"
When a "rearward facing" or "forward facing"
child seat is installed on a rear passenger
seat, move the vehicle's front seat forward and
straighten the backrest so that the legs of the
child in the "forward facing" or the "rearward
facing" child seat do not touch the vehicle's
front seat.
Centre rear seat
A child seat with a support leg must never be
installed on the centre rear passenger seat.
The incorrect installation of a child seat in
a vehicle compromises the protection of
the child in the event of an accident.
Summary table for installation of universal, ISOFIX and
i-Size child seats
As required by European regulations, this table gives the options for installing child seats secured
using the seat belt and universally approved (a) as well as the larger ISOFIX and i-Size child seats
on seat positions equipped with ISOFIX mountings in the vehicle.
Seat numbers
Front seats Rear seats
1
3
(b), (c), (e)
4 5 6
3
1
(b), (c), (e)
4 5 6
Position compatible with
a universal (a) child seat
no
yes
(f)
yes yes yes
Position compatible with an
i-Size child seat
no yes yes no yes
Position equipped with a TOP
TETHER fixing
no yes yes no yes
"Carrycot" type of child seat no no no no no
"Rearward facing" ISOFIX child
seat
no
R3
(d)
R2 no R2
"Forward facing" ISOFIX child
seat
no
F3
(d)
F3 no F3
108
Safety
Rules:
- A position that is i-Size compatible is also
compatible for R1, R2 and F2X, F2.
- A position that is R3 compatible is also
compatible for R1 and R2.
- A position that is F3 compatible is also
compatible for F2X and F2.
(a) Universal child seat: child seat that can be
installed in all vehicles using the seat belt.
(b) To install a "rearward facing" child seat
at this seat position, the front passenger's
airbag MUST be deactivated "OFF".
(c) Only a "forward facing" child seat of
group 1, 2 or 3 is authorised at this seat
position with the front passenger's airbag
activated "ON".
(d) Tilt the seat backrest to 45°, then install
the child seat.
Straighten the backrest until it contacts
the child seat's backrest.
(e) It is forbidden to install a "forward facing"
child seat of group 0 or 0+ at this seat
position (weight of the child less than
13 kg) if the front passenger's airbag is
activated "ON".
(f) For a seat with height adjustment, set it to
the maximum height.
Key
Seat position where the installation of
a child seat is forbidden.
ISOFIX "forward facing" child seat:
- F2X: ISOFIX child seat for
toddlers.
- F2: ISOFIX child seat low height.
- F3: ISOFIX child seat tall height.
Front passenger's airbag
deactivated.
Front passenger's airbag activated.
Seat position suitable for the
installation of a child seat secured
using the seat belt and universally
approved "rearward facing" and/or
"forward facing".
Seat position suitable for the
installation of a child seat secured
using the seat belt and universally
approved for "forward facing" use.
Seat position where securing an
i-Size child seat is authorised.
Presence of a TOP TETHER
anchoring point at the rear of the
backrest, allowing a universal
ISOFIX "forward facing" child seat
to be secured.
ISOFIX "rearward facing" child seat:
- R1: ISOFIX child seat for an
infant.
- R2: ISOFIX child seat small size.
- R3: ISOFIX child seat large size.
109
5
Safety
Recommended child
seats
Range of recommended child seats which are
secured using a three-point seat belt.
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
L1
"RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus"
Installed in the "rearward facing" position.
Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg
L5
"RÖMER KIDFIX"
Can be fitted to the vehicle's ISOFIX
mountings.
The child is restrained by the seat belt.
A version with a removable backrest may be
used for children weighing more than 25 kg.
However, for better protection, use a booster
seat with backrest for all children weighing up
to 36 kg.
110
Safety
Locations for child seats secured using the seat belt
In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing child seats secured using the seat belt and universally approved
(a) according to the weight of the child and the seat position in the vehicle.
U Seat position suitable for the installation
of a child seat secured using the seat
belt and universally approved "rearward
facing" and/or "forward facing".
UF Seat position suitable for the installation
of a child seat secured using the seat belt
and universally approved "forward facing".
X Seat position not suitable for installation of
a child seat for the weight class indicated.
(a) Universal child seat: child seat that can be
installed in all vehicles using the seat belt.
(b) Group 0: from birth to 10 kg. Carrycots
and "car" infant carriers cannot be
installed on the front passenger seat.
(c) Refer to the current legislation in your
country before installing your child on this
seat.
(d) To install a child seat at the rear, "rearward
facing" or "forward facing", move the front
seat forward, then adjust the backrest to
an upright position to allow enough room
for the child seat and the child's legs.
(e) A child seat with a support leg must never
be installed on the centre rear passenger
seat.
(1) Adjust the height to the maximum height.
Weight of the child/indicative age
Seat position
Front passenger
airbag
Under 13 kg
(groups 0 (b) and
0+)
Up to about 1 year
old
From 9 to 18 kg
(group 1)
From about 1 to
3 years old
From 15 to 25 kg
(group 2)
From about 3 to
6 years old
From 22 to 36 kg
(group 3)
From about 6 to
10 years old
Row 1 (c) Passenger seat
Deactivated "OFF" U (1) U (1) U (1) U (1)
Activated "ON" X UF (1) UF (1) UF (1)
Row 2 (d) (e) U U U U
111
5
Safety
"ISOFIX" mountings
The seats, shown below, are fitted with ISOFIX
compliant mountings:
The mountings comprise three rings for each
seat:
ISOFIX child seats are fitted with two latches
which are secured on the two rings A.
Some seats also have an upper strap which is
attached to ring B.
To secure the child seat to the TOP TETHER:
F remove and stow the head restraint before
installing the child seat on the seat (refit it
once the child seat has been removed),
F pass the strap of the child seat behind
the seat backrest, centring it between the
apertures for the head restraint rods,
F secure the upper strap hook to ring B,
F tighten the upper strap.
When fitting an ISOFIX child seat to the
left-hand rear seat of the bench seat,
before fitting the seat, first move the
centre rear seat belt towards the middle
of the vehicle, so as to avoid the seat
interfering with the operation of the seat
belt.
- two rings A, located between the vehicle
seat backrest and cushion, indicated by
a marking,
Front seat
Rear seats
- one ring B, located behind the seat and
indicated by a marking, referred to as the
TOP TETHER for fixing the upper strap.
This system prevents the child seat from tipping
forward in the event of a front impact.
This ISOFIX mounting system ensures fast,
reliable and safe fitting of the child seat in your
vehicle.
112
Safety
Recommended ISOFIX
child seats
Also consult the user guide from the child
seat's manufacturer to find out how to
install and remove the seat.
For information about the installation
possibilities for ISOFIX child seats in your
vehicle, refer to the summary table.
"RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus and its ISOFIX
base"
(size category: E)
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
Installed "rearward facing" using an ISOFIX
base which is attached to rings A.
Is only installed on the front passenger seat
or on the outer rear seats.
The base has a support leg, height-
adjustable, which rests on the vehicle's floor.
This child seat can also be secured with
a seat belt. In this case, only the shell is used
and attached to the vehicle seat using the
three-point seat belt.
"RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX"
(size category: B1)
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Installed only in the "forward facing" position.
Is attached to rings A and ring B, referred to
as TOP TETHER, using an upper strap.
Is only installed on the front passenger seat
or on the outer rear seats. The head restraint
on the outer rear seat must be fully raised.
Three shell angles: sitting, reclining,
lying down.
This child seat can also be used on seats
not equipped with ISOFIX mountings. In this
case, it must be secured to the vehicle seat
using the three-point seat belt. Adjust the
front seat of the vehicle so that the child's feet
do not touch the backrest.
An incorrectly installed child seat
compromises the child's safety in the
event of an accident.
Strictly observe the fitting instructions
provided in the user guide supplied with
the child seat.
113
5
Safety
Summary table of locations for ISOFIX child seats
In line with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing ISOFIX child seats on the vehicle seats fitted with ISOFIX mountings.
In the case of universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats, the ISOFIX size category, determined by a letter from A to G, is indicated on the child
seat next to the i-Size logo.
Weight of the child/indicative age
Under 10 kg
(group 0)
Up to about
6 months old
Under 10 kg
(group 0)
Under 13 kg
(group 0+)
Up to about 1 year old
From 9 to 18 kg
(group 1)
From about 1 to 3 years old
Type of ISOFIX child seat Carrycot "Rearward facing"
"Rearward facing"
"Forward facing"
ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1
Seat position
Front passenger
airbag
Row 1 (a)
Passenger
seat (b)
Deactivated "OFF" X IL IL IUF/IL
Activated "ON" X X X IUF/IL
Row 2
Outer rear
seats (c)
X X IL X IL IUF/IL
Centre rear
seat
Not ISOFIX
114
Safety
X Seat not suitable for installing an ISOFIX
seat or carrycot of the weight group
indicated.
(a) Refer to the current legislation in your
country before installing a child at this
seat position.
(b) Tilt the seat backrest to 45°, then install
the child seat.
Straighten the backrest until it contacts
the child seat's backrest.
(c) To install a child seat on a rear seat,
"rearward facing" or "forward facing",
adjust the rear seat to the fully back
position with the backrest tilted.
Locations for i-Size child seats
i-Size child seats have two latches that engage on the two rings A.
i-Size child seats also have:
- either an upper strap that is attached to ring B,
- or a support leg that rests on the vehicle floor, compatible with the approved i-Size seat position,
the role of which is to prevent the child seat from tipping forward in the event of a collision.
For more information on ISOFIX mountings, refer to the corresponding section.
In accordance with the new European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing
i-Size child seats on seats in the vehicle fitted with ISOFIX mountings approved for i-Size.
For securing the upper strap using the ISOFIX
mountings, refer to the corresponding section.
IUF Seat suitable for installing an Isofix
Universal seat, "Forward facing", secured
using the upper strap.
IL Seat suitable for installing an Isofix Semi-
Universal seat which is either:
- "rearward facing" fitted with an upper
strap or a support leg,
- "forward facing" fitted with a support
leg,
- a carrycot fitted with an upper strap or
a support leg.
Seat position
Front passenger
airbag
i-Size restraint
system
Row 1 (a)
Passenger seat
(b)
Deactivated "OFF" i-U
Activated "ON" i-UF
Row 2 (c)
Outer rear seats i-U
Centre rear seat Not i-Size
i-U Suitable for i-Size restraint systems in the
"Universal" category, "forward facing" and
"rearward facing".
i-UF Only suitable for i-Size restraint systems
in the "Universal" category which are
"forward facing".
115
5
Safety
(a) Refer to the current legislation in your
country before installing a child at this
seat position.
(b) Tilt the seat backrest to 45°, then install
the child seat.
Straighten the backrest until it contacts
the child seat's backrest.
(c) To install a child seat on a rear seat,
"rearward facing" or "forward facing",
adjust the rear seat to the fully back
position with the backrest tilted.
Manual child lock
Manual system to prevent opening of a rear
door using its interior control.
The control, red in colour, is located on the
edge of each rear door.
It is identified by a symbol marked on the
bodywork.
Locking
Unlocking
F Using the ignition key or the integral key,
depending on version, turn the red control
as far as it will go:
- to the left on the left-hand rear door,
- to the right on the right-hand rear door.
F Using the ignition key or the integral key,
depending on version, turn the red control
as far as it will go:
- to the right on the left-hand rear door,
- to the left on the right-hand rear door.
Do not confuse the child lock control,
which is red, with the back-up locking
control, which is black.
Electric child lock
Activation/Deactivation
F Press this button; its indicator lamp remains
on for as long as the child lock is activated.
A message confirms the activation.
It is still possible to open the doors from the
outside.
F Press this button again; its indicator lamp
remains off for as long as the child lock
is deactivated. A message confirms the
deactivation.
Remote control system to prevent
opening of the rear doors using their
interior controls.
With the ignition on:
116
Driving
Driving recommendations
F Observe the driving regulations and remain
vigilant whatever the traffic conditions.
F Monitor your environment and keep your
hands on the wheel to be able to react to
anything that may happen any time.
F Drive smoothly, anticipate the need for
braking and maintain a longer safety
distance, especially in bad weather.
F Stop the vehicle to carry out operations
that require close attention (such as
adjustments).
F During long trips, take a break every two
hours.
Important!
Never leave the engine running in
a closed space without sufficient
ventilation. Internal combustion engines
emit toxic exhaust gases such as carbon
monoxide. Danger of poisoning and death!
In severe wintry conditions (temperature
below -23°C), let the engine run for
4 minutes before moving off, to ensure
the correct operation and durability of the
mechanical components of your vehicle
(engine and gearbox).
Never drive with the parking brake
applied. Risk of overheating and damage
to the braking system!
Never park the vehicle or leave the
engine running on a flammable surface
(dry grass, dead leaves, etc.). The
exhaust system of your vehicle is very
hot, even several minutes after the engine
stops. Risk of fire!
Never leave a vehicle unattended with
the engine running. If you have to leave
your vehicle with the engine running, apply
the parking brake and put the gearbox into
neutral or position N or P (depending on
the type of gearbox).
Never leave children inside the vehicle
unsupervised.
On flooded roads
We strongly advise against driving on flooded
roads, as this could cause serious damage
to the engine or gearbox, as well as to the
electrical systems of your vehicle.
If you are obliged to drive on a flooded road:
F check that the depth of water does not
exceed 15 cm, taking account of waves that
might be generated by other users,
F deactivate the Stop & Start function,
F drive as slowly as possible without stalling.
In all cases, do not exceed 6 mph (10 km/h),
F do not stop and do not switch off the engine.
117
6
Driving
In case of towing
Driving with a trailer places greater
demands on the towing vehicle and
requires extra care from the driver.
Respect the maximum towable weights.
At altitude: reduce the maximum load
by 10% per 1,000 metres of altitude; the
decreased air density at altitude reduces
engine performance.
New vehicle: do not pull a trailer
before having driven at least 620 miles
(1,000 kilometres).
If the outside temperature is high, let the
engine idle for 1 to 2 minutes after the
vehicle comes to a stop, to help it to cool.
Before setting o
Nose weight
On leaving the flooded road, as soon as safety
conditions allow, make several light brake
applications to dry the brake discs and pads.
If in doubt about the state of your vehicle,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
F Distribute the load in the trailer so that the
heaviest items are as close as possible to
the axle and the nose weight (at the point
where it joins your vehicle) approaches the
maximum permitted without exceeding it.
Tyres
F Check the tyre pressures of the towing
vehicle and of the trailer, observing the
recommended pressures.
Lighting
F Check the electrical signalling on the trailer
and the headlamp beam height of your
vehicle.
If a genuine CITROËN towing device is
used, the rear parking sensors will be
deactivated automatically to avoid the
audible signal.
When driving
Cooling
Towing a trailer uphill increases the
temperature of the coolant. The maximum
towable load depends on the gradient and the
exterior temperature. The cooling capacity of
the fan does not increase with engine speed.
F Reduce speed and lower the engine speed,
so as to limit the heating-up.
In all cases, pay attention to the coolant
temperature.
If this warning lamp and the STOP
warning lamp come on, stop the
vehicle and switch off the engine as
soon as possible.
Brakes
Braking distances are increased when towing
a trailer. To avoid overheating of the brakes, the
use of engine braking is recommended.
Side wind
Bear in mind the increased susceptibility to the
wind that the vehicle will have.
118
Driving
Anti-theft protection
Electronic immobiliser
The keys include an electronic engine
immobiliser system, whose secret code must
be recognised in order for starting to be
possible.
If the system malfunctions, indicated by the
display of a message, the engine will not start.
Contact the CITROËN dealer.
Starting/Switching o the
engine with the key
Key ignition switch
Avoid attaching heavy objects to the key
or the remote control, which would weigh
down on its blade in the ignition switch
and could cause a malfunction.
Ignition on position
It allows the use of the vehicle's electric
equipment or portable devices to be charged.
Once the state of charge of the battery drops
to the reserve level, the system switches to
energy economy mode: the power supply is
cut off automatically to preserve the remaining
battery charge.
Switching off the engine leads to a loss of
braking assistance.
Starting the engine
F Insert the key into the ignition switch; the
system recognises the code.
F Unlock the steering column by
simultaneously turning the steering wheel
and the key.
In certain cases, you may have to apply
significant force to move the steering
wheel (wheels on full lock, for example).
It has 3 positions:
- position 1 (Stop): inserting and removing
the key, steering column locked.
- position 2 (Ignition on): steering column
unlocked, ignition on, Diesel preheating,
engine running,
- position 3 (Starting).
Parking brake applied:
F With a manual gearbox, place the gear
lever in neutral then depress the clutch
pedal fully.
F With an automatic gearbox, place the gear
selector in mode N or P then depress the
brake pedal fully.
F With a petrol engine, operate the starter
motor by turning the key to position
3 without pressing the accelerator pedal,
until the engine starts. Once the engine
starts, release the key.
With petrol engines, after a cold start,
preheating the catalytic converter can
cause noticeable engine vibrations for
anything up to 2 minutes while stationary
with the engine running (accelerated idle
speed).
F With a Diesel engine, turn the key to
position 2, ignition on, to operate the engine
pre-heating system.
119
6
Driving
Wait until this warning lamp goes off
in the instrument panel, then operate
the starter motor by turning the key
to position 3 without pressing the
accelerator pedal, until the engine
starts. Once the engine starts,
release the key.
In wintry conditions, the warning lamp
may stay on for a longer period. When the
engine is hot, the warning lamp does not
come on.
If the engine does not start straight away,
switch off the ignition. Wait a few seconds
before operating the starter motor again.
If the engine does not start after several
attempts, do not keep trying: you risk
damaging the starter motor and the
engine. Contact a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
In mild conditions, do not leave the engine
at idle to warm up but move off straight
away and drive at moderate speed.
Switching off the engine
F Stop the vehicle.
F With the engine running at idle, turn the key
to position 1.
F Remove the key from the ignition switch.
F To lock the steering column, turn the
steering wheel until it locks.
To facilitate unlocking of the steering
column, it is recommended that the
wheels be returned to the straight ahead
position before switching off the engine.
F Check that the parking brake is correctly
applied, particularly on sloping ground.
Never switch off the ignition before the
vehicle is at a complete stop. With the
engine off, the braking and steering
assistance systems are also cut off: risk of
loss of control of the vehicle.
When you leave the vehicle, keep the key
with you and lock the vehicle.
Energy economy mode
After switching off the engine (position 1
- Stop), for a maximum of 30 minutes you
can still use functions such as the audio and
telematic system, the wipers, dipped beam
headlamps, courtesy lamps, etc.
For more information on Energy
economy mode, refer to the
corresponding section.
Key left in
If the key has been left in the ignition
switch at position 2 (Ignition on), the
ignition will be switched off automatically
after one hour.
To switch the ignition back on, turn the key
to position 1 (Stop), then back to position
2 (Ignition on).
120
Driving
Starting/Switching o the
engine with Keyless Entry
and Starting
The electronic key must be present in the
passenger compartment.
If it is not detected, a message is
displayed.
Move the electronic key so that the engine
can be started or stopped.
If there is still a problem, refer to the "Key
not detected – Back-up starting or Back-
up switch-off " section.
Starting the engine
F Press the "START/STOP" button while
maintaining pressure on the pedal until the
engine starts.
For Diesel engines, when the temperature is
below zero and/or the engine is cold, starting
will only occur once the preheater warning
lamp is off.
F You should keep the pedal fully depressed
and not press the "START/STOP" button
again until the engine is running.
If one of the starting conditions is not met, a
message is displayed.
In some circumstances, you are alerted by
a message that it is necessary to turn the
steering wheel while pressing the "START/
STOP" button, to help unlock the steering
column.
With petrol engines, after a cold start,
preheating the catalytic converter can
cause noticeable engine vibrations for
anything up to 2 minutes while stationary
with the engine running (accelerated idle
speed).
Switching off the engine
F Immobilise the vehicle, engine at idle.
F With a manual gearbox, ideally put the
gear lever into neutral.
F With an automatic gearbox, ideally select
mode P or N.
F Press the "START/STOP" button.
In some circumstances, it is necessary to turn
the steering wheel to lock the steering column.
On certain versions with the EAT8 automatic
gearbox, the steering column does not lock, but
the gearbox locks in mode P.
If the vehicle is not immobilised, the
engine will not stop.
Never leave your vehicle with the
electronic key still inside.
Switching off the engine leads to a loss of
braking assistance.
F With a manual gearbox, place the gear
lever in neutral and depress the clutch pedal
fully.
or
F With an automatic gearbox, select mode P
or N and press the brake pedal.
If this warning lamp comes on after
pressing the "START/STOP" button:
121
6
Driving
Switching the ignition on
without starting
With the electronic key inside the vehicle,
pressing the "START/STOP" button, without
pressing any of the pedals, allows the
ignition to be switched on without starting the
engine (turning on the instrument panel and
accessories such as the audio system and the
lighting).
F Press this button again to switch off the
ignition and allow the vehicle to be locked.
Key not detected
Back-up starting
A back-up reader is fitted to the steering
column to allow the engine to be started if
the system does not detect the key in the
recognition zone, or when the battery in the
electronic key is discharged.
F With a manual gearbox, place the gear
lever in neutral, then fully depress the clutch
pedal.
F With an automatic gearbox, select mode
P, then fully depress the brake pedal.
F Press the "START/STOP" button.
The engine starts.
Back-up switch-o
When the electronic key is not detected or is
no longer in the recognition zone, a message
appears in the instrument panel when closing
a door or trying to switch off the engine.
F To confirm the instruction to switch off the
engine, press the "START/STOP" button for
about five seconds.
Emergency switch-off
In the event of an emergency only, the engine
can be switched off without conditions (even
when driving).
Press the "START/STOP" button for about
5 seconds.
In this case, the steering column locks as soon
as the vehicle stops.
On certain versions with the EAT8 automatic
gearbox, the steering column does not lock.
F Place and hold the remote control against
the reader.
In the event of a fault with the electronic key,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Electric parking brake
In automatic mode, this system applies the
parking brake when the engine is switched off
and releases it when the vehicle moves off.
122
Driving
Indicator lamp
This indicator lamp comes on in the
instrument panel and on the control
lever to confirm the application of
the parking brake, accompanied by
display of the message "Parking
brake applied".
It goes off to confirm the release of the parking
brake.
This indicator lamp flashes on the control lever
when manual parking brake application or
release is performed.
In the event of a battery failure, the
electric parking brake no longer works.
As a safety measure with a manual
gearbox, if the parking brake is not
applied, immobilise the vehicle by
engaging a gear.
As a safety measure with an automatic
gearbox, if the parking brake is not
applied, immobilise the vehicle by placing
the chocks supplied against one of the
wheels.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Before leaving the vehicle, check that the
parking brake is applied: the indicator
lamps in the instrument panel and the
control lever must be on fixed.
If the parking brake is not applied, there
is an audible signal and a message is
displayed on opening the driver's door.
Never leave a child alone inside the
vehicle as they could release the parking
brake.
Any time that the engine is running, the driver
can take over to apply or release the parking
brake by operating the control lever:
F by briefly pulling the control lever to apply
the brake,
F by briefly pushing the control lever, while
pressing the brake pedal, to release it.
Automatic mode is activated by default.
When towing, parking on a steep slope
or if your vehicle is heavily laden, turn
the wheels towards the kerb and with
a manual gearbox, engage a gear.
When towing, parking on a steep slope,
or if your vehicle is heavily laden, turn the
wheels towards the kerb and select mode
P with an automatic gearbox.
For towing, your vehicle is approved for
parking on slopes of up to 12%.
Manual operation
Manual release
With the ignition on or engine running:
F press the brake pedal,
F while maintaining pressure on the brake
pedal, briefly push the control lever.
The complete release of the parking brake is
confirmed by the brake indicator lamp and the
P indicator lamp in the control lever going off,
accompanied by the display of the message
"Parking brake released".
123
6
Driving
If you push the control lever without
pressing the brake pedal, the parking
brake will not be released and a message
is displayed.
Manual application
With the vehicle stationary:
F pull briefly on the control lever.
Confirmation of the instruction is signalled by
flashing of the indicator lamp in the control
lever.
Application of the parking brake
is confirmed by illumination of the
brake indicator lamp and the P
indicator lamp in the control lever,
accompanied by the display of the
message "Parking brake applied".
Automatic operation
Automatic release
Ensure first that the engine is running and the
driver's door is properly closed.
The electric parking brake releases
automatically and progressively when the
vehicle moves off.
With a manual gearbox
F Fully depress the clutch pedal, engage 1
st
gear or reverse.
F Press the accelerator pedal and release the
clutch pedal.
With an automatic gearbox
F Press the brake pedal.
F Select mode D, M or R.
F Release the brake pedal and press the
accelerator pedal.
With an automatic gearbox, if the brake
does not release automatically, check that
the front doors are correctly closed.
The complete release of the parking brake is
confirmed by the brake indicator lamp and the
P indicator lamp in the control lever going off,
accompanied by the display of the message
"Parking brake released".
When stationary with the engine running, do not
depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily,
you risk releasing the parking brake.
Automatic application
With the vehicle stationary, the parking brake
is automatically applied when the engine is
switched off.
Application of the parking brake
is confirmed by illumination of the
brake indicator lamp and the P
indicator lamp in the control lever,
accompanied by the display of the
message "Parking brake applied".
Automatic application does not take place
if the engine stalls or goes into STOP
mode of Stop & Start.
With automatic operation, you can also
manually apply or release the parking
brake using the control lever.
124
Driving
Special cases
Parking the vehicle with the
brake released
In very cold conditions (ice), it is
recommended that the parking brake not
be applied.
To immobilise your vehicle, engage a gear
or place the chocks against one of the
wheels.
Immobilisation of the vehicle with the
parking brake released
F Switch off the engine.
Illumination of the indicator lamps in the
instrument panel and the control lever
confirm the application of the parking brake.
F Switch on the ignition again, without starting
the engine.
F Release the parking brake manually by
pushing the control lever while keeping your
foot on the brake pedal.
The complete release of the parking brake
is confirmed by the indicator lamp in the
instrument panel and the P indicator lamp in
the control lever going off, accompanied by
the display of the message "Parking brake
released".
F Switch off the ignition.
With an automatic gearbox, mode P is
automatically selected when the ignition is
switched off. The wheels are blocked.
For further information on the Automatic
gearbox, particularly in relation to leaving
the vehicle in free-wheeling mode, refer to
the corresponding section.
With an automatic gearbox, when mode N
is engaged, an audible signal will sound
if the driver's door is opened. It will stop
when you close the driver's door again.
Deactivating automatic
operation
In some situations, for example when it is
extremely cold or during towing (caravan,
breakdown), it may be necessary to deactivate
automatic operation of the system.
F Push and hold the control lever in the
release direction for at least 10 seconds and
no more than 15 seconds.
F Release the control lever.
F Press and hold the brake pedal.
F Pull the control lever in the application
direction for 2 seconds.
Deactivation of the automatic
functions is confirmed by
illumination of this indicator lamp in
the instrument panel.
F Release the control lever and the brake
pedal.
F Start the engine.
F Apply the parking brake with the control
lever, if it is released.
F Take your foot off the brake pedal.
From now on, the parking brake can only
be applied and released manually using the
control lever.
Repeat this procedure to reactivate automatic
operation (confirmed by the indicator lamp in
the instrument panel going off).
Emergency braking
In the event of a fault with the brake pedal or
in an exceptional situation (e.g. driver taken
ill, driver under instruction, etc.), a continuous
pull on the control lever will brake the vehicle.
Braking takes place while the control lever is
being pulled. It is interrupted if the control lever
is released.
125
6
Driving
The ABS and DSC systems ensure stability of
the vehicle during emergency braking.
If the emergency braking malfunctions, the
message "Parking brake control faulty" will be
displayed in the instrument panel.
If the ABS and DSC systems malfunction,
signalled by the illumination of one or both
warning lamps in the instrument panel, then
stability of the vehicle is no longer guaranteed.
In this event, stability must be assured by the
driver by repeating alternate "pull-release"
actions on the control lever until the vehicle is
immobilised.
6-speed manual gearbox
Engaging reverse gear
F Raise the trigger under the knob and move
the gear lever to the left, then forwards.
Only engage reverse gear when the
vehicle is stationary with the engine at
idle.
As a safety precaution and to facilitate
starting of the engine, always select
neutral and depress the clutch pedal.
Engaging 5
th
or 6
th
gear
F Move the lever fully to the right to engage 5
th
or 6
th
gear.
Failure to follow this advice may cause
permanent damage to the gearbox
(engagement of 3
rd
or 4
th
gear by mistake).
Automatic gearbox (EAT6/
EAT8)
Automatic 6 or 8-speed gearbox with a push
selector. It also offers a manual mode with gear
changes via control paddles situated behind
the steering wheel.
Gearbox selector positions
P. Park.
For parking the vehicle: the front wheels
are blocked.
R. Reverse.
N. Neutral.
For moving the vehicle with the ignition
off: in certain car washing machines,
when towing the vehicle, etc.
D. Automatic mode.
The gearbox manages gear changes
according to the style of driving, the road
profile and the vehicle load.
M. Manual mode.
The driver changes gear using the
steering mounted controls.
126
Driving
A. Button P.
To put the gearbox into Park mode.
B. Unlock button.
To unlock the gearbox and come out of
P or to change to R, with the foot on the
brake pedal.
Press and hold this button before pushing
the selector.
C. Button M.
To change from automatic mode D to
permanent manual mode.
D. Gearbox state indicators (P, R, N, D).
Move the selector by pressing it forward (N
or R) or rearward (N or D) once or twice,
if necessary going beyond the point of
resistance.
The push selector returns to its initial position
when released.
For example, to change from P to R, you can
either push forward twice without going beyond
the point of resistance or push just once going
beyond the point of resistance:
- In the first case, the gearbox goes from P to
N, then from N to R.
- In the second case, the gearbox goes
directly from P to R.
Steering mounted controls
In mode M or D, the steering mounted control
paddles allow the driver to change gear
manually.
They cannot be used to engage neutral or to
select or come out of reverse.
F Pull the "+" or "-" paddle towards you and
release to change up or down a gear.
Displays in the instrument panel
With the ignition on, the state of the gearbox is
displayed in the instrument panel:
P: park.
R: reverse.
N: neutral.
D1...D8: automatic mode.
S: Sport programme
M1...M8: manual mode.
-: instruction not accepted in manual mode.
If the driver's door is opened with the ignition
on, a message is displayed asking you to put
the gearbox into mode P.
The state of the gearbox is displayed in the
instrument panel for a few moments after
switching off the ignition.
Operation
With the engine running, if it is necessary to
press the brake pedal and/or the Unlock button
in order to change mode, an alert message is
displayed in the instrument panel.
Only appropriate attempted changes of mode
are accepted.
Push selector
127
6
Driving
With the engine running and the brakes
released, if R, D or M is selected, the
vehicle moves off, even without pressing
the accelerator pedal.
Never press the accelerator and brake
pedals at the same time – risk of damage
to the gearbox!
In the event of a battery failure, you
must place the chocks supplied with the
vehicle tools against one of the wheels to
immobilise the vehicle.
Unlocking the gearbox
- From mode P:
F fully depress the brake pedal,
F press the Unlock button,
F while continuing to press the brake pedal
and the Unlock button, select another
mode.
- From neutral N, at a speed below 3 mph
(5 km/h):
F fully depress the brake pedal,
F while continuing to press the brake pedal,
select another mode.
Engaging reverse gear
F Slow down until you come to a stop.
F With your foot on the brake pedal, press the
Unlock button.
F While maintaining the presses, select
mode R.
Manual mode
Switching to the mode:
F with mode D selected in advance,
F press button M; the green indicator lamp in
the button comes on.
Exiting the mode:
F push forwards once to return to D.
or
F press button M; the indicator lamp in the
button goes off.
Switching o the ignition
To switch off the ignition, the vehicle must be
stationary.
Changing to free-wheeling
To put the vehicle in free-wheeling mode, with
the engine switched off:
F with the vehicle stationary and the engine
running, select N,
F switch off the engine,
F within 5 seconds, switch the ignition on
again,
F with your foot on the brake pedal, push the
selector forward or back once to confirm N
and manually release the electric parking
brake,
F switch off the ignition.
After this time limit, the gearbox engages mode
P; it is then necessary to restart the procedure.
If you open the driver's door while mode N
is engaged, an audible signal will sound. It
will stop when you close the driver's door
again.
Special aspects of automatic
mode
The gearbox selects the gear that offers
optimum performance, taking account of the
exterior temperature, the profile of the road, the
load on the vehicle and the style of driving.
For maximum acceleration without touching the
selector, push the accelerator to the floor (kick-
down). The gearbox shifts down automatically
or holds the gear selected until the maximum
engine speed is reached.
The steering mounted controls allow the driver
to temporarily select a gear, if the road and
engine speed permit.
Special aspects of manual mode
The change from one gear to another takes
place only if the road speed and engine speed
permit.
128
Driving
Moving o
From mode P:
F Fully depress the brake pedal.
F Start the engine.
F Maintaining pressure on the brake pedal,
press the Unlock button.
F Push once or twice rearward to select the
automatic mode D, or forward to engage
reverse R.
From neutral N:
F Fully depress the brake pedal.
F Start the engine.
F Maintaining pressure on the brake pedal,
push rearward to select the automatic mode
D, or while pressing the Unlock button push
forward to engage reverse R.
Then, from D or R:
F Release the brake pedal.
F Accelerate progressively to automatically
release the electric parking brake.
The vehicle moves off immediately.
In severe wintry conditions (temperature
below -23°C), it is recommended that the
engine be allowed to run for a few minutes
before moving off, to ensure the correct
operation and durability of the engine and
gearbox.
If your vehicle has an automatic gearbox,
never try to start the engine by pushing
the vehicle.
Stopping the vehicle
Whatever the state of the gearbox when the
ignition is switched off, mode P is engaged
automatically and immediately.
However, in mode N, mode P will be engaged
after a duration of 5 seconds (allowing for the
process of putting the vehicle to free-wheeling).
Check that mode P has been engaged and
that the electric parking brake was applied
automatically; if not, apply it manually.
The corresponding indicator lamps
in the selector and the electric
parking brake control lever must
be on, as well as those in the
instrument panel.
Operating faults
Gearbox operating fault
This is signalled by the illumination of
this warning lamp, accompanied by the
display of a message and an audible
signal, when the ignition is switched on.
Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Do not drive faster than 62 mph (100 km/h),
keeping to the speed limit.
The gearbox switches to back-up mode: mode
D is locked in third gear, the steering-mounted
control paddles are inoperative, mode M is no
longer available. You may feel a pronounced
jolt when engaging reverse. This does not
present any risk for the gearbox.
Selector operating fault
Minor malfunction
You are alerted by this warning lamp
lighting up, accompanied by the display
of a message and an audible signal.
Drive cautiously and go to a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop.
In certain cases, the selector lamps may not
come on, but the state of the gearbox is still
displayed in the instrument panel.
Major malfunction
You are alerted by the illumination of
this warning lamp.
129
6
Driving
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so, away
from the traffic, and call a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
When the ignition is switched off, the
gearbox goes into mode P automatically.
Driving mode
1. ECO.
Press this button to activate/deactivate
"ECO" mode (confirmed by the
illumination/extinction of the indicator
lamp).
2.
SPORT.
Press this button to activate/deactivate
"SPORT" mode (confirmed by the
illumination/extinction of the indicator lamp).
When the message disappears, the selected
mode is activated.
Each mode is independent and they cannot
be activated simultaneously. Activation of
one mode deactivates the other.
"SPORT" mode (depending on version)
With the engine running, when SPORT mode is
activated, the gearbox delays changing up for
a more dynamic driving style.
Activating SPORT mode is not recommended
in the following situations:
- ASR/DSC deactivated,
- low fuel level reached,
- low AdBlue level reached.
In mode D, pressing this button activates the
SPORT programme.
"S" appears in the instrument panel.
Pressing this button again deactivates the
function.
Pressing this button has no effect when
towing a connected trailer.
"ECO" mode
This allows fuel consumption to be reduced.
With the EAT8 gearbox, "free-wheeling" mode
may activate to save fuel. Take your foot fully
off the accelerator pedal to anticipate slowing
down.
SPORT or ECO mode is automatically
deactivated when the ignition is switched
off.
Hill start assist
System which keeps your vehicle immobilised
temporarily (approximately 2 seconds) when
starting on a gradient, the time it takes to
move your foot from the brake pedal to the
accelerator pedal.
It is only active when:
- the vehicle is completely stationary, with
your foot on the brake pedal,
- certain slope conditions are met,
- the driver's door is closed.
Do not leave the vehicle while it is being
held in the hill start assist phase.
If you need to leave the vehicle with the
engine running, apply the parking brake
manually. Then check that the parking
brake warning lamp is on fixed on the
instrument panel.
The hill start assist function cannot be
deactivated. However, use of the parking
brake to immobilise the vehicle interrupts
its operation.
130
Driving
Malfunction
Gear eciency indicator
(Depending on engine.)
This system reduces fuel consumption by
recommending the most appropriate gear.
Operation
Depending on the driving situation and your
vehicle's equipment, the system may advise
you to skip one or more gears.
Gear engagement recommendations are
only optional. In fact, the configuration of the
road, the traffic density and safety remain
determining factors when choosing the best
gear. Therefore, the driver remains responsible
for deciding whether or not to follow the
system's advice.
This function cannot be deactivated.
With an automatic gearbox, the system is
only active in manual operation.
The information appears in the
instrument panel in the form of an
arrow and the recommended gear.
The system adapts its gear shift
recommendation according to the driving
conditions (slope, load, etc.) and the
driver's requirements (power, acceleration,
braking, etc.).
The system never suggests:
- engaging first gear,
- engaging reverse.
Uphill, with the vehicle stationary, the vehicle
is held for a short time when you release the
brake pedal.
With a manual gearbox, if you are in first gear
or in neutral.
With an automatic gearbox, if you are in
position D or M.
Downhill, with the vehicle stationary and
reverse gear engaged, the vehicle is held for
a short time when you release the brake pedal.
If a fault in the system occurs, these warning
lamps come on.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the system checked.
Stop & Start
The Stop & Start function puts the engine
temporarily into standby – STOP mode – during
phases when the vehicle is stopped (red lights,
queues, etc.). The engine restarts automatically
– START mode – as soon as the driver wishes
to move off again.
Primarily designed for urban use, the function
is intended to reduce fuel consumption and
exhaust emissions as well as the noise level
when stationary.
The function does not affect the functionalities
of the vehicle, in particular the braking.
131
6
Driving
Driving on flooded roads
Before entering into a flooded area, it is
strongly recommended that you deactivate
the Stop & Start system.
For more information on Driving
recommendations, particularly on
flooded roads, refer to the corresponding
section.
Deactivation/Reactivation
The function is activated by default when the
ignition is switched on.
To deactivate/reactivate the function:
F Press the button.
A message in the instrument panel confirms
the change of state.
When the function is deactivated, the orange
indicator lamp is lit; if the engine was in
standby, it restarts immediately.
Associated indicator lamps
Function activated.
Function deactivated or malfunction.
Operation
Opening the bonnet
Before doing anything under the bonnet,
deactivate the Stop & Start system to
avoid any risk of injury caused by the
engine restarting automatically.
Main conditions for operation
- The driver's door must be closed.
- The driver's seat belt must be fastened.
- The state of charge of the battery must be
sufficient.
- The temperature of the engine must be
within its nominal operating range.
- The outside temperature must be between
0°C and 35°C.
Putting the engine into standby
(STOP mode)
The engine automatically goes into standby
as soon as the driver indicates the intention of
stopping.
- With a manual gearbox: at a speed below
2 mph (3 km/h), with the gear lever in
neutral and the clutch pedal released.
- With an automatic gearbox:
• With the gear selector in mode D or M,
at a speed below 12 mph (20 km/h) for
BlueHDi 180 S&S versions, or below
2 mph (3 km/h) for PureTech 130/175 S&S
and BlueHDi 130 S&S versions, with the
brake pedal depressed.
• With the gear selector in mode N, at
a speed of 0 mph (0 km/h).
• With the gear selector in mode P and
the brake pedal released, at a speed of
0 mph (0 km/h).
Time counter
A time counter adds up the time spent in
standby during the journey. It is reset to zero
every time the ignition is switched on.
132
Driving
Special cases:
The engine does not go into standby in the
following cases.
- Steep slope (rising or falling).
- Vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph (10 km/h)
since the last engine start (with the key or
the "START/STOP" button).
- Needed to maintain a comfortable
temperature in the passenger compartment.
- Demisting active.
In these cases, this indicator lamp
flashes for a few seconds, then
goes off.
Restarting the engine (START
mode)
F With a manual gearbox: with the clutch
pedal fully depressed.
F With an automatic gearbox:
• With the selector in position D or M: with
the brake pedal released.
• With the selector in position N and the
brake pedal released: with the selector at
D or M.
• With the selector in position P and the
brake pedal depressed: with the selector
at R, N, D or M.
• Reverse gear engaged.
Special cases
The engine restarts automatically in the
following cases.
- With a manual gearbox: vehicle speed
exceeds 2.5 mph (4 km/h),
- With an automatic gearbox:
• With the gear selector in position N and
the brake pedal released, vehicle speed
exceeds 0.6 mph (1 km/h).
• Adaptive Cruise Control function
deactivated.
In these cases, this indicator lamp
flashes for a few seconds, then
goes off.
Malfunctions
In the event of a malfunction,
this warning lamp flashes for
a few moments, then remains on,
accompanied by the display of
a message.
F Have the vehicle checked by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
The vehicle stalls in STOP mode
All of the instrument panel warning lamps come
on if this fault occurs.
The Stop & Start system requires a 12 V
battery of specific technology and
specification.
All work concerning the battery must be
carried out only by a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
After the engine has restarted, STOP
mode is not available until the vehicle has
reached a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).
During parking manoeuvres, STOP mode
is not available for a few seconds after
coming out of reverse gear or turning the
steering wheel.
The engine automatically restarts as soon as
the driver indicates the intention of moving off
again.
Tyre under-ination
detection
This system automatically checks the
pressures of the tyres while driving.
It compares the information given by the wheel
speed sensors with reference values, which
133
6
Driving
must be reinitialised every time the tyre
pressures are adjusted or a wheel changed.
The system triggers an alert as soon as it
detects a drop in the inflation pressure of one
or more tyres.
Under-inflation detection does not replace
the need for vigilance on the part of the
driver.
This system does not avoid the need
to regularly check the tyre pressures
(including the spare wheel) as well as
before a long journey.
Driving with under-inflated tyres,
particularly in adverse conditions (heavy
load, high speed, long journey):
- worsens road-holding,
- lengthens braking distances,
- causes premature wear of the tyres,
- increases fuel consumption.
The inflation pressures defined for your
vehicle can be found on the tyre pressure
label.
For more information on the
Identification markings, refer to the
corresponding section.
Checking tyre pressures
This check should be done when the tyres
are "cold" (vehicle stopped for 1 hour or
after a journey of less than 6 miles (10 km)
at moderate speeds).
Otherwise, add 0.3 bar to the pressures
shown on the label.
Under-inflation alert
This is signalled by continuous
illumination of this warning lamp,
an audible signal and the display of
a message.
F Reduce speed immediately, avoid excessive
steering movements and avoid sudden
braking.
F Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so.
The loss of pressure detected does not
always cause visible bulging of the tyre.
Do not rely on just a visual check.
F If it is not possible to make this check
immediately, drive carefully at reduced
speed.
F In the event of a puncture, use the
temporary puncture repair kit or the spare
wheel (depending on equipment).
The alert is kept active until the system is
reinitialised.
Reinitialisation
The system must be reinitialised after any
adjustment to the pressure of one or more
tyres, and after changing one or more wheels.
F Using a compressor, such as the one in the
temporary puncture repair kit, check the
pressures of the four tyres when cold.
Before reinitialising the system, make
sure that the pressures of the four tyres
are correct for the conditions of use of the
vehicle and conform to the values written
on the tyre pressure label.
Check the pressures of the four tyres
before performing the reinitialisation.
The system does not advise if a pressure
is incorrect at the time of reinitialisation.
134
Driving
With the vehicle stationary, the
system is reinitialised via the
Driving/Vehicle menu of the touch
screen.
F In this menu, select the "Driving functions"
tab.
F In the page, select the " Under-inflation
initialisation" function.
F Select "Yes" to confirm.
The reinitialisation is confirmed by the display
of a message and an audible signal.
Malfunction
In this case, under-inflation monitoring of the
tyres is no longer assured.
Have the system checked by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
CITROËN ConnectedCAM
®
(Depending on country of sale.)
This camera, installed at the top of the
windscreen and connected wirelessly, allows
you to:
- take photos and videos on demand and
share them,
- send the vehicle's GPS coordinates to
a smartphone,
- record videos automatically in the event of
a vehicle impact.
Without exception, any action which the
driver takes concerning the camera must
be with the vehicle stopped.
Operation
To use all camera functions, you must perform
the following operations:
F download the "CITROËN ConnectedCAM
®
"
application onto a smartphone,
F pair the smartphone with the camera
following the instructions given by the
application.
Pairing is necessary at the first connection.
After this it will be automatic.
The default pairing code is: ConnectedCAM.
Switching on
F Press and hold this button to
switch the camera on.
The indicator lamp in the button
comes on.
When the camera is switched on, video
recording is automatic and permanent.
The illumination of these warning lamps
indicates a fault with the system.
A message appears, accompanied by an
audible signal.
135
6
Driving
Driving and manoeuvring aids cannot, in
any circumstances, replace the need for
vigilance on the part of the driver.
The driver must comply with the Highway
Code, must remain in control of the
vehicle in all circumstances and must be
able to retake control of it at all times. The
driver must adapt the speed to climactic
conditions, traffic and the state of the
road.
It is the driver's responsibility to constantly
check the traffic, to assess the relative
distances and speeds of other vehicles
and to anticipate their movements before
indicating and changing lane.
The systems cannot exceed the limits of
the laws of physics.
Switching o
F Press and hold this button to
switch the camera off.
The indicator lamp in the button
goes off.
If you switch the camera off manually, it will
remain off even after the vehicle is restarted
and will have to be switched on manually.
Managing photos and videos
F Press this button briefly to take
a photo.
An audible signal confirms that the request has
been acknowledged.
F Press and hold this button to
record a video.
A micro USB port also allows the data from the
camera to be saved onto other media such as
computers, tablets, etc.
Thanks to the "CITROËN ConnectedCAM
®
"
application, you can then automatically and
immediately share your photos and videos on
social networks or by email.
An audible signal confirms that the request has
been acknowledged.
Resetting the system
For safety reasons, the driver must not
use the CITROËN ConnectedCAM
®
application from a smartphone while
driving. He or she must perform any action
requiring sustained attention when the
vehicle is stationary.
Operating fault
When a system fault occurs, the
indicator lamp in the button flashes.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or by
Pressing and holding these two buttons
simultaneously resets the system.
This action erases all data recorded in the
camera and reinitialises the camera's default
pairing code.
a qualified workshop.
Driving and manoeuvring
aids – General
recommendations
Driving aids
You should hold the steering wheel with
both hands, always use the interior and
exterior rear view mirrors, always keep
your feet close to the pedals and take
a break every two hours.
136
Driving
Manoeuvring aids
The driver must always check the
surroundings of the vehicle before and
during the whole manoeuvre, in particular
using the mirrors.
Radar
The operation of the radar as well as the
associated functions may be impaired
through the accumulation of dirt (mud,
frost, etc.), in certain difficult weather
conditions (very heavy rain, snow) or if the
bumper is damaged.
If the front bumper is to be repainted,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop; certain types of paint could
interfere with the operation of the radar.
Driving aids camera
This camera and its associated functions
may be impaired if the windscreen area in
front of the camera is dirty, misty, frosty,
covered with snow, damaged or masked
by a sticker.
On versions with camera alone, this
message indicates to you that the camera
is obstructed: "Driving aids camera:
Visibility limited, see user guide".
In humid and cold weather, demist the
windscreen regularly.
Poor visibility (inadequate street lighting,
heavy rain, thick fog, snowfall), dazzle
(headlamps of an oncoming vehicle, low
sun, reflections on a damp road, leaving
a tunnel, alternating shade and light) can
also impair detection performance.
Other cameras
The images from the camera(s) displayed
on the touch screen or on the instrument
panel may be distorted by the relief.
In the presence of areas in shade, or in
conditions of bright sunlight or inadequate
lighting, the image may be darkened and
with lower contrast.
Obstacles may appear further away than
they actually are.
137
6
Driving
Maintenance
Clean the bumpers and door mirrors and
the field of vision of the cameras regularly.
When washing your vehicle at high
pressure, direct the spray from at least
30 cm away from the radar, sensors and
cameras.
Mats
The use of mats not approved by
CITROËN may interfere with the operation
of the speed limiter or cruise control.
To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals:
F ensure that the mat is secured
correctly,
F never fit one mat on top of another.
Speed Limit recognition
and recommendation
Refer to the General recommendations on
the use of driving and manoeuvring aids.
This system displays the maximum authorised
speed in the instrument panel, according to
the speed limits in the country in which you are
driving, using:
- Speed limit signs detected by the camera.
- Speed limit details from the navigation
system mapping.
You should update your navigation
mapping regularly in order to receive
accurate speed limit information from the
system.
- Signs detected by the camera indicating the
area of a junction:
Sensors
Units of speed
Ensure that the units of speed displayed
on the instrument panel (mph or km/h) are
those for the country you are driving in.
If this is not the case, when the vehicle is
stationary, set the display to the required
units of speed so that it complies with
what is authorised locally.
In case of doubt, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
The operation of the sensors as well as
the associated functions may be disturbed
by sound interference such as those
emitted by noisy vehicles and machinery
(e.g. lorries, pneumatic drills), by the
accumulation of snow or dead leaves
on the road or in the event of damaged
bumpers and mirrors.
A front or rear impact to the vehicle can
upset the sensors' settings, which is not
always detected by the system: distance
measurements may be distorted.
The sensors do not detect obstacles that
are too low (pavements, studs) or too thin
(trees, posts, wire fences).
Certain obstacles located in the sensors'
blind spots may not be detected or may no
longer be detected during the manoeuvre.
Certain materials (fabrics) absorb sound
waves: pedestrians may not be detected.
138
Driving
- Certain qualifier plates detected by the camera:
Sign detected Suggested speed (calculated)
Entry into a junction area
Example:
Without CITROËN Connect Nav
10 mph or 20 km/h (depending on the units of the instrument panel)
With CITROËN Connect Nav
Display of the speed in force in the country in which you are driving.
Qualifier plate detected Display of the speed associated with the qualifier plate
Speed limit in rain
Examples:
If the wiper control stalk is in the "intermittent wipe" or "automatic wipe" position (in order to
activate the rain sensor):
68 mph (110 km/h) (for example)
Speed limit if towing If an approved towing device is fixed to the vehicle:
56 mph (90 km/h) (for example)
Speed limit applicable over a certain distance
Example:
43 mph (70 km/h) (for example)
139
6
Driving
The units for the speed limits (mph or
km/h) depend on the country you are
driving in.
It should be taken into account so that you
observe the speed limit.
For the system to operate correctly when
you change country, the units for speed in
the instrument panel must be those for the
country you are driving in.
Speed limit for vehicles whose gross vehicle
weight or gross train weight is less than
3.5 tonnes
56 mph (90 km/h) (for example)
Speed limit in snow
Example:
If the exterior temperature is below 3°C:
19 mph (30 km/h) (for example)
with a "snowflake" symbol
Speed limit at certain times
Example:
19 mph (30 km/h) (for example)
with a "clock" symbol
The automatic reading of road signs is
a driving aid system and does not always
display speed limits correctly.
The speed limit signs present on the road
always take priority in comparison with the
display by the system.
The system is designed to detect signs
that conform to the Vienna Convention on
road signs.
Specific speed limits, such as those for
heavy goods vehicles, are not displayed.
The display of the speed limit in the
instrument panel is updated as you pass
a speed limit sign intended for cars (light
vehicles).
140
Driving
Activation/Deactivation
By default, the system is automatically
activated at every engine start.
The function is activated and
deactivated in the Driving/Vehicle
menu of the touch screen.
Displays in the instrument panel
1. Detected speed limit indication.
or
2. Indication of the end of the speed limit.
The system is active but is not detecting speed
limit information.
On detection of speed limit information, the
system displays the value.
Operating limits
The legislation on speed limits is specific to
each country.
The system does not take account of reduced
speed limits in the following cases:
- poor weather (rain, snow),
- atmospheric pollution,
- when towing,
- driving with a space-saver type spare wheel
or snow chains fitted,
- puncture repair using the temporary repair
kit,
- young drivers, etc.
The following situations may interfere with
the operation of the system or prevent it from
working:
- poor visibility (inadequate street lighting,
falling snow, rain, fog),
- windscreen area located in front of the
camera dirty, misted, frost-covered, snow-
covered, damaged or covered by a sticker,
- fault with the camera,
- obsolete or incorrect mapping,
- obstructed road signs (by other vehicles,
vegetation, snow),
- speed limit signs that do not conform to the
standard, are damaged or distorted.
Recommendation
For a suggested maximum speed, the first
time that the vehicle's speed exceeds it by
more than 3 mph (5 km/h) (example: 59 mph
(95 km/h)), the speed flashes for 10 seconds.
In addition to Speed Limit recognition and
recommendation, the driver can select the
speed displayed as a speed setting for the
speed limiter or cruise control using the speed
limiter or cruise control storage button.
141
6
Driving
For more information on the Speed
limiter, Cruise control or Adaptive
cruise control, refer to the corresponding
sections.
Steering mounted controls
1. Select speed limiter/cruise control mode.
2. Memorise a speed setting.
Display in the instrument panel
3. Speed limit indication.
4. Offer to memorise the speed.
5. Current speed setting.
Memorising the speed
On detection of a sign offering a new speed
limit, the system displays the value and "MEM"
flashes for a few seconds to offer to make it
a new speed setting.
If there is a difference of less than 6 mph
(9 km/h) between the speed setting and
the speed displayed by the Speed Limit
recognition and recommendation, the
"MEM" symbol is not displayed.
Depending on the road conditions, several
speeds may be displayed.
F Press button 2 once to save the suggested
speed value.
A message is displayed to confirm the request.
F Press button 2 again to confirm and save
the new speed setting.
After a predetermined period, the screen
returns to the current display.
Extended Traffic Sign
Recognition
F Switch on the speed limiter/cruise control.
The speed limiter/cruise control information is
displayed.
This additional system recognises these road
signs and displays them in the instrument panel
if the appropriate display mode is selected.
One-way street: if you start driving the wrong
way down a one-way street, an alert message,
including the sign's symbol, is displayed in the
instrument panel (request to check the traffic
direction).
Other signs: when approaching one of these
signs, the sign's symbol is displayed in the
instrument panel.
The real road signs always take priority
over the display from the system.
The signs must comply with the Vienna
Convention on road signs.
142
Driving
Programmable speed
limiter
Steering mounted control
For more information on Memorising speeds
or on the Speed Limit recognition and
recommendation, refer to the corresponding
sections.
Displays in the instrument panel
Switching on/pausing
F Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the LIMIT position
to select the speed limiter; the function is
paused.
F If the speed setting is suitable (last speed
setting programmed in the system), press
button 4 to switch the speed limiter on.
F Pressing button 4 again temporarily
interrupts the function (pause).
Adjusting the Speed
Limit recognition and
recommendation setting
You do not have to switch the speed limiter on
in order to set the speed.
To modify the limit speed setting from the
current speed of the vehicle:
F in steps of +/- 1 mph (km/h), make
successive short presses on button 2 or 3,
F continuously, in steps of +/- 5 mph (km/h),
press and hold button 2 or 3.
1. ON (LIMIT position)/OFF (0 position).
2. Reduce the speed setting.
3. Increase the speed setting.
4. Pause/resume speed limiter with the
speed setting previously stored.
5. Depending on version:
Display of speed thresholds recorded
using Memorising speeds.
or
Use the speed suggested by the Speed
Limit recognition and recommendation
(MEM display).
6. Indication of speed limiter on (amber
colour)/pause (grey colour).
7. Indication of speed limiter mode selection.
8. Programmed speed value.
9. Speed suggested by the Speed Limit
recognition and recommendation system
(depending on version).
Refer to the General recommendations on
the use of driving and manoeuvring aids.
This system prevents the vehicle
from exceeding the speed
programmed by the driver (speed
setting).
The speed limiter is switched on manually.
The minimum speed setting is 19 mph
(30 km/h).
The speed setting remains in the system
memory when the ignition is switched off.
To modify the limit speed setting using
memorised speeds and from the touch screen:
F press button 5 to display the memorised
speed settings,
F press the button for the desired speed
setting.
143
6
Driving
To modify the speed limiter setting using
the speed suggested by the Speed Limit
recognition and recommendation system:
F the speed suggested is displayed in the
instrument panel,
F make a first press on button 5; a message
is displayed to confirm the memorisation
request,
F press button 5 again to save the suggested
speed.
The speed displays immediately in the
instrument panel as the new speed setting.
Temporarily exceeding the
programmed speed
When the limit speed is exceeded but this is not
due to action by the driver (in case of a steep
slope, for example), an audible signal triggers
immediately.
Once the speed of the vehicle returns to
the programmed setting, the speed limiter
functions again: the display of the programmed
speed setting becomes fixed again.
Switching off
F To temporarily exceed the programmed
speed threshold, fully depress the
accelerator pedal.
The speed limiter is deactivated temporarily
and the displayed programmed speed flashes.
If it is exceeded for a prolonged period of time,
an audible warning is triggered.
Simply release the accelerator pedal to return
to below the programmed speed.
F Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the "0" position:
the display of information on the speed
limiter disappears.
Malfunction
Flashing of the dashes indicates a fault with the
speed limiter.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
On sharp acceleration, as when
descending a steep hill, the speed limiter
will not be able to prevent the vehicle from
exceeding the programmed speed.
The speed limiter is deactivated
temporarily and the displayed
programmed speed flashes.
An audible signal accompanies the
flashing of the programmed speed when
exceeding the speed is not due to an
action by the driver.
The use of mats not approved by
CITROËN may interfere with the operation
of the speed limiter.
To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals:
- ensure that the mat is positioned
correctly,
- never fit one mat on top of another.
The selection screen closes after a few
moments.
This setting becomes the new limit speed.
144
Driving
Cruise control – particular
recommendations
For the safety of everyone, only use the
cruise control where the driving conditions
allow running at a constant speed and
keeping an adequate safety distance.
Remain vigilant when the cruise control
is activated. If you hold one of the speed
setting modification buttons, a very rapid
change in the speed of your vehicle may
occur.
When descending a steep hill, the cruise
control system cannot prevent the vehicle
from exceeding the set speed. Brake if
necessary to control the speed of your
vehicle.
On steep climbs or when towing, the set
speed may not be reached or maintained.
Exceeding the programmed speed
setting
The speed setting can be exceeded
temporarily by pressing the accelerator
pedal (the programmed speed flashes).
To return to the speed setting, release
the accelerator pedal (when this speed is
reached again, the display of the speed
stops flashing).
Operating limits
Never use the system in the following
situations:
- in an urban area with the risk of
pedestrians crossing the road,
- in heavy traffic (except versions with
the Stop & Go function),
- on winding or steep roads,
- on slippery or flooded roads,
- in unfavourable climatic conditions,
- driving on a speed circuit,
- driving on a rolling road,
- use of snow chains, non-slip covers or
studded tyres.
Programmable cruise
control
Refer to the General recommendations
on the use of driving and manoeuvring
aids and to Cruise control – particular
recommendations.
This system automatically keeps
the vehicle's speed at the cruise
value programmed by the driver
(speed setting), without using the
accelerator pedal.
The cruise control is switched on manually.
It requires a minimum vehicle speed of 25 mph
(40 km/h).
With a manual gearbox, it requires the
engagement of third gear or higher.
With an automatic gearbox, it requires the
engagement of mode D or of second gear or
higher in mode M.
The cruise control remains active after
changing gear regardless of the gearbox
type on engines fitted with Stop & Start.
145
6
Driving
Steering mounted control
1. ON (CRUISE position)/OFF (0 position).
2. Activation of cruise control at the current
speed/decrease speed setting.
3. Activation of cruise control at the current
speed/increase speed setting.
4. Pausing/resumption of cruise control with
the speed setting previously stored.
5. Depending on version:
Display of speed thresholds recorded
using Memorising speeds.
or
Use the speed suggested by the Speed
Limit recognition and recommendation
(MEM display).
For more information on Memorising speeds
or on the Speed Limit recognition and
recommendation, refer to the corresponding
sections.
Displays in the instrument panel
Switching on/pausing
F Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the "CRUISE"
position to select cruise control mode; the
function is paused.
F To start the cruise control and set a cruise
speed, once the vehicle has reached the
desired speed, press button 2 or 3; the
current speed of your vehicle becomes the
cruise speed setting.
You can release the accelerator pedal.
F Pressing button 4 temporarily interrupts
operation of the system (pause).
F Pressing button 4 again restores operation
of the cruise control (ON).
6. Indication of speed limiter on (amber
colour)/pause (grey colour).
7. Indication of cruise control mode
selection.
8. Value of the speed setting.
9. Speed suggested by the Speed Limit
recognition and recommendation system
(depending on version).
Modifying the cruise speed
setting
The cruise control must be active.
To modify the cruise speed setting from the
current speed of the vehicle:
F in steps of +/- 1 mph (km/h), make
successive short presses on button 2 or 3,
F continuously, in steps of +/- 5 mph (km/h),
press and hold button 2 or 3.
Take care: pressing and holding button
2 or 3 results in a rapid change in the
speed of your vehicle.
Switching off the ignition cancels any
speed setting.
146
Driving
To modify the cruise speed setting using
memorised speed settings and from the touch
screen:
F press button 5 to display the memorised
speed settings,
F press the button for the desired speed
setting.
The selection screen closes after a few
moments.
This setting becomes the new cruise speed.
To modify the cruise speed setting from the
speed suggested by the vehicle Speed Limit
recognition and recommendation:
F the speed suggested is displayed in the
instrument panel,
F make an initial press on button 5; a
message is displayed to confirm the
memorisation request.
F press button 5 again to save the suggested
speed.
The speed displays immediately in the
instrument panel as the new speed setting.
Switching off
F Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the "0" position:
the cruise control information disappears
from the screen.
Malfunction
As a precaution, it is recommended
that the cruise speed chosen be close
to the current speed of your vehicle, so
as to avoid any sudden acceleration or
deceleration of the vehicle.
Memorising speeds
Linked to the speed limiter and programmable
cruise control, this function allows speed limits
to be registered which will then be suggested
as settings for these two systems.
You can memorise several speed settings for
each for system.
By default, some speed settings are already
memorised.
As a safety measure, the driver must
only modify the speed settings when
stationary.
Memorising speeds
From the Driving/Vehicle menu of
the touch screen, select "Driving
functions", then "Memorised
speed settings".
"MEM" button
Flashing dashes indicate a fault with the cruise
control system.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
147
6
Driving
For more information on the Speed limiter or
Cruise control, refer to the associated section.
With this button, you can select a memorised
speed setting to use with the speed limiter or
the programmable cruise control.
Highway Driver Assist
This system provides active assistance in
keeping the vehicle in position in its lane.
It associates the Adaptive Cruise Control with
Stop & Go function and Active Lane Keeping
Assist.
These two functions must be activated and in
operation.
These functions are especially suitable for
driving on motorways and main roads.
For more information on Adaptive Cruise
Control and Active Lane Keeping Assist,
refer to the corresponding sections.
The system assists the driver in managing
the steering, acceleration and braking
within the limits of the laws of physics
and the capabilities of the vehicle. Some
road infrastructure elements or vehicles
present on the road may not be properly
seen or may be poorly interpreted by the
camera and radar, which may lead to an
unexpected change in direction, a lack of
steering correction and/or inappropriate
management of the acceleration or
braking.
Adaptive Cruise Control
Refer to the General recommendations
on the use of driving and manoeuvring
aids and to Cruise control – particular
recommendations.
This system automatically maintains the
speed of your vehicle at a value which you set
(speed setting), while keeping a safe distance
from the vehicle in front (target vehicle), and
which has been set beforehand by the driver.
The system automatically manages the
acceleration and deceleration of the vehicle.
With the Stop function, the system manages
the braking until the vehicle stops completely.
With the Stop & Go function, the system
manages the braking until the vehicle stops
completely, and also manages its restarting.
To do so, it has a camera located at the top of
the windscreen and, depending on version, a
radar located in the front bumper.
Primarily designed for driving on main
roads and motorways, this system only
works with moving vehicles driving in the
same direction as your vehicle.
If the driver operates a direction indicator
to overtake a slower vehicle, the cruise
control allows your vehicle to temporarily
approach the vehicle in front to assist
the overtaking manoeuvre, without ever
exceeding the speed setting.
148
Driving
Some vehicles present on the road may
not be properly seen or may be poorly
interpreted by the camera and/or radar
(e.g. a lorry), which may lead to a poor
assessment of the distances and lead to
the vehicle inappropriately accelerating or
braking.
Steering mounted control
Use
Activate the system (when paused)
F With the engine running, turn the
thumbwheel 1 downwards to the CRUISE
position. Cruise control is ready to operate
(grey display).
Start cruise control and select
a speed
With a manual gearbox, your speed must be
between between 19 and 112 mph (30 and
180 km/h).
With an automatic EAT6 gearbox, your speed
must be between between 1.2 and 112 mph
(2 and 180 km/h).
With an automatic EAT8 gearbox, your speed
must be between between 0 and 112 mph
(0 and 180 km/h).
F Press button 2 or 3: the current speed
becomes the speed setting (minimum
19 mph (30 km/h)) and cruise control is
immediately in operation (green displayed).
F Press 3 to increase or 2 to decrease the
speed setting (steps of 5 mph (km/h) if held
pressed).
Pressing and holding button 2 or 3 results
in a rapid change in the speed of your
vehicle.
1 ON (CRUISE position)/OFF (0 position).
2 Activation of cruise control at the current
speed/decrease speed setting.
3 Activation of cruise control at the current
speed/increase speed setting.
4 Pausing/resumption of cruise control with
the speed setting previously stored.
Confirmation of the restarting of the
vehicle after automatic stop (versions with
Stop & Go function).
5 Use the speed suggested by the Speed
Limit recognition and recommendation
(MEM display).
6 Display and adjustment of the distance
setting to the vehicle in front.
Pause/resume cruise control
F Press 4 or press the brake pedal. To pause
cruise control, you may also:
- shift from mode D to N,
- press the clutch pedal for more than
10 seconds,
- press the electric parking brake control.
F Press 4 to restart cruise control.
Cruise control may have been paused
automatically:
- when the speed of the vehicle goes below
19 mph (30 km/h) with a manual gearbox,
- when the speed of the engine goes below
1,100 rpm with a manual gearbox,
- by triggering of the ESC system.
With an EAT6 gearbox, following braking of
the vehicle bringing it to a complete stop, the
system holds the vehicle stationary; the cruise
control is paused. The driver should press
the accelerator pedal to move off, then above
1.2 mph (2 km/h), reactivate the system by
pressing one of the buttons 2, 3 or 4.
149
6
Driving
With an EAT8 gearbox, following braking of
the vehicle bringing it to a complete stop,
if the traffic conditions do not allow the
vehicle to be restarted within the 3 seconds
following immobilisation, press button 4 or the
accelerator pedal to start off again.
If the driver takes no action following this
immobilisation, the electric parking brake is
applied automatically after about 5 minutes.
Cruise control remains active after
changing gear regardless of the gearbox
type.
When the cruise control is paused,
the message "Activation not possible,
conditions unsuitable" is displayed as
long as reactivation is not possible (safety
conditions not met).
Using the Speed Limit recognition
and recommendation function
F Press 5 to accept the speed suggested by
the function, then press again to confirm.
To prevent any sudden acceleration or
deceleration of the vehicle, select a speed
setting fairly close to the current speed of
your vehicle.
Changing the inter-vehicle distance
F Press 6 to display the distance setting
thresholds ("Distant", "Normal", "Close"),
then press again to select an option.
After a few seconds, the option is accepted and
will be memorised when the ignition is switched
off.
Temporarily exceeding the speed
setting
F Press the accelerator pedal. Distance
monitoring and cruise control are
deactivated as long as you continue to
accelerate. "Cruise control suspended" is
displayed.
Deactivating the system
F Turn the thumbwheel 1 upwards to the OFF
position.
Displays in the instrument panel
The following information can be seen in the
instrument panel in "DRIVING" display mode.
7. Vehicle detected by the system (symbol
full).
8. Cruise control active (colour not grey).
9. Value of the speed setting.
10. Speed suggested by the Speed Limit
recognition and recommendation.
11. Vehicle held stopped (versions with
automatic gearbox).
12. Inter-vehicle distance setting.
13. Position of vehicle detected by the system.
Messages and alerts
The "Driving" display mode of the digital
instrument panel must have been selected first.
150
Driving
The display of these messages or alerts is
not sequential.
"Take back control of the vehicle"
(orange)
"Take back control of the vehicle"
(red)
"Activation not possible, conditions
unsuitable". The system refuses to
activate the cruise control (speed
outside the operating range, winding
road).
Stop function
"Cruise control paused" (for a few
seconds).
Stop & Go function
"To move off again: accelerate or
press button 4"
During the vehicle immobilisation phase, it
is recommended:
- Not to open the doors.
- Not to drop off or pick up passengers.
- Not to engage reverse gear.
When the vehicle restarts, watch out for
cyclists, pedestrians or animals which may
not be detected properly.
Operating limits
The cruise control operates by day and night, in
fog or moderate rainfall.
Certain situations cannot be managed by the
system and require driver intervention.
"Cruise control paused" or "Cruise
control suspended" following a brief
acceleration by the driver.
"Cruise control active", no vehicle
detected.
"Cruise control paused", vehicle
detected.
"Cruise control active", vehicle
detected.
F Brake or accelerate, depending on the context.
F Take immediate control of the vehicle:
the system cannot manage the current
driving situation.
The system has brought the vehicle to
a complete stop and is holding it immobilised:
the cruise control pauses.
The driver must accelerate to move off again,
then reactivate cruise control.
The system has brought the vehicle to
a complete stop.
Within 3 seconds, the vehicle starts off again
automatically and gradually.
After 3 seconds, the driver must accelerate or
press button 4 to move off again.
Cases of non-detection by the system:
- Pedestrians, some cyclists, animals.
- Stationary vehicles (traffic jam, breakdown,
etc.).
- Vehicles crossing your lane.
- Vehicles driving in the opposite direction.
151
6
Driving
When the driver must suspend the cruise
control system:
Cases where the driver is urged to take
back control immediately:
- Excessively sharp deceleration of the
vehicle in front of you.
Pay particular attention:
- When motorcycles are present and
when there are vehicles staggered
onto the traffic lane.
- When entering a tunnel or crossing
a bridge.
If one of these malfunctions occurs, do not
use the system:
- Following an impact on the windscreen
close to the camera or on the front
bumper (versions with radar).
- Brake lamps not working.
If the vehicle has been subject to one of
the following modifications, do not use the
system:
- Carrying long objects on roof bars.
- Towing.
- Use of the "space-saver" type spare
wheel (depending on version).
- Front end of the vehicle modified
(addition of long-range headlamps,
painting of the front bumper).
Malfunction
- Vehicles in a tight bend.
- When approaching a roundabout.
- When following a narrow vehicle.
Reactivate cruise control when conditions
permit.
- When a vehicle cuts in sharply between
your vehicle and the one in front.
If the cruise control
malfunctions, dashes are
displayed instead of the
cruise control speed setting.
If this warning lamp comes
on, accompanied by an
alert message and an
audible signal, this confirms
a malfunction.
Have the system checked by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Active Lane Keeping
Assist
Refer to the General recommendations on
the use of driving and manoeuvring aids.
Using a camera located at the top of the
windscreen, the system identifies lane
markings and steers the vehicle inside this lane
to keep it in the lateral position chosen by the
driver.
152
Driving
Conditions for operation
- The adaptive cruise control must be active.
- The vehicle must be travelling in a traffic
lane clearly delimited by lines on both sides.
- The ESC system must be operating.
- The ASR/DSC systems must not be
deactivated.
- No trailer detected.
- A spare wheel of the "space-saver" type
must not be in use.
- The vehicle must not be subject to strong
lateral accelerations.
- The direction indicators must not be
activated.
Activation/Deactivation
The state of the system stays in the
memory when the ignition is switched off.
The colour of the symbol depends on the
operating state of the system:
(grey colour)
At least one of the operating
conditions is not met, the system is
paused.
(green colour)
All operating conditions are met, the
system is active.
If the driver no longer wishes to benefit from
the system for a while, they can deactivate it by
pressing the button again.
The indicator lamp in the button goes off and
the symbol disappears from the instrument
panel.
Cruise control
The driver must hold the steering wheel
properly.
When cruise control is activated, the symbol is
displayed in green: by small steering actions,
the system directs the vehicle and keeps it in
the position chosen by the driver, in the traffic
lane.
The driver can feel movements in the steering
wheel.
This position is not necessarily the centre of
the lane.
The driver can change the position of the
vehicle at any time, by turning the steering
wheel. When the driver feels that the vehicle's
position is appropriate, whilst keeping hands
on the steering wheel, they must release the
pressure to let the system resume control of the
steering, but the vehicle is not centred within
the lane automatically.
This function is primarily suitable for driving on
motorways and main roads.
F With the adaptive cruise control activated, press this
button.
The action is confirmed by:
- Illumination of the indicator lamp in the button in green.
- Display of the following symbol in the instrument panel.
(orange colour)
The system has a fault.
153
6
Driving
Pausing/Suspension of the
system
The driver must intervene as soon as
they believe that the traffic conditions or
the state of the road surface make this
necessary, by moving the steering wheel
to suspend the system temporarily. Any
action at the brake pedal which results in
the cruise control being paused will also
cause the system to be paused.
If the system detects that the driver is
not holding the wheel firmly enough, it
triggers a series of gradual alerts and then
deactivates itself if there is no reaction
from the driver.
After suspension due to the prolonged
release of the force holding the steering
wheel, you must reactivate the function by
pressing the button again.
Automatic pausing:
- Triggering of the ESC.
- Prolonged failure to detect one of the lane
limit markings. In this case, the active lane
departure warning function can take over,
and the system will reactivate itself once the
operating conditions are again met.
On action by the driver: suspension
- Activation of the direction indicators.
- Travelling outside the lane limits.
- Too tight a grip on the steering wheel or
dynamic action on the steering wheel.
- Action on the brake pedal (pausing until the
cruise control is reactivated) or accelerator
pedal (suspension for as long as the pedal
is pressed).
- Pausing the cruise control.
- Deactivation of the DSC/ASR systems.
Driving situations and
associated alerts
The tables below describe the displays
associated with the main driving situations. The
display of these alerts is not sequential.
154
70
70
Driving
Indicator lamp in
the button
Symbol Cruise control wheel Display
Associated
message
Comments
Off - "OFF" - - None of the functions are activated.
Off - "CRUISE"
(grey colour)
"Cruise control
paused"
The Active Lane Keeping Assist
function is not activated, the cruise
control is paused.
Off - "CRUISE"
(green colour)
"Cruise control on" The Active Lane Keeping Assist
function is not activated, the cruise
control is active.
Green
(green colour)
"CRUISE"
or
(green colour)
"Cruise control
and Lane Keeping
Assist function
active"
The Highway Driver Assist operates
normally.
Green
(grey colour)
"CRUISE"
or
(grey colour)
"Cruise control
and Lane Keeping
Assist function
paused"
The system has been paused
automatically or by driver action.
155
6
70
70
Driving
Indicator lamp in
the button
Symbol Cruise control wheel Display
Associated
message
Comments
Green
(grey colour)
"OFF" - "Activate the cruise
control to use the
Lane Keeping
Assist function"
All operating conditions are met except
activation of the adaptive cruise control.
Green
(grey colour)
"CRUISE"
or
(green colour)
"Unsuitable
conditions –
Activation on
stand-by"
All conditions required for lateral
control have not been met.
Off - "CRUISE"
or
(green colour)
"Hold the wheel" The driver is not holding the steering
wheel correctly and has not taken
notice of the warnings (messages
and audible alarm): the Active Lane
Keeping Assist function is switched off.
Green
(grey colour)
"CRUISE"
or
(grey colour)
"Retake control" The cruise control can no longer
ensure lateral and longitudinal control:
the driver must retake control of the
vehicle (acceleration or braking). The
alert is accompanied by an audible
signal.
156
Driving
Operating limits
The Active Lane Keeping Assist system
may issue an alert when the vehicle
is travelling in a long straight lane on
a smooth road surface even if the driver is
holding the steering wheel properly.
The system may fail to operate or may produce
unsuitable corrections to the steering in the
following situations:
- Poor visibility (insufficient road lighting,
snowfall, rain, fog).
- Dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming vehicle,
low sun, reflections on a wet road surface,
leaving a tunnel, alternating light and
shade).
- Windscreen area in front of the camera
being dirty, misted up, frost-covered, snow-
covered, damaged or masked by a sticker.
- Lane markings eroded, partially hidden
(snow, mud) or multiple (roadworks, surface
joints).
- Travelling in a tight bend.
- Winding roads.
- Presence of a tarmac joint on the road.
The system must not be activated in the
following situations:
- Driving with a "space-saver" type
spare wheel.
- When towing, especially with an
unconnected or unapproved trailer.
- Poor weather conditions.
- Driving on slippery road surfaces (risk
of aquaplaning, snow, ice).
- Driving on racing circuits.
- Driving on a rolling road.
Recommendations on care
- Regularly check that the front bumper and
the area of the windscreen located in front
of the camera are clean.
- Regularly check that the windscreen wipers
are in good condition.
- In bad weather, or during the winter, ensure
that the front bumper and windscreen are
not covered with mud, ice or snow.
Malfunctions
(orange
colour)
A system malfunction is indicated
by the Service warning lamp
coming on and this (orange) symbol,
accompanied by an alert message
and an audible signal.
Active Safety Brake with
Collision Risk Alert and
Intelligent emergency
braking assistance
Refer to the General recommendations on
the use of driving and manoeuvring aids.
This system allows:
- the driver to be warned that their vehicle is
at risk of collision with the vehicle in front,
a pedestrian or, depending on version, a
cyclist,
- a collision to be prevented, or its severity to
be limited, by reducing the vehicle's speed.
157
6
Driving
The system also takes motorcyclists and
animals into account; however, animals
below 0.5 m tall and objects on the road
are not necessarily detected.
This system is comprised of three functions:
- Collision Risk Alert,
- Intelligent emergency braking assistance,
- Active Safety Brake (automatic emergency
braking).
The vehicle has a multifunctional camera
located at the top of the windscreen, and,
depending on version, a radar located in the
front bumper.
As soon as the system detects a potential
obstacle, it prepares the braking circuit in
case automatic braking is needed. This
may cause a slight noise and a slight
sensation of deceleration.
Deactivation/Activation
By default, the system is automatically
activated at every engine start.
This system can be deactivated or
activated via the Driving/Vehicle
menu of the touch screen.
Deactivation of the system is
signalled by the illumination of this
indicator lamp, accompanied by the
display of a message.
Operating conditions and
limits
The ESC system must not be faulty.
The DSC/ASR systems must not be
deactivated.
All passenger seat belts must be fastened.
Driving at a steady speed on roads with few
bends is required.
In the following cases, deactivating the system
via the vehicle's configuration menu is advised:
- towing a trailer,
- carrying long objects on roof bars or roof
rack,
- with snow chains fitted,
- before using an automatic car wash, with
the engine running,
- before placing the vehicle on a rolling road
in a workshop,
- towed vehicle, engine running,
- damaged front bumper (version with radar),
- following an impact to the windscreen close
to the detection camera.
The system is automatically deactivated
after the use of certain "space-saver"
type spare wheels is detected (smaller
diameter).
The system is automatically deactivated
after detection of a fault with the brake
pedal switch or with at least two brake
lamps.
It is possible that warnings are not given,
are given too late or seem unjustified.
Consequently, always stay in control of
your vehicle and be prepared to react at
any time to avoid an accident.
158
Driving
Collision Risk Alert
It warns the driver if their vehicle is at risk of
collision with the vehicle in front or a pedestrian
present in their traffic lane.
Modifying the alert trigger
threshold
This threshold determines how you wish
to be alerted of the presence of a moving
or stationary vehicle in front of you, or
a pedestrian or cyclist present in your traffic
lane.
The current threshold can be
modified via the Driving/Vehicle
menu of the touch screen.
You can select one of three predefined
thresholds:
- "Distant",
- "Normal",
- "Close".
The last threshold selected is memorised when
the ignition is switched off.
Operation
Depending on the degree of risk of collision
detected by the system and the alert threshold
chosen by the driver, several different levels
of alert may be triggered and displayed in the
instrument panel.
They take account of the vehicle dynamics, the
speed of your vehicle and the one in front, the
environmental conditions and the operation of
the vehicle (cornering, actions on the pedals,
etc.) to trigger the alert at the best moment.
Level 1 (orange): visual alert only,
signalling to you that the vehicle in
front is very close.
The "Vehicle close" message is
displayed.
Level 2 (red): visual and audible
alert, warning you that a collision is
imminent.
The message "Brake!" is displayed.
Level 3: finally, in some cases, a
haptic alert in the form of micro-
braking can be given, confirming the
risk of collision.
Where the speed of your vehicle is too
high when approaching another vehicle,
the level 2 alert may be displayed
immediately.
Important: the level 1 alert is never
displayed for a stationary obstacle or
when the "Close" trigger threshold has
been selected.
Intelligent emergency
braking assistance
If the driver brakes, but not sufficiently to avoid
a collision, this system will supplement the
braking, within the limits of the laws of physics.
This assistance will only be provided if you
press the brake pedal.
After an impact, the function automatically
stops operating. Contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop to have the
system checked.
159
6
Driving
Active Safety Brake
Operation
- The vehicle's speed does not exceed
50 mph (80 km/h) when a stationary vehicle
or a cyclist is detected.
- The vehicle's speed is above 6 mph
(10 km/h) (versions with camera and radar)
or between 6 mph and 53 mph (10 km/h and
85 km/h) (versions with camera alone) when
a moving vehicle is detected.
If the camera and/or radar have
confirmed the presence of a vehicle,
a pedestrian or a cyclist, this
warning lamp flashes (for about
10 seconds) when the function is
acting on the vehicle's brakes.
With an automatic gearbox, in the event of
automatic emergency braking until the vehicle
comes to a complete stop, keep the brake
pedal pressed down to prevent the vehicle from
starting off again.
With a manual gearbox, in the event of
automatic emergency braking until the vehicle
comes to a complete stop, the engine may stall.
The driver can control the vehicle at any
time by making a deliberate movement
of the steering wheel and/or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Operation of the function may be felt by
slight vibration in the brake pedal.
If the vehicle comes to a complete stop,
the automatic braking is maintained for
1 to 2 seconds.
Malfunction
In the event of a fault with the
system, you are alerted by the
continuous illumination of this
warning lamp, accompanied by the
display of a message and an audible
signal.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop to have the
system checked.
This function, also called automatic emergency
braking, intervenes following the alert if the
driver does not react quickly enough and does
not operate the vehicle's brakes.
It aims to reduce the speed of impact or avoid
a frontal collision by your vehicle where the
driver fails to react.
The system operates under the following
conditions:
- The vehicle's speed does not exceed
37 mph (60 km/h) when a pedestrian is
detected.
Fatigue detection system
Refer to the General recommendations on
the use of driving and manoeuvring aids.
Take a break as soon as you feel tired or at
least every two hours.
The function comprises the "Coffee Break
Alert" system combined with the "Driver
Attention Alert" system.
160
Driving
Activation/Deactivation
These functions are activated and
deactivated in the Driving/Vehicle
menu of the touch screen.
The state of the system stays in the memory
when the ignition is switched off.
Coffee Break Alert
The system triggers an alert once it
detects that the driver has not taken
a break after two hours of driving at
a speed above 40 mph (65 km/h).
This alert is issued via the display of
a message encouraging you to take a break,
accompanied by an audible signal.
If the driver does not follow this advice, the
alert is repeated hourly until the vehicle is
stopped.
The system resets itself if one of the following
conditions is met:
- engine running, the vehicle has been
stationary for more than 15 minutes,
- the ignition has been switched off for a few
minutes,
- the driver's seat belt is unfastened and their
door is open.
As soon as the speed of the vehicle drops
below 40 mph (65 km/h), the system goes
into standby.
The driving time is counted again once the
speed is above 40 mph (65 km/h).
Driver Attention Alert
Using a camera placed at the top
of the windscreen, the system
assesses the driver's level of
vigilance by identifying variations
in trajectory compared to the lane
markings.
This system is particularly suited to main roads
(speed higher than 40 mph (65 km/h)).
When the system interprets the behaviour of
the vehicle as indicating a certain fatigue or
inattention threshold on the part of the driver, it
triggers the first level of alert.
The driver is then alerted by the message
"Take care!", accompanied by an audible
signal.
After three first level alerts, the system triggers
a new alert with the message "Driving at
risk: take a break", accompanied by a more
pronounced audible signal.
In certain driving conditions (poor road
surface or strong winds), the system may
give alerts independent of the driver's
level of vigilance.
161
6
Driving
The following situations may interfere with
the operation of the system or prevent it
from working:
- poor visibility (inadequate lighting of
the road, falling snow, heavy rain,
dense fog, etc.),
- dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming
vehicle, low sun, reflections on a damp
road, leaving a tunnel, alternating
shade and light, etc.),
- windscreen area located in front of the
camera: dirty, misted up, frost-covered,
snow-covered, damaged or covered by
a sticker,
- lane markings absent, worn, hidden
(snow, mud) or multiple (roadworks,
etc.),
- close to the vehicle ahead (lane
markings not detected),
- roads that are narrow, winding, etc.
Active Lane Departure
Warning System
Refer to the General recommendations on
the use of driving and manoeuvring aids.
Using a camera located at the top of the
windscreen to identify lane markings on the
road and at the edges of the road (depending
on version), the system corrects the trajectory
of the vehicle while alerting the driver if it
detects a risk of unintentionally crossing a line
or hard shoulder (depending on version).
This system is particularly useful on motorways
and main roads.
Conditions for operation
The speed of the vehicle must be between
40 and 112 mph (65 and 180 km/h).
The driver must hold the wheel with both
hands.
The change of trajectory must not be
accompanied by operation of the direction
indicators.
The ESC system must not be faulty.
The ASR/DSC systems must be activated.
The system helps the driver only when
there is a risk of the vehicle involuntarily
wandering from the lane it is being driven
in. It does not manage the safe driving
distance, the speed of the vehicle or the
brakes.
Operation
Once the system identifies a risk of the vehicle
involuntarily crossing one of the lane markings
detected, it makes the correction to the
trajectory required to return the vehicle to its
initial path.
The driver will notice a turning movement of the
steering wheel.
This warning lamp flashes during
trajectory correction.
The driver can prevent the correction by
keeping a firm grip on the wheel (during
an avoiding manoeuvre, for example).
The correction is interrupted if the
direction indicators are operated.
If the system detects that the driver is not
holding the wheel firmly enough during
an automatic correction of trajectory,
it interrupts the correction. An alert is
triggered to encourage the driver to take
back control of the vehicle.
162
Driving
Driving situations and
associated alerts
The table below describes the alerts and
messages displayed depending on the driving
situations.
The display of these alerts is not sequential.
While the direction indicators are on and for
a few seconds after switching them off, the
system considers that any change of trajectory
is voluntary and no correction is triggered
during this period.
However, with the Blind Spot Monitoring system
activated, if the driver starts changing lanes
and another vehicle is detected in the vehicle's
blind spot, the system will correct the trajectory
of the vehicle even though the direction
indicators are on.
For more information on the Blind Spot
Monitoring system, refer to the corresponding
section.
Status of the
function
Indicator
lamp
Display and/
or associated
message
Comments
OFF
(grey)
System deactivated.
ON
(grey)
System active, conditions not met:
- speed below 40 mph (65 km/h),
- no lane marking recognised,
- ASR/DSC systems deactivated
or regulation by ESC system in
progress,
- "sporty" driving.
ON
(grey)
Automatic deactivation/standby of the
system (e.g. detection of a trailer, use of
the "space-saver" spare wheel provided
with the vehicle).
163
6
Driving
Status of the
function
Indicator
lamp
Display and/
or associated
message
Comments
ON
(green)
Detection of lane markings.
Speed above 40 mph (65 km/h).
ON
(orange)/(green)
The system corrects the trajectory on
the side where the risk of involuntary
crossing is detected (orange line).
ON
(orange)/(green)
"Take back control
of the vehicle."
- If, during correction, the system
detects that the driver has not held
the steering wheel for a few seconds,
it interrupts the correction and returns
control to the driver.
- During correction of the trajectory,
if the system determines that the
correction will not be enough and
that a solid line is crossed (orange
line): the driver is warned that they
must complete the correction of the
trajectory.
Operating limits
The system goes into standby automatically in
the following cases:
- ASR/DSC systems deactivated or regulation
by ESC system in progress,
- speed below 40 mph (65 km/h) or greater
than 112 mph (180 km/h),
- connected electrically to a trailer,
- use of a "space-saver" spare
wheel detected (as detection is not
immediate, deactivation of the system is
recommended),
- dynamic driving style detected, pressure on
the brake or accelerator pedal,
- driving where there are no lane markings,
- activation of the direction indicators,
- crossing the inside line on a bend,
- driving in a tight corner,
- inactivity by the driver detected during
correction.
164
Driving
The following situations may interfere with
the operation of the system or prevent it
from working:
- conditions of poor visibility (inadequate
street lighting, snowfall, rain, fog),
- dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming
vehicle, low sun, reflections on a damp
road, leaving a tunnel, alternating
shade and light),
- windscreen area located in front of the
camera: dirty, misted, frost-covered,
snow-covered, damaged or covered by
a sticker,
- lane markings worn, hidden (snow,
mud) or multiple (roadworks, etc.),
- running close to the vehicle in front
(the lane markings may not be
detected),
- roads that are narrow, winding,
- insufficient contrast (shade, for
example) between the road and the
edges of the road.
Risk of undesirable operation
Deactivation of the system is recommended in
the following situations:
- driving on a road surface in poor condition,
- unfavourable climatic conditions,
- driving on slippery surfaces (ice).
Deactivation/Activation
The system is activated every time the ignition
is switched on.
F To deactivate the system, press this button.
Deactivation is signalled by the
lighting of the indicator lamp in
the button and this warning lamp on
the instrument panel.
Reactivation is by another press, the indicator
lamp in the button and the warning lamp switch
off.
Malfunction
The system is not intended for driving in the
following situations:
- driving on a speed circuit,
- driving with a trailer,
- driving on a rolling stand,
- driving on unstable surfaces.
In the event of a fault with the system, you are
alerted by the illumination of these warning
lamps in the instrument panel, accompanied by
the display of a message and an audible signal.
Have the system checked by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Active Blind Spot
Monitoring System
Refer to the General recommendations on
the use of driving and manoeuvring aids.
165
6
Driving
This system warns the driver of the presence
of another vehicle in the blind spots of their
vehicle (areas hidden from the driver's field
of vision), as soon as this presents a potential
danger.
A fixed warning lamp appears in the door mirror
on the side in question:
- immediately, when being overtaken,
- after a delay of about one second, when
overtaking a vehicle slowly.
In addition to the fixed warning lamp in the door
mirror on the side in question, a correction of
trajectory will be felt if you attempt to cross
a lane marking with the direction indicator
activated, to help you avoid a collision.
This driving aid system is designed to
improve safety when driving and is in no
circumstances a substitute for the use
of the interior rear view mirror and door
mirrors. It is the driver's responsibility to
constantly check the traffic, to assess the
relative distances and speeds of other
vehicles and to anticipate their movements
before deciding whether to change lane.
Activation/Deactivation
The function is activated and
deactivated in the Driving/Vehicle
menu of the touch screen.
The state of the system stays in the memory
when switching off the ignition.
The system is automatically deactivated
when towing with a towing device
approved by CITROËN.
Operation
The alert is given by an orange warning lamp
coming on in the relevant door mirror, as soon
as a vehicle – car, lorry, bicycle – is detected.
A correction of trajectory will be felt if you
attempt to cross a lane marking with the
direction indicator flashing.
The following conditions must be met for this:
- all vehicles are moving in the same direction
and in adjacent lanes,
- the speed of the vehicle must be between
7 and 87 mph (12 and 140 km/h) for the
alert and between 40 and 87 mph (65 and
140 km/h) for a correction of trajectory,
- the system must be activated to trigger
a change of trajectory,
- you overtake a vehicle with a speed
difference of less than 6 mph (10 km/h),
- a vehicle overtakes you with a speed
difference of less than 16 mph (25 km/h),
- the traffic is flowing normally,
- overtaking a vehicle over a certain period
of time and the vehicle being overtaken
remains in the blind spot,
- you are driving on a straight or slightly
curved road,
- your vehicle is not towing a trailer, a
caravan, etc.
Sensors fitted in the front and rear bumpers
monitor the blind spots.
166
Driving
Malfunction
The system may suffer temporary
interference in certain weather conditions
(rain, hail, etc.).
In particular, driving on a wet surface
or moving from a dry area to a wet area
can cause false alerts (for example,
the presence of a fog of water droplets
in the blind spot angle is interpreted as
a vehicle).
In bad or wintry weather, ensure that the
sensors are not covered by mud, ice or
snow.
Take care not to cover the warning zone in
the door mirrors or the detection zones on
the front and rear bumpers with adhesive
labels or other objects; they may hamper
the correct operation of the system.
The system is automatically deactivated
when towing with a towing device
approved by CITROËN.
If a fault occurs, this warning lamp comes on
in the instrument panel, accompanied by the
display of a message.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the system checked.
No alert will be given and no correction will be
made in the following situations:
- in the presence of non-moving objects
(parked vehicles, barriers, street lamps,
road signs, etc.),
- with vehicles moving in the opposite
direction,
- driving on a winding road or a sharp corner,
- when overtaking or being overtaken by
a very long vehicle (lorry, bus, etc.) which is
both in the rear blind spot and present in the
driver's front field of vision,
- when overtaking quickly,
- in very heavy traffic: vehicles detected in
front and behind are confused with a lorry or
a stationary object,
- if the Park Assist function is activated.
167
6
Driving
Parking sensors
Refer to the General recommendations on
the use of driving and manoeuvring aids.
Rear parking sensors
The system is switched on by engaging reverse
gear.
This is confirmed by an audible signal.
The system is switched off when you come out
of reverse gear.
Audible assistance
The function signals the presence of obstacles
present within the vehicle sensors' detection
zone.
The proximity information is given by an
intermittent audible signal, the frequency of which
increases as the vehicle approaches the obstacle.
When the distance between the vehicle and
the obstacle becomes less than about thirty
centimetres, the audible signal becomes
continuous.
The sound emitted by the speaker (right or left)
allows you to identify the side on which the
obstacle is located.
Adjusting the audible signal
Visual assistance
Using sensors located in the bumper, this
function warns of the proximity of obstacles
(e.g. pedestrian, vehicle, tree, barrier) entering
their field of detection.
On versions equipped with
CITROËN Connect Radio, pressing
this button opens the audible signal
volume adjustment window.
It supplements the audible signal by displaying
bars on the screen that move progressively
nearer to the vehicle (white: more distant
obstacles; orange: close obstacles; red: very
close obstacles).
When the obstacle is very close, the "Danger"
symbol is displayed on the screen.
Front parking sensors
In addition to the rear parking sensors, the
front parking sensors are triggered when an
obstacle is detected in front and the speed of
the vehicle is still below 6 mph (10 km/h).
The front parking sensors are interrupted if
the vehicle stops for more than three seconds
in forward gear, if an obstacle is no longer
detected or when the speed of the vehicle
exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h).
168
Driving
The sound emitted by the speaker (front or
rear) locates the obstacle in relation to the
vehicle, in front or behind.
Deactivation/Activation
The function is deactivated and
activated in the Driving/Vehicle
menu of the touch screen.
The state of the system stays in the memory
when the ignition is switched off.
The rear parking sensors system will
be deactivated automatically if a trailer
or bicycle carrier is connected to
a towing device installed in line with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
In this case, the outline of a trailer is
displayed at the rear of the image of the
vehicle.
The parking sensors are deactivated while the
Park Assist system is measuring a space.
For more information on the Park Assist, refer
to the corresponding section.
Operating limits
The tilting of the vehicle if the boot is very
loaded can affect the distance measurements.
Malfunction
If a malfunction occurs, when
shifting to reverse, one of these
warning lamps comes on in the
instrument panel, accompanied by
the display of a message and an
audible signal (short beep).
If the malfunction occurs while the
parking sensors are being used, it
causes the function to deactivate.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the system checked.
Top Rear Vision – Top
360 Vision
Refer to the General recommendations on
the use of driving and manoeuvring aids.
With the engine running, these systems allow
views of your vehicle's close surroundings to
be displayed on the touch screen using one
camera for Top Rear Vision and two cameras
for Top 360 Vision.
169
6
Driving
Different contextual views can be displayed in
the left-hand part:
- standard view,
- 180° view,
- zoom view.
F Press the button in the bottom left-hand
corner of the touch screen.
F Select the type of view:
• "Standard view".
• "180° view",
• "Zoom view",
• "AUTO view".
The display is immediately updated with the
type of view selected.
The state of the function is not saved when the
ignition is switched off.
Principle of operation
The screen is divided into two parts: on the
left, a contextual view; on the right, a view from
above the vehicle in its close surroundings.
The parking sensors supplement the
information on the view from above the vehicle.
AUTO mode is activated by default.
In this mode, the system chooses the best view
to display (standard or zoom) according to the
information from the parking sensors.
You can change the type of view at any time
during a manoeuvre.
Using one or two cameras, the close
surroundings of the vehicle are recorded whilst
manoeuvring at low speed.
An image from above your vehicle in its close
surroundings is reconstructed (represented
between the blue brackets) in real time and as
the manoeuvre progresses.
This representation facilitates the alignment of
your vehicle when parking and allows obstacles
close to the vehicle to be seen.
With Top 360 Vision, the image is created using
both cameras, when going forward and when
reversing.
When the function is activated, it is possible
that the view from above is not displayed. If
the system is activated when the vehicle has
already moved, the view from above can be
fully displayed.
Top Rear Vision
Rear vision
This image is automatically deleted if the
vehicle remains stationary for too long.
To activate the camera, located near the
number plate lamps, engage reverse and keep
the speed of the vehicle below 6 mph (10 km/h).
The system is deactivated:
- automatically above about 6 mph (10 km/h),
- automatically on opening the tailgate,
170
Driving
Standard view
Zoom view
Obstacles may appear further away than
they actually are.
It is important to check the sides of the
vehicle during the manoeuvre, using the
mirrors.
The rear parking sensors also supplement
the information on the vehicle's
surroundings.
AUTO mode
- when shifting out of reverse (the image
remains displayed for 7 seconds),
- by pressing the white arrow in the top left-
hand corner of the touch screen.
The area behind the vehicle is displayed on the
screen.
The blue lines 1 represent the width of your
vehicle, with the mirrors unfolded; their
direction changes depending on the position of
the steering wheel.
The red line 2 represents a distance of 30 cm
from the bumper; the two blue lines 3 and
4 represent 1 m and 2 m, respectively.
This view is available with AUTO mode or in the
view selection menu.
The camera records the vehicle's surroundings
during the manoeuvre in order to create
a view from above the rear of the vehicle in its
near surroundings, allowing the vehicle to be
manoeuvred around obstacles nearby.
This view is available with AUTO mode or in the
view selection menu.
This mode is activated by default.
Using sensors in the rear bumper, the
automatic view changes from a rear view
(standard) to a view from above (zoom), as an
obstacle is approached at the level of the red
line (less than 30 cm) during a manoeuvre.
171
6
Driving
180° view
Top 360 Vision
The vehicle has a camera at the front, fitted
in the grille, and a camera at the rear, located
close to the number plate lamps.
Using these cameras, the system displays
the vehicle's near surroundings on the touch
screen, offering views from the rear of the
vehicle (rear vision), when reverse gear is
engaged and views from the front of the vehicle
(front vision), when the gearbox is in neutral or
a gear is engaged.
Rear vision
If a trailer or a bicycle carrier is fitted to
the towball, the area behind the vehicle on
the view from above goes dark.
The surroundings are reconstructed by the
front camera only.
The 180° view facilitates reversing out of
a parking bay, making it possible to see the
approach of vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists.
This view is not recommended for carrying out
a complete manoeuvre.
It consists of 3 areas: left A, centre B and
right C.
This view is available only from the view
selection menu.
The system activates automatically when
reverse gear is engaged.
The system is deactivated:
- automatically above about 6 mph (10 km/h),
- when shifting out of reverse (the rear view
image is replaced by the front view image
after 7 seconds),
- by pressing the white arrow in the top left-
hand corner of the touch screen.
The rear vision views are similar to those for
the Top Rear Vision.
For more information on the Top Rear Vision,
refer to the corresponding section.
Front and rear vision
172
Driving
F Select "Panoramic visual aid".
AUTO mode is displayed by default, with front
vision, if the gearbox is in neutral or with a gear
engaged, or with rear vision, if reverse is
engaged.
The system is deactivated:
- automatically above about 19 mph (30 km/h)
(the image disappears temporarily from
12 mph (20 km/h)),
- by pressing the white arrow in the top left-
hand corner of the touch screen.
Standard view
Zoom view
Obstacles may appear further away than
they actually are.
It is important to check the sides of the
vehicle during the manoeuvre, using the
mirrors.
The front and rear parking sensors also
provide information on the vehicle's
surroundings.
AUTO mode
With the engine running and the
speed below 12 mph (20 km/h), the
system is activated via the Driving/
Vehicle menu of the touch screen:
The blue lines 1 represent the width of your
vehicle, with the mirrors unfolded; their
direction changes depending on the position of
the steering wheel.
The red line 2 represents a distance of 30 cm
from the front bumper; the two blue lines 3 and
4 represent 1 m and 2 m, respectively.
This view is available with AUTO mode or in the
view selection menu.
The area in front of your vehicle is displayed in
the screen.
The camera records the vehicle's surroundings
during the manoeuvre in order to create
a view from above the front of the vehicle in its
near surroundings, allowing the vehicle to be
manoeuvred around obstacles nearby.
This view is available with AUTO mode or in the
view selection menu.
This mode is activated by default.
Using sensors in the front bumper, the
automatic view changes from the front view
(standard) to the view from above (zoom) as an
obstacle is approached during a manoeuvre.
173
6
Driving
180° view
The 180° view assists with exiting from
a parking bay in forward gear, making it
possible to see the approach of vehicles,
pedestrians and cyclists.
This view is not recommended for carrying out
a complete manoeuvre.
It consists of 3 areas: left A, centre B and
right C.
This view is available only from the view
selection menu.
Park Assist
Refer to the General recommendations on
the use of driving and manoeuvring aids.
This system provides active assistance with
parking: it detects a parking space then
operates the steering system to park in this
space.
With manual and automatic gearboxes, the
driver manages the accelerator, brakes and
forward and reverse gear engagement.
During phases of entry into and exit from
a parking space, the system provides visual
and audible information to the driver in order
to make the manoeuvres safe. Several forward
and reverse manoeuvres may be required.
At any time, the driver can take back control by
holding the steering wheel.
In some circumstances, the sensors may
not detect small obstacles located in their
blind spots.
The Park Assist system cannot work with
the engine off.
A. Entry into a parallel parking space.
B. Exit from a parallel parking space.
C. Entry into a bay parking space.
During manoeuvring phases, the steering
wheel performs rapid turns: do not hold
the steering wheel, do not put your hands
between the spokes of the steering wheel.
Watch out for any object that could
interfere with the manoeuvre (loose
clothing, scarves, ties, etc.) – risk of injury!
The Park Assist system provides assistance for
the following manoeuvres:
When Park Assist is activated, it prevents
entry into STOP mode of Stop & Start.
In STOP mode, activation of Park Assist
restarts the engine.
174
Driving
The Park Assist system takes control
of the power steering for a maximum of
4 manoeuvring cycles. The function is
deactivated after these 4 cycles. If you
think that your vehicle is not positioned
correctly, you should then take over the
steering to finish the manoeuvre.
The sequence of manoeuvres and the
driving instructions are displayed on the
touch screen.
You should always check the surroundings
of your vehicle before starting
a manoeuvre.
The parking sensors function is
not available during parking space
measurement. It intervenes later when
manoeuvring to warn you that your vehicle
is approaching an obstacle: the audible
signal becomes continuous when the
obstacle is less than thirty centimetres
away.
If you have deactivated the parking
sensors, they are automatically
reactivated during assisted parking
manoeuvres.
Activation of Park Assist deactivates the
Blind Spot Monitoring system.
During parking and exit from parking
manoeuvres, the Top Rear Vision – Top
360 Vision functions may come into
operation. They allow better monitoring
of the surroundings of the vehicle, by
displaying additional information in the
touch screen.
For more information on the Top Rear
Vision – Top 360 Vision functions, refer
to the corresponding section.
Operation
Assistance with parallel parking
manoeuvres
F When you wish to park, select
"Park Assist" in the Vehicle/
Driving menu of the touch
screen to activate the function.
With a digital instrument panel,
this indicator lamp comes on in the
instrument panel to confirm the
activation of the function.
F Limit the speed of the vehicle to a maximum
of 12 mph (20 km/h) and select "Enter
parallel parking space" on the screen.
The assistance is activated:
the display of this symbol and
a speed limit indicate that
the steering manoeuvres are
controlled by the system: do not
touch the steering wheel.
The assistance is deactivated:
the display of this symbol
indicates that the steering
manoeuvres are no longer
controlled by the system: you
must take over the steering.
To enter a parking space, the system does
not identify spaces that are clearly smaller
or larger than the vehicle.
175
6
Driving
F Drive slowly following the instructions until
the system finds a free space.
F Operate the direction indicator on the
parking side chosen to activate the
measurement function. You should drive at
a distance of between 0.5 m and 1.5 m from
the row of parked vehicles.
F Move forwards slowly until a message is
displayed, accompanied by an audible
signal, asking you to engage reverse gear.
F Select reverse, release the steering wheel
and start moving without exceeding 4 mph
(7 km/h).
F The assisted parking manoeuvre is in
progress.
Without exceeding 4 mph (7 km/h), move
forwards and backwards, aided by the
warnings from the "Parking sensors"
system, until the end of the manoeuvre is
indicated.
F At the end of the manoeuvre, the indicator
lamp in the instrument panel goes off,
accompanied by a message and an audible
signal.
The assistance is deactivated: you can take
over control again.
176
Driving
Assistance in exiting from
a parallel parking space
F When you want to leave a parallel parking
space, start the engine.
F With the vehicle stationary,
select "Park Assist" in the
Vehicle/Driving menu of the
touch screen to activate the
function.
With a digital instrument panel,
this indicator lamp comes on in the
instrument panel to confirm the
activation of the function.
F Press "Exit parking space" on the screen.
F The assisted parking manoeuvre is in
progress. Without exceeding 3 mph
(5 km/h), move forwards and backwards,
aided by the warnings from the "Parking
sensors" system, until the end of the
manoeuvre is indicated.
Assistance with bay parking
manoeuvres
F When you wish to park, select
"Park Assist" in the Vehicle/
Driving menu of the touch
screen to activate the function.
With a digital instrument panel,
this indicator lamp comes on in the
instrument panel to confirm the
activation of the function.
F Limit the speed of the vehicle to a maximum
of 12 mph (20 km/h) and select "Enter bay
parking space" on the screen.
F Operate the direction indicator for the exit
side chosen.
F Engage reverse or forward gear and release
the steering wheel.
The manoeuvre is complete when the vehicle's
front wheels are clear of the parking space.
At the end of the manoeuvre, the indicator lamp
in the instrument panel goes off, accompanied
by a message and an audible signal.
The assistance is deactivated: you can take
over control again.
177
6
Driving
F Drive slowly following the instructions until
the system finds a free space.
F Operate the direction indicator on the
parking side chosen to activate the
measurement function. You should drive at
a distance of between 0.5 m and 1.5 m from
the row of parked vehicles.
When several successive bays are found,
the vehicle will be directed towards the
last one.
F Move forwards slowly until a message is
displayed, accompanied by an audible
signal, asking you to engage reverse gear.
F Select reverse, release the steering wheel
and start moving without exceeding 4 mph
(7 km/h).
F The assisted parking manoeuvre is in
progress.
Without exceeding 4 mph (7 km/h), follow
the instructions displayed in the instrument
panel, aided by the warnings from the
"Parking sensors" system, until the end of
the manoeuvre is indicated.
At the end of the manoeuvre, the indicator lamp
in the instrument panel goes off, accompanied
by a message and an audible signal.
The assistance is deactivated: you can take
over control again.
During a bay parking manoeuvre, the Park
Assist system is automatically deactivated
once the rear of the vehicle is within 50 cm
of an obstacle.
178
Driving
Deactivation
The system is deactivated by pressing the
control.
The system is deactivated automatically:
- on switching off the ignition,
- if the engine stalls,
- If the driver's seat belt is not fastened,
- if no manoeuvre is performed within
5 minutes of selecting the type of
manoeuvre,
- after a prolonged stop of the vehicle during
a manoeuvre,
- if the wheel anti-slip regulation (ASR) is
triggered,
- if the speed of the vehicle exceeds the
stated limit,
- when the driver interrupts movement of the
steering wheel,
- after 4 manoeuvre cycles,
- on opening the driver's door,
- if one of the front wheels encounters an
obstacle.
The indicator lamp in the instrument panel goes
off and a message is displayed, accompanied
by an audible signal.
The driver should then take back the vehicle's
steering.
If the system is deactivated during
a manoeuvre, the driver should reactivate
it to repeat the measurement.
Deactivation
The system is switched off automatically:
- when towing a trailer, connected electrically,
- if the driver's door is opened,
- if the speed of the vehicle is above 43 mph
(70 km/h).
To switch the system off for a prolonged period,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Malfunctions
When the function is not activated,
this warning lamp temporarily
flashing (vehicle with digital
instrument panel) and/or an audible
signal indicate a system malfunction.
If the fault occurs during the use of the system,
the warning lamp goes off.
In the event of a fault, have the system checked
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
In the event of a fault with the
power steering, this warning lamp
is displayed in the instrument
panel, accompanied by a warning
message.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
FILL UP WITH
CONFIDENCE
WITH TOTAL QUARTZ
LUBRICANTS
For more than 45 years, TOTAL
and CITROËN have shared common
values: excellence, creativity and
technological innovation.
It is in this same spirit that TOTAL
has developed a range of TOTAL
QUARTZ lubricants adapted to
CITROËN engines, making them even
more fuel efficient and protective of
the environment.
TOTAL and CITROËN test the
reliability and the performance of their
products during motorsport races in
extreme conditions.
Choose TOTAL QUARTZ lubricants
to maintain your vehicle, this is your
assurance of optimum durability
and performance from your engine.
180
/2
1
1
Practical information
Fuel tank
Capacity of the tank: Approximately
53 litres.
Low fuel level
When the level in the tank becomes
low, this warning lamp comes on in
the instrument panel, accompanied
by the display of a message and an
audible signal. When it first comes
on, there remains about 6 litres of
fuel in the tank.
Refuelling
Fuel top-ups must be of at least 5 litres in order
to be registered by the fuel gauge.
Opening the filler cap may create a noise
caused by an inrush of air. This vacuum is
To refuel in complete safety:
F You must switch off the engine.
F With the vehicle unlocked, press the rear-
central part of the filler flap to open it.
F Take care to select the pump that delivers
the correct fuel type for your vehicle's
engine (see a reminder label on the inside
of the filler flap).
F Turn the filler cap to the left.
F Remove the filler cap and hang it on its
carrier (on the filler flap).
F Introduce the filler nozzle and push it in as
far as possible before starting to refuel (risk
of blowback).
F Fill the tank. Do not continue past the
third cut-off of the nozzle, as this may
cause malfunctions.
F Refit the filler cap.
F Turn it to the right.
F Push the filler flap to close it.
Your vehicle is fitted with a catalytic converter,
a device which helps to reduce the level of
harmful emissions in the exhaust gases.
For petrol engines, you must use unleaded
fuel.
The filler neck is narrower, admitting unleaded
petrol nozzles only.
If your vehicle is fitted with Stop & Start,
never refuel with the engine in STOP
mode; you must switch off the ignition.
Misfuel prevention (Diesel)
(Depending on country of sale.)
Mechanical device which prevents filling the
tank of a Diesel vehicle with petrol.
Operation
Until sufficient fuel is added, this warning lamp
reappears every time the ignition is switched
on, accompanied by the message and the
audible signal. When driving, this message
and audible signal are repeated with increasing
frequency as the fuel level drops towards 0.
You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid
running out of fuel.
For more information on Running out of fuel
(Diesel), refer to the corresponding section.
entirely normal and results from the sealing of
the fuel system.
7
181
Practical information
It remains possible to use a fuel can to fill
the tank.
Travelling abroad
As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may be
different in other countries, the presence
of the misfuel prevention device may make
refuelling impossible.
Not all Diesel vehicles are fitted with
misfuel protection, so before travelling
abroad, we recommend that you check
with a CITROËN dealer whether your
vehicle is suitable for the fuel pumps in the
country in which you intend to travel.
When a petrol filler nozzle is introduced into
the fuel filler neck of a Diesel vehicle, it comes
into contact with the flap. The system remains
closed and prevents filling.
Do not persist but introduce a Diesel type
filler nozzle.
Compatibility of fuels
The use of any other type of (bio) fuel
(vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted,
domestic fuel, etc.) is strictly prohibited
(risk of damage to the engine and fuel
system).
The only fuel additives authorised for use
are those that meet the B715001 (petrol)
or B715000 (Diesel) standards.
Petrol fuels conforming to the EN228 standard
containing up to 5% and 10% ethanol
respectively.
Diesel fuels conforming to the EN590,
EN16734 and EN16709 standards respectively
and containing up to 7%, 10%, 20% and 30%
fatty acid methyl ester respectively. The use of
B20 or B30 fuels, even occasionally, imposes
special maintenance conditions referred to as
"Arduous conditions".
Paraffinic Diesel fuel conforming to the
EN15940 standard.
Diesel at low temperature
At temperatures below 0°C (+32 °F), the
formation of paraffins in summer-type Diesel
fuels could prevent the engine from operating
correctly. In these temperature conditions, use
winter-type Diesel fuel and keep the fuel tank
more than 50% full.
At temperatures below -15°C (+5 °F) to avoid
problems starting, it is best to park the vehicle
under shelter (heated garage).
Travelling abroad
Certain fuels could damage your vehicle's
engine.
In certain countries, the use of a particular
fuel may be required (specific octane
rating, specific trade name, etc.) to ensure
correct operation of the engine.
For all additional information, consult a dealer.
182
Practical information
Observe the maximum authorised towable
weight, indicated on your vehicle's
registration certificate, the manufacturer's
label as well as in the Technical data
section of this guide.
Complying with the maximum
authorised nose weight (towball)
also includes the use of accessories
(bicycle carriers, tow boxes, etc.).
Observe the legislation in force in the
country in which you are driving.
Vehicle equipped with motorised tailgate
with "Hands-Free Tailgate Access"
function
To avoid unwanted opening of the tailgate
when using the towing device:
- deactivate the "Hands-Free Tailgate
Access" function in advance in your
vehicle's configuration menu,
- or remove the electronic key from the
recognition zone, with the tailgate closed.
Towing device
Load distribution
F
Distribute the load in the trailer so that the
heaviest items are as close as possible to
the axle and the nose weight approaches the
maximum permitted without exceeding it.
Air density decreases with altitude, thus
reducing engine performance. The maximum
towed load must be reduced by 10% for every
1,000 metres of altitude.
Use towing devices and their genuine
harnesses approved by CITROËN. It
is recommended that the installation
be performed by a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
If the towing device is not fitted by
a CITROËN dealer, it must still be
fitted in accordance with the vehicle
manufacturer's instructions.
Important: for versions equipped with
the motorised tailgate with Hands-Free
Tailgate Access function, if a towing
device other than a genuine CITROËN
one is installed, it is essential to visit
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to recalibrate the detection
system: risk of "Hands-Free Tailgate
Access" function failure.
Certain driving or manoeuvring aid
functions are automatically disabled if an
approved towing system is used.
7
183
Practical information
Towing device with
quickly detachable towball
Presentation
1. Carrier.
2. Protective plug.
3. Connection socket.
4. Safety eye.
5. Detachable towball.
6. Locking/unlocking wheel.
7. Security key lock.
8. Key reference label.
Trailers with LED lamps are not
compatible with the wiring harness of this
device.
To know the Technical data, and in
particular the towable weights for your
vehicle, refer to the corresponding section.
To ensure complete safety while driving
with a Towing device, refer to the
corresponding section.
A. Locked position (the green marks are
opposite each other); the wheel is in
contact with the towball (no gap).
B. Unlocked position (red mark opposite
the green mark); the wheel is no longer
in contact with the towball (gap of around
5 mm).
Before each use
Check that the towball is correctly fitted,
verifying the follow points:
- the green mark on the wheel is in line
with the green mark on the towball,
- the wheel is in contact with the towball
(position A),
- the security key lock is closed and the
key removed; the wheel can no longer
be operated,
- the towball must not be able to move in
its carrier; test by shaking it with your
hand.
If the towball is not locked, the trailer can
detach – accident risk!
184
Practical information
F The wheel 6 turns a quarter of a turn anti-
clockwise; take care to keep your hands
clear!
F Check that the mechanism has correctly
locked into place (position A).
F Close the lock 7 using the key.
F Always remove the key. The key cannot be
removed when the lock is open.
F Clip the cap onto the lock.
During use
Never release the locking system with
a trailer or load carrier on the towball.
Never exceed the maximum authorised
weight for the vehicle – the Gross Train
Weight or GTW.
It is essential that the maximum
authorised load be complied with on the
towing device: if it is exceeded, this device
may detach from the vehicle, which is
a serious accident risk.
Check that the trailer lamps work
correctly.
Before setting off, check the adjustment of
the headlamp beam height.
For more information on Headlamp
adjustment, refer to the corresponding
section.
After use
When travelling without a trailer or load
carrier, the towball must be removed and
the protective plug inserted in the carrier
for good visibility of the number plate and
its lighting.
Fitting the towball
F Insert the end of the towball 5 into the
carrier 1 and push it upwards; the locking
will take place automatically.
F Below the rear bumper, remove the
protective plug 2 from the carrier 1.
7
185
Practical information
F Remove the protective cover from the
towball.
F Attach the trailer to the towball.
F Attach the cable on the trailer to the safety
eye 4 on the carrier.
F Lower the connection socket 3 to put it in
position.
F Insert the trailer plug and give it a quarter
turn to connect it to the connection socket
3 of the carrier.
Removing the towball
F Give a quarter turn to and pull the trailer
plug to disconnect it from the connection
socket 3 of the carrier.
F Raise the connection socket 3 to the right
again to stow it away.
F Detach the cable on the trailer from the
safety eye 4 on the carrier.
F Detach the trailer from the towball.
F Refit the protective cover to the towball.
F Remove the cap from the lock and press it
onto the head of the key.
F Extract the towball from the bottom of its
carrier 1.
F Release the wheel; this automatically stops
in the unlocked position (position B).
F Insert the key into the lock 7.
F Open the lock using the key.
F Hold the towball 5 firmly in one hand; using
the other hand, pull and turn the wheel
6 fully in a clockwise direction; do not
release the wheel.
Maintenance
Correct operation is only possible if the towball
and its carrier are kept clean.
Before cleaning the vehicle with a high-
pressure jet wash, the towball must be removed
and the protective plug fitted to the carrier.
Apply the label provided to a clearly visible
area, close to the carrier or in the boot.
Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop for any work on the towbar
system.
F Refit the protective plug 2 to the carrier 1.
F Carefully stow the towball in its bag away
from knocks and dirt.
186
Practical information
Load reduction mode
System which manages the use of certain
functions according to the level of charge
remaining in the battery.
When the vehicle is being driven, the load
reduction function temporarily deactivates
certain functions, such as air conditioning,
heated rear screen, etc.
The deactivated functions are reactivated
automatically as soon as conditions permit.
Snow chains
In wintry conditions, snow chains
improve traction as well as the
behaviour of the vehicle when
braking.
Snow chains must be fitted only to the
front wheels. They must never be fitted to
"space-saver" type spare wheels.
Take account of the legislation in force in
your country on the use of snow chains
and the maximum authorised speed.
Installation tips
F If you have to fit the chains during a journey,
stop the vehicle on a flat surface on the side
of the road.
F Apply the parking brake and position any
wheel chocks under the wheels to prevent
movement of your vehicle.
F Fit the chains following the instructions
provided by the manufacturer.
F Move off gently and drive for a few
moments, without exceeding 31 mph
(50 km/h).
F Stop your vehicle and check that the snow
chains are correctly tightened.
Energy economy mode
System which manages the duration of use of
certain functions to conserve a sufficient level of
charge in the battery.
After switching off the engine and for a maximum
cumulative period of around 40 minutes, you can
continue to use functions such as the audio and
telematics system, the wipers, the dipped beam
headlamps, the courtesy lamps, etc.
Switching to this mode
A message appears in the instrument panel
screen indicating that the vehicle has switched
to economy mode and the active functions are
put on standby.
If a telephone call is being made at this
time, it will be maintained for around
10 minutes with the Bluetooth hands-free
system of your audio system.
Exiting the mode
These functions will be automatically
reactivated the next time the vehicle is used.
In order to restore the use of these functions
immediately, start the engine and let it run:
- for less than 10 minutes, to use the
equipment for approximately 5 minutes,
A flat battery prevents the engine from
starting.
For more information on the 12 V battery,
refer to the corresponding section.
- for more than 10 minutes, to use the
equipment for approximately 30 minutes.
Let the engine run for the duration specified to
ensure that the battery charge is sufficient.
Do not repeatedly and continuously restart the
engine in order to charge the battery.
7
187
Practical information
It is strongly recommended that before
you leave, you practise fitting the snow
chains on a level and dry surface.
Avoid driving with snow chains on roads
that have been cleared of snow to avoid
damaging your vehicle's tyres and the
road surface. If your vehicle is fitted with
alloy wheels, check that no part of the
chain or its fixings is in contact with the
wheel rim.
Use only the chains designed to be fitted to the
type of wheel fitted to your vehicle:
Original tyre size Maximum link size
215/65 R17 9 mm
235/55 R18
cannot be fitted with chains
205/55 R19 9 mm
For more information on snow chains, contact
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Fitting roof bars
As a safety measure and to avoid
damaging the roof, it is essential to use
the transverse bars approved for your
vehicle.
Observe the instructions on fitting and use
contained in the guide supplied with the
roof bars.
Sunroof
Check that the load does not pass below
the roof bars so that it does not impede
the movements of the sunroof.
Recommendations
F Distribute the load uniformly, taking
care to avoid overloading one of the
sides.
F Arrange the heaviest part of the load
as close as possible to the roof.
F Secure the load firmly and fit a warning
flag if the load overhangs the vehicle.
F Drive gently: the vehicle will be more
susceptible to the effects of side winds
(stability may be affected).
F Remove the roof bars once they are no
longer needed.
Maximum load distributed over the
transverse roof bars, for a loading height
not exceeding 40 cm (except bicycle
carrier): 75 kg.
As this value may change, please verify
the maximum load quoted on the guide
supplied with the roof bars.
If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt the
speed of the vehicle to the profile of the
road to avoid damaging the roof bars and
the fixings on the vehicle.
Be sure to refer to national legislation in
order to comply with the regulations for
transporting objects which are longer than
the vehicle.
Sunroof
Do not operate the sunroof when using
roof bars – risk of major damage!
188
Practical information
Bonnet
The location of the interior bonnet release
lever prevents opening the bonnet when
the left-hand front door is shut.
When the engine is hot, handle the
exterior safety catch and the bonnet
stay with care (risk of burns), using the
protected area.
When the bonnet is open, take care not to
damage the safety catch.
Do not open the bonnet under very windy
conditions.
The cooling fan may start after
switching off the engine: take care
with articles and clothing that might be
caught by the fan blades.
Opening
F Open the left-hand front door.
Before doing anything under the bonnet,
deactivate the Stop & Start system to
avoid the risk of injury related to an
automatic change to START mode.
F Pull the release lever, located at the bottom
of the door aperture, towards you.
Version without longitudinal
bars
The roof bar fixings include a lug to be fitted
into the hole at each fixing point.
Version with longitudinal
bars
You must fit the transverse bars to the
longitudinal bars at the engraved markings on
the longitudinal bars.
To install the roof bars, you must secure them
only to the four fixing points on the roof frame.
These points are concealed by the vehicle's
doors when they are closed.
7
189
Practical information
F Lift the safety catch and raise the bonnet.
F Unclip the stay from its housing and place it
in the support slot to hold the bonnet open.
Closing
F Take the stay out of the support slot.
F Clip the stay in its housing.
F Lower the bonnet and release it near the
end of its travel.
F Pull on the bonnet to check that it is locked
correctly.
Because of the presence of electrical
equipment under the bonnet, it is
recommended that exposure to water
(rain, washing, etc.) be limited.
Engine compartment
These engines are examples provided as
a guide.
The locations of the following elements may vary:
- Air filter.
- Engine oil dipstick.
- Engine oil filler cap.
- Priming pump.
- Degassing screw.
Petrol engine
Diesel engine
1. Screenwash fluid reservoir.
2. Engine coolant reservoir.
3. Brake fluid reservoir.
4. Battery/Fuses.
The Diesel fuel system operates under
very high pressure.
All work on this circuit must be carried out
only by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
5. Remote earth point (-).
6. Fusebox.
7. Air filter.
8. Engine oil filler cap.
9. Engine oil dipstick.
10. Priming pump*
11. Degassing screw*.
* Depending on engine.
Checking levels
Check all of the following levels regularly in
accordance with the manufacturer's service
schedule. Top them up if required, unless
otherwise indicated.
If a level drops significantly, have the
corresponding system checked by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
The fluids must comply with the
manufacturer's requirements and with the
vehicle's engine.
190
Practical information
Check using the dipstick
The location of the dipstick is shown in the
corresponding underbonnet layout view.
F Take the dipstick by its coloured grip and
pull it out completely.
F Wipe the end of the dipstick using a clean,
non-fluffy cloth.
F Refit the dipstick and push fully down, then
pull it out again to make the visual check:
the correct level is between marks A and B.
A = MAX
B = MIN
Oil grade
Before topping up the oil or changing
the oil, check that the oil is the correct
grade for your engine and conforms to the
manufacturer's recommendations.
Topping up the engine oil level
The location of the oil filler cap is shown in the
corresponding underbonnet layout view.
F Add oil in small quantities, avoiding any
spills on engine components (risk of fire).
Do not start the engine if the level is:
- Above mark A, then contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
- Below mark B, then top up the engine oil
immediately.
Take care when working under the bonnet,
as certain areas of the engine may be
extremely hot (risk of burns) and the
cooling fan could start at any time (even
with the ignition off).
Used products
Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or
fluids with the skin.
Most of these fluids are harmful to health,
and may be very corrosive.
Do not discard used oil or fluids into
sewers or onto the ground.
Empty used oil into the containers
reserved for this purpose at a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Engine oil
The level is checked either using the
oil level indicator in the instrument
panel when the ignition is switched
on, for vehicles equipped with an
electric gauge, or using the dipstick.
The vehicle must be parked on a level surface,
with the engine stopped for more than 30 minutes.
It is normal to top up the oil level between two
services (or oil changes). It is recommended
that you check the level, and top up if
necessary, every 3,000 miles (5,000 km).
In order to maintain the reliability of the
engine and emissions control system,
never use additives in the engine oil.
7
191
Practical information
During the 30 minutes after topping up the
oil, the check performed with the oil level
indicator in the instrument panel when the
ignition is switched on is not valid.
Brake fluid
The level of this fluid should be close
to the "MAX" mark. If not, check the
brake pad wear.
To know how often the brake fluid should be
replaced, refer to the manufacturer's servicing
schedule.
Engine coolant
Check the engine coolant level
regularly.
It is normal to top up this fluid
between two services.
The check and top-up must only be done with
the engine cold.
A low level presents a risk of serious damage
to the engine.
The level of this fluid should be close to the
"MAX" mark but should never exceed it.
If the level is close to or below the "MIN" mark,
it is essential to top up.
When the engine is hot, the temperature of this
fluid is regulated by the fan.
In addition, as the cooling system is
pressurised, wait at least one hour after
switching off the engine before carrying out any
work.
To avoid the risk of scalding if you need to top
up in an emergency, wrap a cloth around the
cap and unscrew the cap by two turns to allow
the pressure to drop.
Once the pressure has dropped, remove the
cap and top up to the required level.
If topping up, clean the cap before
replacing it. Use only DOT4 brake fluid
from a sealed canister.
F Wait a few minutes before checking the
level again using the dipstick.
F Add more oil if necessary.
F After checking the level, carefully refit the oil
filler cap and the dipstick in its tube.
Cooling of the engine when stopped
The engine cooling fan may start after
the engine has been switched off.
Take care with objects or clothing that
could be caught in the blades of the
fan!
Screenwash fluid
Top up to the required level when
necessary.
Fluid specication
The screenwash fluid must be topped up with
a ready for use mix.
In winter (temperatures below zero), a liquid
containing an anti-freeze agent must be
used which is appropriate for the prevailing
conditions, in order to preserve the elements of
the system (pump, tank, ducts, etc.).
Filling with pure water is prohibited
under all circumstances (risk of freezing,
limestone deposits, jets, etc.).
Diesel fuel additive (Diesel
with particle filter)
or
The minimum level in the particle
filter additive tank is indicated by fixed
illumination of this warning lamp,
accompanied by an audible warning
and a message warning that the level
of additive is too low.
Topping up
This additive must be topped up without delay
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
192
Practical information
Versions equipped with Stop & Start are
fitted with a 12 V lead-acid battery of
specific technology and specification.
Its replacement should be carried out
only by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Cabin filter
Depending on the environment and
the use of the vehicle (e.g. dusty
atmosphere, city driving), change it
twice as often if necessary.
A clogged cabin filter may have an
adverse effect on the performance of
the air conditioning system and generate
undesirable odours.
Air filter
Depending on the environment and
the use of the vehicle (e.g. dusty
atmosphere, city driving), change it
twice as often if necessary.
Oil filter
Change the oil filter each time the
engine oil is changed.
Particle filter (Diesel)
or
The start of saturation of the particle
filter is signalled by the temporary
illumination of this warning lamp,
accompanied by a message warning
of the risk of the filter clogging up.
As soon as the traffic conditions permit,
regenerate the filter by driving at a speed of at
least 37 mph (60 km/h) until the warning lamp
goes off.
AdBlue (BlueHDi)
An alert is triggered once the reserve level is
reached.
For more information on the AdBlue range
indicators, refer to the corresponding section.
To avoid the vehicle being immobilised as per
regulations, you must top up the AdBlue tank.
For more information on the Supply of
AdBlue, refer to the corresponding section.
Checks
Unless otherwise indicated, check these
components in accordance with the
manufacturer's service schedule and according
to your engine.
Otherwise, have them checked by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Only use products recommended by
CITROËN or products of equivalent quality
and specification.
In order to optimise the operation of
components as important as those in the
braking system, CITROËN selects and
offers very specific products.
12 V battery
The battery does not require any maintenance.
However, check regularly that the terminals
are correctly tightened (versions without quick
release terminals) and that the connections
are clean.
For more information on the precautions to
take before any work on the 12 V battery,
refer to the corresponding section.
7
193
Practical information
If the warning lamp stays on, this indicates
a low Diesel additive level.
For more information on Checking levels,
refer to the corresponding section.
Following prolonged operation of the
vehicle at very low speed or at idle,
you may, in exceptional circumstances,
notice the emission of water vapour at the
exhaust on acceleration. This does not
affect the behaviour of the vehicle or the
environment.
New vehicle
The first particle filter regeneration
operations may be accompanied by a
"burning" smell, which is perfectly normal.
Manual gearbox
The gearbox does not require any
maintenance (no oil change).
Automatic gearbox
The gearbox does not require any
maintenance (no oil change).
Brake pads
Brake wear depends on the style
of driving, particularly in the case
of vehicles used in town, over short
distances. It may be necessary to
have the condition of the brakes
checked, even between vehicle
services.
Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in
the brake fluid level indicates that the brake
pads are worn.
After washing the vehicle, dampness, or
in wintry conditions, ice can form on the
brake discs and pads: braking efficiency
may be reduced. Make light brake
applications to dry and defrost the brakes.
Brake disc wear
For information on checking brake
disc wear, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Electric parking brake
This system does not require any
routine servicing. However, in case
of an issue, do not hesitate to have
the system checked by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
For more information on the Electric
parking brake, refer to the corresponding
section.
Wheels and tyres
The pressure must be checked on
all tyres, including the spare wheel,
when the tyres are "cold", at least
once a month and before a long
journey.
The pressures indicated on the tyre pressure
label are valid for "cold" tyres. If you have
driven for more than 10 minutes or more
than 6 miles (10 kilometres) at over 31 mph
(50 km/h), add 0.3 bar (30 kPa) to the values
indicated on the label.
194
Practical information
Headlamps and lamps
The headlamps have polycarbonate
lenses with a protective coating.
Do not clean them with a dry or abrasive
cloth, nor with detergent or solvent
products.
Use a sponge and soapy water.
The use of a high pressure jet wash for
cleaning the headlamps, lamps and their
surrounds may damage the lacquer and
seals.
Observe the recommendations on
pressure and distance for jet washing.
First clean persistent stains with a sponge
and warm soapy water.
Leather
Leather is a natural product. Appropriate
regular care and cleaning is essential for its
durability.
Refer to your vehicle's Maintenance and
Warranty guide for information on all the
special precautions to observe.
AdBlue
®
(BlueHDi)
To respect the environment and ensure
compliance with the Euro 6 standard, without
adversely affecting the performance or fuel
consumption of Diesel engines, CITROËN
has taken the decision to equip its vehicles
with a system that associates SCR (Selective
Catalytic Reduction) with a Diesel particle filter
(DPF) for the treatment of exhaust gases.
SCR system
Using a liquid called AdBlue
®
that contains
urea, a catalytic converter turns up to 85% of
the nitrogen oxides (NOx) into nitrogen and
water, which are harmless to health and the
environment.
The AdBlue
®
is contained in
a special tank holding about
17 litres.
Its capacity allows a driving range of
approximately 5,600 miles (9,000 km), highly
dependent on your driving style.
An alert system is triggered automatically once
the reserve level is reached: you can then drive
for a further 1,500 miles (2,400 km) before the
tank is empty.
Driving with under-inflated tyres increases
fuel consumption. Non-compliant tyre
pressure causes premature wear on tyres
and has an adverse effect on the vehicle's
road holding – risk of an accident!
Driving with worn or damaged tyres reduces
the braking and road holding performance of
the vehicle. It is recommended to regularly
check the condition of the tyres (tread and
sidewalls) and wheel rims as well as the
presence of the valves.
Using different size wheels and tyres from
those specified can affect the lifetime of
tyres, wheel rotation, ground clearance, the
speedometer reading and have an adverse
effect on road holding.
Fitting different tyres on the front and rear axles
can cause the ESC to mistime.
Advice on care and maintenance
Recommendations on the care and
maintenance of your vehicle are given in the
Maintenance and Warranty Guide.
7
195
Practical information
For more information on the Warning
and indicator lamps and the associated
alerts, or the Indicators, refer to the
corresponding sections.
Once the AdBlue
®
tank is empty, a system
required by regulations prevents starting
of the engine.
If the SCR system is faulty, the level of
emissions from your vehicle will no longer
meet the Euro 6 standard: your vehicle
becomes polluting.
In the event of a confirmed fault with the
SCR system, you must go to a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop as soon
as possible: after travelling a distance
of 685 miles (1,100 km), a system will be
triggered automatically to prevent engine
starting.
In either case, a range indicator gives you
the distance you can travel before the
vehicle is immobilised.
Freezing of the AdBlue
®
AdBlue
®
freezes at temperatures below
around -11°C.
The SCR system includes a heater for the
AdBlue
®
tank, allowing you to continue
driving in very cold conditions.
Supply of AdBlue
®
It is recommended that the AdBlue
®
be topped
up as soon as the first alert is issued indicating
that the reserve level has been reached.
In order to ensure that the SCR system
operates correctly:
- Use only AdBlue
®
fluid that meets the
ISO 22241 standard.
- Never transfer AdBlue
®
to another
container: it would lose its purity.
- Never dilute AdBlue
®
with water.
You can obtain AdBlue
®
from a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
You can also visit a service station equipped
with AdBlue
®
pumps specially designed for
passenger vehicles.
Recommendations on
storage
If the fluid has frozen, it can be used once it has
completely thawed out at room temperature.
Never keep bottles or containers of
AdBlue
®
in your vehicle.
Precautions for use
AdBlue
®
is a urea-based solution. This liquid
is non-flammable, colourless and odourless
(when kept in a cool place).
In the event of contact with the skin, wash the
affected area with soap and water. In the event
of contact with the eyes, wash (irrigate) the
eyes with large amounts of water or with an eye
wash solution for at least 15 minutes. If you feel
a persistent burning sensation or irritation, get
medical attention.
If swallowed, immediately wash out the mouth
with clean water and then drink plenty of water.
In certain conditions (at high temperature,
for example), the risk of release of ammonia
cannot be excluded: do not inhale the vapour.
Ammonia has an irritant effect on mucous
membranes (eyes, nose and throat).
AdBlue
®
freezes below about -11°C and
deteriorates above 25°C. It should be stored in
a cool place and protected from direct sunlight.
Under these conditions, the fluid can be kept
for at least a year.
196
Practical information
Access to the AdBlue
®
tank
A blue cap under the fuel filler flap indicates
access to the AdBlue
®
tank.
F Switch off the ignition and remove the key.
Or
F With Keyless Entry and Starting, press the
"START/STOP" button to switch off the
engine.
F Turn the AdBlue
®
blue filler cap anti-
clockwise.
F Obtain an AdBlue
®
container (check the
use-by date) and pour the contents of the
container into your vehicle's AdBlue
®
tank.
Or
F Insert the AdBlue
®
pump nozzle and refill
the tank until the nozzle stops automatically.
Important:
To avoid overflowing the AdBlue
®
tank, it
is recommended:
F To top up between 10 and 13 litres
using AdBlue
®
containers.
Or
F When filling at a service station, to stop
after the third automatic cut-off of the
nozzle.
Important: in the event of a top-up after
a breakdown because of a lack of
AdBlue, you must wait around 5 minutes
before switching on the ignition, without
opening the driver's door, unlocking
the vehicle, introducing the key into
the ignition switch, or introducing
the key of the Keyless Entry and
Starting system into the passenger
compartment.
Switch on the ignition, then wait for
10 seconds before starting the engine.
Keep AdBlue
®
out of the reach of children,
in its original container or bottle.
Procedure
Before starting the top-up procedure, ensure
that the vehicle is parked on a flat and level
surface.
Do not pour AdBlue
®
if the temperature of the
vehicle is less than -11°C. Park your vehicle in
a warmer area for a few hours to allow the top-
up to be carried out.
In the event of an AdBlue
®
breakdown,
confirmed by the message "Add AdBlue:
Starting impossible", you must top up with
at least 5 litres.
Never pour AdBlue
®
into the Diesel fuel
tank.
If any AdBlue
®
is splashed, or if there
are any spillages on the bodywork, rinse
immediately with cold water or wipe with
a damp cloth.
If the fluid has crystallised, clean it off
using a sponge and hot water.
8
197
In the event of a breakdown
Warning triangle
As a safety precaution, before leaving your
vehicle to set up and install the triangle, switch
on the hazard warning lamps and put on your
high visibility vest.
Storage compartment
There is a compartment in the interior trim of
the tailgate to store a triangle.
F Open the tailgate.
F Release the cover by turning the screw
a quarter turn anti-clockwise.
Assembling and placing the
triangle
For versions supplied with a triangle as original
equipment, refer to the illustration above.
For other versions, refer to the assembly
instructions provided with the triangle.
F Put the triangle in place behind the vehicle,
as required by local legislation.
Running out of fuel (Diesel)
On vehicles fitted with Diesel engines, the fuel
system must be primed if you run out of fuel.
If the engine does not start first time, do not
keep trying, but start the procedure again from
the beginning.
For more information on Misfuel
prevention (Diesel), refer to the
corresponding section.
BlueHDi 130 engines
F Fill the fuel tank with at least 5 litres of
Diesel.
F Switch on the ignition (without starting the
engine).
F Wait around 1 minute and switch off the
ignition.
F Operate the starter to start the engine.
If the engine does not start, repeat the
procedure.
BlueHDi 180 engines
F Fill the fuel tank with at least 5 litres of
Diesel.
F Switch on the ignition (without starting the
engine).
F Wait around 6 seconds and switch off the
ignition.
F Repeat the last two operations 10 times.
F Operate the starter to start the engine.
198
In the event of a breakdown
HDi engines
F Fill the fuel tank with at least 5 litres of
Diesel.
F Open the bonnet.
F If necessary, unclip the cover to access the
priming pump.
F Loosen the degassing bolt.
F Operate the priming pump until fuel appears
in the transparent tube.
F Retighten the degassing bolt.
F Operate the starter until the engine starts (if
the engine does not start at the first attempt,
wait around 15 seconds before trying
again).
F If the engine does not start after a few
attempts, operate the priming pump again
then start the engine.
F Put the cover back in place, clip it and
ensure it is clipped in.
F Close the bonnet.
Tool kit
This is a set of tools provided with the vehicle.
Its content depends on your vehicle's
equipment:
- temporary puncture repair kit,
- spare wheel.
Access to the tool kit
The main tools are stowed in the boot, under
the floor.
For access to them:
F Open the boot.
F Place the adjustable boot floor in the high
position.
Versions with a temporary
puncture repair kit
F Unclip the two fixings to open its cover.
Versions with a spare wheel
F unclip the storage box by pulling it up,
F unclip the two fixings to open its cover.
All of these tools are specific to your
vehicle and may vary depending on
equipment.
Do not use them for any other purposes.
8
199
In the event of a breakdown
The jack must only be used to change
a wheel with a damaged or punctured tyre.
Do not use any jack other than the one
supplied with this vehicle.
If the vehicle does not have its original
jack, contact a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop to obtain the correct
jack for it.
The jack meets European standards,
as defined in the Machinery Directive
2006/42/CE.
The jack does not require any
maintenance.
List of tools
1. Chocks to immobilise the vehicle
(depending on equipment).
2. Socket for the security bolts (located in
the glove box) (depending on equipment).
For adapting the wheelbrace to the special
"security" bolts.
3. Towing eye and tool to open the protective
covers of the front and rear screw threads.
For more information on Towing the vehicle
and using the removable towing eye, refer to
the corresponding section.
With temporary puncture repair
kit
For further information about the Temporary
puncture repair kit, refer to the corresponding
section.
With spare wheel
For more information on the Spare wheel, refer
to the corresponding section.
4. 12 V compressor with a cartridge of
sealant and a speed limit sticker.
For temporary repair of a tyre and to
adjust the tyre pressure.
5. Wheelbrace.
For removing the wheel trim and removing
the wheel fixing bolts.
6. Jack with integrated handle.
Used to raise the vehicle.
7. Wheel bolt cover remover (depending on
equipment).
For removing the wheel bolt head finishers
on alloy wheels.
Temporary puncture
repair kit
Scan the QR Code on page 3 to view
explanatory videos.
200
In the event of a breakdown
Made up of a compressor and a sealant
cartridge, it allows the temporary repair of
a tyre so that you can drive to the nearest
garage.
It is designed to repair most punctures which
could affect the tyre, located on the tyre tread.
The vehicle's electric system allows the
connection of the compressor for long
enough to inflate a tyre after a puncture
repair.
Composition of the kit
1. 12 V compressor, with integral pressure
gauge.
2. Sealant cartridge, with integral hose.
3. Speed limit sticker.
Repair procedure
F Park the vehicle without obstructing any
traffic and apply the parking brake.
F Follow the safety instructions (hazard
warning lamps, warning triangle, wearing
high visibility vest, etc.) according to the
legislation in force in the country where you
are driving.
F Switch off the ignition.
F Uncoil the pipe stowed under the
compressor.
Do not remove any foreign bodies (e.g.
nail, screw, etc.) which have penetrated
into the tyre.
F Connect the pipe from the compressor to
the bottle of sealant.
F Remove the valve cap from the tyre to be
repaired, and place it in a clean area.
F Turn the bottle of sealant over and secure it
in the notch provided on the compressor.
F Connect the hose from the bottle of sealant
to the valve of the tyre to be repaired and
tighten firmly.
8
201
In the event of a breakdown
F Check that the compressor switch is in
position "O".
F Fully uncoil the electric cable, stowed under
the compressor.
F Connect the compressor's electric plug to
one of the vehicle's 12 V sockets.
F Affix the speed limit sticker.
The speed limit sticker must be secured to
the interior of the vehicle in the area close
to the driver, to remind the driver that
a wheel is in temporary use.
F Switch on the ignition.
If a pressure of 2 bars is not reached after
about 7 minutes, this indicates that the
tyre is not repairable; contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop for
assistance.
F Remove the kit.
F Remove and then store the bottle of sealant.
Take care, the sealant product is harmful
if swallowed and causes irritation to the
eyes.
Keep this product out of the reach of
children.
The use-by date of the fluid is marked on
the bottle.
After use, do not discard the bottle in
standard waste, take it to a CITROËN
dealer or an authorised waste disposal
site.
Do not forget to obtain a new bottle of
sealant, available from a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop.
The tyre inflation pressures are given on
this label.
F Start the compressor by turning the switch
to position "I" until the pressure of the tyre
reaches 2 bars. The sealant product is
injected under pressure into the tyre; do not
disconnect the pipe from the valve during
this operation (risk of blowback).
F Turn the switch to position "O".
F Disconnect the compressor's electric plug
from the vehicle's 12 V socket.
F Replace the cap on the valve.
F Drive immediately for approximately 3 miles
(5 kilometres), at reduced speed (between
12 and 37 mph (20 and 60 km/h)), to plug
the puncture.
202
In the event of a breakdown
Do not exceed the speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h) when driving with a tyre repaired
using this type of kit.
Checking/adjusting tyre
pressures
You can also use the compressor,
without injecting sealant, to check and, if
necessary, adjust the tyre pressures.
F Remove the valve cap from the tyre and
keep it in a clean place.
F Uncoil the pipe stowed under the
compressor.
F Check that the compressor switch is in
position "O".
F Fully uncoil the electric cable, stowed under
the compressor.
F Connect the compressor's electric plug to
one of the vehicle's 12 V sockets.
F Switch on the ignition.
If a pressure of 2 bars is not reached after
7 minutes, this indicates that the tyre is
not repairable; contact a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop for assistance.
F Once the correct pressure is reached, put
the switch in position "O".
F Remove the kit then stow it.
F Stop to check the repair and measure the
tyre pressure using the kit.
F Screw the pipe onto the valve and tighten
firmly.
The tyre inflation pressures are given on
this label.
F Start the compressor by placing the switch
at position "I" and adjust the pressure to the
value shown on the vehicle's tyre pressure
label. To deflate: press the black button
located on the compressor pipe, near the
valve connection.
Do not drive more than 125 miles (200 km)
with a repaired tyre; see a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop to change
the tyre.
Should the pressure of one or more tyres
be adjusted, it is necessary to reinitialise
the under-inflation detection system.
For more information on Tyre under-
inflation detection, refer to the
corresponding section.
8
203
In the event of a breakdown
Spare wheel
Scan the QR code on page 3 to view
explanatory videos.
Procedure for changing a damaged wheel with
the spare wheel using the tools provided with
the vehicle.
Access to the spare wheel
The spare wheel is installed in the boot under
the floor.
For access to the spare wheel, first refer to
section on the Tool kit.
Depending on version, the spare wheel is
a standard size steel or alloy wheel.
For some countries of sale, it is the "space
saver" type.
Taking out the wheel
F Slacken the central nut.
F Remove the fastening device (nut and bolt).
F Lift the spare wheel towards you from the
rear.
F Take the wheel out of the boot.
Putting the wheel back in place
F Put the wheel back in place in its housing.
F Slacken the nut on the bolt by a few turns.
If there is no wheel in the well, the
fastening device (nut and bolt) cannot be
refitted.
Removing a wheel
Wheel with wheel trim
When removing the wheel, first remove
the wheel trim by pulling at the valve
aperture using the wheelbrace.
When refitting the wheel, refit the wheel
trim, starting by placing its aperture in
line with the valve and then pushing it into
place all round its edge with the palm of
your hand.
F Position the fastening device (nut and bolt)
in the middle of the wheel.
F Tighten the central nut to retain the wheel
correctly.
F Store the tool box in the middle of the wheel
and clip it in place.
204
In the event of a breakdown
Parking the vehicle
Immobilise the vehicle where it does not
block traffic: the ground must be level,
stable and non-slippery.
Apply the parking brake, unless it is
programmed to be in automatic mode;
switch off the ignition and with a manual
gearbox, engage first gear so as to lock
the wheels.
Apply the parking brake, unless it is
programmed to be in automatic mode;
switch off the ignition and with an
automatic gearbox, select mode P so as to
lock the wheels.
Check that the parking brake warning
lamps in the instrument panel are on fixed.
The occupants must get out of the vehicle
and wait where they are safe.
If necessary, place a chock under the
wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
changed.
Never go underneath a vehicle raised
using a jack; use an axle stand.
F To remove the wheel bolt cover on each of
the bolts, use tool 7 (alloy wheels).
F Fit security socket 2 on wheelbrace 5 to
slacken the security bolt.
F Slacken the other bolts using wheelbrace
5 only.
F Place the foot of jack 6 on the ground and
ensure that it is directly below the front A
or rear B jacking point on the underbody,
whichever is closest to the wheel to be
changed.
8
205
In the event of a breakdown
Ensure that the jack is stable. If the
ground is slippery or loose, the jack may
slip or drop – risk of injury!
Position the jack strictly at one of the
jacking points, A or B, under the vehicle,
ensuring that the head of the jack is
centred under the contact area on the
vehicle. Otherwise, there is a risk of
damage to the vehicle and/or the jack
collapsing – risk of injury!
Fitting a wheel
F Remove the bolts and store them in a clean
place.
F Extend jack 6 until its head comes into
contact with jacking point A or B; contact
area A or B on the vehicle must be properly
inserted into the central part of the head of
the jack.
F Raise the vehicle until there is sufficient
space between the wheel and the ground
to admit the spare (not punctured) wheel
easily.
F Remove the wheel.
Fitting a steel or "space-saver" spare
wheel
If your vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels,
when tightening the bolts on refitting it is
normal to notice that the washers do not
come into contact with the steel or "space-
saver" spare wheel. The wheel is secured
by the conical contact of each bolt.
F Put the wheel in place on the hub.
F Screw in the bolts by hand as far as
possible.
F Pre-tighten the security bolt using the
wheelbrace 5 fitted with security socket 2.
F Pre-tighten the other bolts using wheelbrace
5 only.
F Lower the vehicle again fully.
F Fold jack 6 and detach it.
206
In the event of a breakdown
After changing a wheel
Store the punctured wheel in the boot or,
depending on version, remove the central cover
first to store it beneath the floor in place of the
spare wheel.
With a 'space-saver' type spare wheel
Driving with more than one 'space-saver'
type spare wheel is prohibited.
Visit a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop as soon as possible to have the
tightness of the bolts and the pressure of
the spare wheel checked.
Have the punctured tyre examined. After
inspection, the technician will advise you
on whether the tyre can be repaired or if it
must be replaced.
F Tighten the security bolt using the
wheelbrace 5 fitted with security socket 2.
F Tighten the other bolts using wheelbrace
5 only.
F Refit the bolt covers to each of the bolts
(depending on equipment).
F Store the tools.
The following is recommended:
- deactivate certain driving aid functions
(Active Safety Brake, Adaptive cruise
control, etc.), as indicated on the label
attached to the wheel,
- do not exceed the maximum
authorised speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Changing a bulb
The headlamps have polycarbonate
lenses with a protective coating:
F do not clean them using a dry or
abrasive cloth, nor with a detergent
or solvent product,
F use a sponge and soapy water or a pH
neutral product,
F when using a high pressure washer
on persistent marks, do not keep the
lance directed towards the lamps or
their edges for too long, so as not to
damage their protective coating and
seals.
Changing a bulb must only be done with
the ignition off and after the lamp has
been switched off for several minutes –
Risk of serious burns!
F Do not touch the bulb directly with your
fingers, use a lint-free cloth.
It is essential only to use anti-ultraviolet
(UV) type bulbs, so as not to damage the
headlamp.
Always replace a failed bulb with a new
bulb with the same type and specification.
8
207
In the event of a breakdown
In some weather conditions (e.g. low
temperature or humidity), the presence
of misting on the internal surface of the
glass of the headlamps and rear lamps is
normal; it disappears after the lamps have
been on for a few minutes.
Light-emitting diodes (LED)
For the replacement of this type of bulb,
you must contact a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
Halogen bulbs
To ensure good quality lighting, check
that the bulb is correctly positioned in its
housing.
Front lamps
Model A
1. Daytime running lamps/sidelamps/
direction indicators (LED).
2. Dipped beam headlamps (LED).
3. Dipped beam/main beam headlamps
(LED).
4. Front foglamps (P21W).
Model B
1. Daytime running lamps/sidelamps/
direction indicators (LED).
2. Dipped beam headlamps (H7-55W).
3. Main beam headlamps (HB3-65W).
4. Front foglamps (P21W).
208
In the event of a breakdown
Model C
1. Daytime running lamps/sidelamps (LED).
2. Direction indicators (WY21W).
3. Dipped beam headlamps (H7-55W).
4. Main beam headlamps (HB3-65W).
5. Front foglamps (P21W).
Opening the bonnet/Access to bulbs
With the engine warm, proceed with
caution – Risk of burns!
Take care with objects or clothing that
could be caught in the blades of the
engine fan – Risk of strangulation!
Direction indicators (halogen
headlamps)
Rapid flashing of a direction indicator
lamp (left or right) indicates that one of
the bulbs on the corresponding side has
failed.
Amber coloured bulbs, such as the
direction indicators, must be replaced
by bulbs with identical colour and
specifications.
Main beam headlamps (halogen
headlamps)
F Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn anti-
clockwise.
F Pull the bulb and bulb holder assembly
rearwards.
F Replace the bulb.
To refit, carry out these operations in reverse
order.
F Remove the protective cover.
F Disconnect the bulb connector.
F Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise.
F Remove the bulb and replace it.
To refit, carry out these operations in reverse
order. When refitting, close the protective cover
very carefully to guarantee the sealing of the
lamp.
8
209
In the event of a breakdown
Dipped beam headlamps (halogen
headlamps)
F Remove the protective cover.
F Disconnect the bulb connector.
F Turn the lamp a quarter turn anti-clockwise
and replace it.
To refit, carry out these operations in reverse
order. When refitting, close the protective cover
very carefully to guarantee the sealing of the
lamp.
Daytime running lamps/sidelamps
(LEDs)
For the replacement of this type of diode bulb,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Changing foglamp bulbs
To replace this type of bulb, you can also
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Direction indicator side repeaters
(LED)
For the replacement of this type of diode bulb,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Door mirror spotlamps (LED)
For the replacement of this type of diode bulb,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
F Introduce a flat screwdriver in the hole in
the trim.
F Pull and lever to unclip the foglamp trim.
F With a Torx screwdriver, remove the two
module fixing screws.
F Remove the module from its housing.
F Disconnect the bulb holder connector.
F Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn and pull
it out.
F Change the assembly.
To refit, carry out these operations in reverse
order.
210
In the event of a breakdown
Rear lamps
1. Brake lamps (LED).
2. Sidelamps (LED).
3. Direction indicators (WY21W).
4. Reversing lamps (W16W).
5. Foglamps (P21W).
Direction indicators (on the
wings)
F Open the tailgate, then unclip the access
cover on the side in question.
F Unblock the lamp fixing nut with a 10 mm
box spanner.
F To avoid losing the nut in the wing trim if it
drops, first place a cloth below it.
F Manually unscrew and remove the lamp
fixing nut.
F Disengage the retaining clip, while pushing
the lamp out slightly.
F From the outside, carefully remove the lamp
by pulling it to the rear, then up.
F Disengage the cable duct from the panel.
F Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn using
a universal pair of pliers if necessary and
pull it out.
F Remove the bulb and replace it.
To refit, carry out these operations in reverse
order.
Reversing lamps (on the tailgate)
F Open the tailgate, then insert a flat
screwdriver into the cut-out to unclip the
access cover on the side in question.
F Unblock the lamp fixing nut with a 10 mm
box spanner.
F Manually unscrew and remove the lamp
fixing nut.
F Disengage the retaining clip, while pushing
the lamp out slightly.
8
211
In the event of a breakdown
To refit, carry out these operations in reverse
order.
Foglamps
If changing a bulb within a few minutes of
switching off the ignition, take care not to
touch the exhaust – risk of burns!
Third brake lamp (LED)
For the replacement of this type of diode bulb,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Number plate lamps (W5W)
Interior lighting
Courtesy lamps
Front courtesy lamp
F From the outside, carefully remove the lamp
by pulling it to the rear.
F Disconnect the lamp connector by pressing
on each side.
F Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn and pull
it out.
F Remove the bulb and replace it.
These bulbs are replaced from outside the rear
bumper:
F pass your hand under the bumper,
F turn the bulb holder a quarter turn and
remove it,
F turn the bulb a quarter turn and replace it.
To refit, carry out these operations in reverse
order.
F Insert a thin screwdriver into one of the cut-
outs in the lens.
F Push it outwards to unclip it.
F Remove the lens.
F Replace the faulty bulb.
To refit, press the lens to clip it in.
Rear courtesy lamp
For the replacement of these bulbs, contact
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
212
In the event of a breakdown
Boot (W5W)
F Unclip the unit using a small flat blade
screwdriver.
F Remove the bulb and replace it.
F Put the unit back in place.
Changing a fuse
Access to the tools
The extraction tweezers are located behind the
dashboard fusebox cover.
F Unclip the cover by pulling at the top.
F Disengage the cover completely.
F Take the tweezers from their housing.
Replacing a fuse
Before replacing a fuse:
F the cause of the failure must be identified
and rectified,
F all electrical consumers must be switched
off,
F the vehicle must be immobilised with the
ignition off,
F identify the defective fuse using the
allocation tables and the diagrams on the
following pages.
To replace a fuse, you must:
F use the special tweezers to extract the fuse
from its housing and check the condition of
its filament.
F always replace the failed fuse with a fuse
of the same rating (same colour); using
a different rating could cause faults (risk of
fire).
If the fault recurs after replacing a fuse, have
the electrical system checked by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Replacement with a fuse not shown in
the allocation tables below may cause
a serious malfunction of your vehicle.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
8
213
In the event of a breakdown
Installing electrical accessories
Your vehicle's electrical system is
designed to operate with standard or
optional equipment.
Before installing other electrical
equipment or accessories on your vehicle,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
CITROËN accepts no responsibility for
the cost incurred in repairing your vehicle
or for rectifying malfunctions resulting
from the installation of accessories
not supplied and not recommended by
CITROËN and not installed in accordance
with specifications, in particular when the
combined power consumption of all of the
additional equipment connected exceeds
10 milliamperes.
Dashboard fuses
The fusebox is placed in the lower dashboard
(left-hand side).
Access to the fuses
F Unclip the cover by pulling at the top.
Good Failed
Tweezers
214
In the event of a breakdown
Lower fusebox
F14 5 Alarm (unit).
F18 5 Trailer power supply.
F28 5 Alarm (siren), additional
heating/ventilation
remote control receiver.
F29 20 Touch screen
(CITROËN Connect
Radio or CITROËN
Connect Nav).
F31 10 Cigarette lighter/front
12 V accessory socket.
F34 5 Wireless smartphone
charger.
Upper fusebox
Fuse No.
Rating
(A)
Functions
F2 10 Heated door mirrors.
F3 40 Rear one-touch electric
windows.
F5 40 Front one-touch electric
windows.
F6 15 12 V socket in boot.
F7 30 Front heated seats.
F10 30 Panoramic opening
sunroof.
Fuse No.
Rating
(A)
Functions
F4 15 Horn.
F6 20 Front and rear
screenwash pump.
F7 10 12 V rear USB socket
F8 20 Rear wiper.
F10 30 Locking/unlocking of
the doors and fuel filler
flap.
8
215
In the event of a breakdown
Fuse No.
Rating
(A)
Functions
F1 40 Air conditioning
ventilation motor.
F16 20 Heated windscreen
F18 10
Right-hand main beam headlamp.
F19 10
Left-hand main beam headlamp.
F24 40 Trailer power supply.
F26 25 Front foglamps.
12 V battery
Procedure for starting the engine using another
battery or charging a discharged battery.
Lead-acid starter batteries
Batteries contain harmful substances
such as sulphuric acid and lead.
They must be disposed of in accordance
with regulations and must not, in any
circumstances, be discarded with
household waste.
Take used remote control batteries and
vehicle batteries to a special collection
point.
Protect your eyes and face before
handling the battery.
All operations on the battery must be
carried out in a well ventilated area and
away from naked flames and sources of
sparks, so as to avoid the risk of explosion
or fire.
Wash your hands afterwards.
Access to the battery
The battery is located under the bonnet.
Engine compartment fuses
The fusebox is placed in the engine
compartment near the battery.
Access to the fuses
F Release the two latches A.
F Remove the cover.
F Change the fuse.
F When you have finished, close the cover
carefully then engage the two latches A, to
ensure correct sealing of the fusebox.
216
In the event of a breakdown
(+) Positive terminal.
It has a quick-release clamp.
(-) Negative terminal.
As the battery's negative terminal is not
accessible, a remote earth point is placed near
the battery.
Starting using another
battery
When your vehicle's battery is discharged, the
engine can be started using a backup battery
(external or from another vehicle) and jump
leads or using a battery booster.
For access to the (+) terminal:
F unlock the bonnet by activating the internal
release lever, then the external safety catch.
F raise the bonnet.
Never start the engine by connecting
a battery charger.
Never use a 24 V or higher battery
booster.
Check beforehand that the backup
battery has a nominal voltage of 12 V and
a capacity at least equal to that of the
discharged battery.
The two vehicles must not be in contact
with each other.
Switch off all the electrical consumers
on both vehicles (audio system, wipers,
lighting, etc.).
Make sure that the jump leads are not
close to the moving parts of the engine
(fan, belt, etc.).
Do not disconnect the (+) terminal while
the engine is running.
F Connect the red cable to the (+) terminal of
flat battery A (at the metal elbow), then to
the (+) terminal of backup battery B or the
booster.
F Connect one end of the green or black
cable to the (-) terminal of backup battery
B or the booster (or to an earth point on the
assisting vehicle).
F Connect the other end of the green or black
cable to earth point C on the broken down
vehicle.
F Lift the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, if
your vehicle has one.
F Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and
leave it running for a few minutes.
F Operate the starter on the broken down
vehicle and let the engine run.
If the engine does not start straight away,
switch off the ignition and wait a few moments
before trying again.
F Wait for it to return to idle.
F Disconnect the jump leads in reverse
order.
F Refit the plastic cover to the (+) terminal, if
your vehicle has one.
F Allow the engine to run for at least
30 minutes, by driving or with the vehicle
stationary, so that the battery reaches an
adequate state of charge.
If your vehicle has an automatic gearbox,
never try to start the engine by pushing
the vehicle.
8
217
In the event of a breakdown
Charging the battery using
a battery charger
For optimum service life of the battery, it is
essential to maintain an adequate state of
charge.
In some circumstances, it may be necessary to
charge the battery:
- using the vehicle mainly for short journeys,
- if the vehicle is to be taken off the road for
several weeks.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
To charge the vehicle's battery yourself,
use only a charger compatible with lead-
acid batteries with a nominal voltage of
12 V.
Follow the instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the charger.
Never reverse polarities.
It is not necessary to disconnect the
battery.
F Switch off the ignition.
F Switch off all electrical consumers (audio
system, lighting, wipers, etc.).
Never try to charge a frozen battery – risk
of explosion!
If the battery has frozen, have it checked
by a CITROËN dealer or by a qualified
workshop who will verify that the internal
components have not been damaged
and that the case has not cracked, which
would mean a risk of toxic and corrosive
acid leaking.
Some functions, including Stop & Start,
are not available if the battery is not
sufficiently charged.
Disconnecting the battery
F Switch off charger B before connecting the
cables to the battery, so as to avoid any
dangerous sparks.
F Ensure that the charger cables are in good
condition.
F If the vehicle has one, lift the plastic cover
on the (+) terminal.
F Connect the cables of charger B as follows:
- the positive (+) red cable to the (+)
terminal of battery A,
- the negative (-) black cable to earth point
C on the vehicle.
F At the end of the charging operation, switch
off charger B before disconnecting the
cables from battery A.
In order to maintain an adequate state
of charge for starting the engine, it is
recommended that the battery be disconnected
if the vehicle is taken out of service for a long
period.
Before disconnecting the battery:
F close all openings (doors, tailgate, windows,
sunroof),
F switch off all electrical consumers (audio
system, wipers, lighting, etc.),
218
In the event of a breakdown
F switch off the ignition and wait for four
minutes.
At the battery, it is only necessary to
disconnect the (+) terminal.
Quick-release terminal clamp
Disconnecting the (+) terminal
Reconnecting the (+) terminal
Do not apply force when pressing the
lever, as if the clamp is not positioned
correctly, locking will be impossible; start
the procedure again.
After reconnecting the battery
F Depending on equipment, lift the plastic
cover on the (+) terminal.
F Raise the lever A fully to release the clamp B.
F Remove the clamp B by lifting it off.
F Raise the lever A fully.
F Replace the open clamp B on the (+)
terminal.
F Push the clamp B fully down.
F Lower the lever A to lock the clamp B.
F Depending on equipment, lower the plastic
cover on the (+) terminal.
After reconnecting the battery, turn on the
ignition and wait 1 minute before starting
the engine, in order to enable the electronic
systems to initialise.
If minor problems nevertheless persist
following this operation, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Referring to the corresponding section, you
must reinitialise certain systems yourself, such
as:
- the key with remote control or electronic key
(depending on version),
- the sunroof and its electric blind,
- the electric windows,
- the date and time,
- the preset radio stations.
The Stop & Start system may not be
operational during the trip following the
first engine start.
In this case, the system will only be
available again after a continuous
period of immobilisation of the vehicle,
a period which depends on the exterior
temperature and the state of charge of the
battery (up to about 8 hours).
8
219
In the event of a breakdown
Towing the vehicle
Procedure for having your vehicle towed or
for towing another vehicle using a removable
mechanical device.
Access to the tools
The towing eye is stored in a toolbox, under the
boot floor.
The opening tool for the rear protective cover is
secured to the towing eye.
For more information on the Vehicle tools,
refer to the corresponding section.
Towing your vehicle
F On the front bumper, unclip the cover by
using the tool fixed on the towing eye.
F Release the cover to the right and then
downwards.
F Screw the towing eye in fully.
F Install the towbar.
F Put the gearbox into neutral.
Failure to observe this instruction could
result in damage to certain components
(braking, transmission, etc.) and the
absence of braking assistance the next
time the engine is started.
Automatic gearbox: never tow the vehicle
with the front wheels on the ground with
the engine off.
F Unlock the steering and release the parking
brake.
F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on
both vehicles.
F Move off gently, drive slowly and for a short
distance.
Towing another vehicle
F On the rear bumper, unclip the cover by
using the tool fixed on the eye.
F Pull the cover downwards.
F Screw the towing eye in fully.
F Install the towbar.
220
In the event of a breakdown
F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on
both vehicles.
F Move off gently, drive slowly and for a short
distance.
General recommendations
Observe the legislation in force in the
country where you are driving.
Ensure that the weight of the towing
vehicle is higher than that of the towed
vehicle.
The driver must remain at the wheel of
the towed vehicle and must have a valid
driving licence.
When towing a vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground, always use an
approved towing arm; rope and straps are
prohibited.
The towing vehicle must move off gently.
When the vehicle is towed with its engine
off, there is no longer braking and steering
assistance.
In the following cases, you must always
call on a professional recovery service:
- vehicle broken down on a motorway or
main road,
- four-wheel drive vehicle,
- when it is not possible to put the
gearbox into neutral, unlock the
steering, or release the parking brake,
- when it is not possible to tow a vehicle
with an automatic gearbox, engine
running,
- towing with only two wheels on the
ground,
- where there is no approved towbar,
etc. available.
221
9
Technical data
Identication markings
Various visible markings for the identification
and research of your vehicle.
A. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
under the bonnet.
This number is engraved on the bodywork
structure.
B. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), on
the dashboard.
The number is on a label, visible through the
windscreen.
C. Manufacturer's label.
This tamperproof label is affixed to the right-
hand door aperture.
It bears the following information:
- the name of the manufacturer,
- the European Whole Vehicle Type Approval
number,
- the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
- the gross vehicle weight (GVW),
- the gross train weight (GTW),
- the maximum weight on the front axle,
- the maximum weight on the rear axle.
Dimensions (mm)
These dimensions have been measured on an unladen vehicle.
* Mirrors folded in.
** Version with longitudinal bars.
222
Technical data
Engine technical data and
towed loads
Engines
The engine characteristics are given in the
vehicle's registration document, as well as in
sales brochures.
The maximum power corresponds to the
value type-approved on a test bed, under
conditions defined in European legislation
(Directive 1999/99/EC).
For more information, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Weights and towed loads
The weights and towed loads relating to your
vehicle are given in the registration document,
as well as in sales brochures.
These values are also given on the
manufacturer's plate or label.
For more information, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
The GTW (Gross Train Weight) and towed load
values indicated are valid up to a maximum
altitude of 1,000 metres. The towed load value
must be reduced by 10% for each additional
1,000 metres of altitude.
The maximum authorised nose weight
corresponds to the weight permitted on the
towball.
When exterior temperatures are high,
the vehicle performance may be limited
in order to protect the engine. When the
exterior temperature is higher than 37°C,
limit the towed weight.
Towing using a lightly loaded vehicle can
adversely affect roadholding.
Braking distances are increased when
towing a trailer.
When using a vehicle to tow, never exceed
a speed of 62 mph (100 km/h) (observe
the local legislation in force).
If the exterior temperature is high, it is
recommended that the engine be allowed
to idle for 1 to 2 minutes after the vehicle
comes to a stop, to facilitate its cooling.
D. Tyres/paint code label.
This label is affixed to the driver's door
aperture.
It bears the following information about the
tyres:
- the tyre pressures, unladen and laden,
- the tyre specification, made up of the
dimensions and type as well as the load and
speed indices,
- the spare tyre pressure.
It also indicates the paint colour code.
The vehicle may be originally equipped
with tyres with higher load and speed
indices than those indicated on the label,
without affecting inflation pressure.
223
9
Technical data
Engines and towed loads – Petrol
Engines
1.6 THP 165
(Euro 5)
PureTech 130 S&S PureTech 175 S&S
Gearboxes
EAT6
(Automatic 6-speed)
EAT6
(Automatic 6-speed)
EAT8
(Automatic 8-speed)
Codes EP6FDTMD – AT6III
EB2ADTS STTd
MB6E
EP6FADTXD STTd
ATN8
Model codes
J...
5GS – 5GY 5GX HNS 5GF
Cubic capacity (cm
3
) 1,598 1,598 1,598 1,598
Max. power: EC standard (kW) 110 121 96 133
Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded
Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg)
on a 10% or 12% gradient
550 550 1,350 1,500
Unbraked trailer (kg) 550 550 739 750
Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 64 64 54 64
224
Technical data
Engines and towed loads – Diesel
Engines BlueHDi 130 S&S
2.0 HDi 180
(Euro 5)
BlueHDi 180 S&S
Gearboxes
BVM6
(Manual 6-speed)
EAT8
(Automatic 8-speed)
EAT8
(Automatic 8-speed)
EAT8
(Automatic 8-speed)
Codes DV5RC STTd ML6C DV5RC STTd ATN8 DW10FC – AMN8 DW10FC STTa AMN8
Model codes
J...
YHZ YHZ EHZ EHZ
Cubic capacity (cm
3
) 1,499 1,499 1,997 1,997
Max. power: EC standard (kW) 96 96 130 130
Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel
Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg)
on a 10% or 12% gradient
1,450 1,250 1,650 1,650
Unbraked trailer (kg) 750 750 750 750
Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 58 50 66 66
1
.
CITROËN Connect Radio
CITROËN Connect Radio
Multimedia audio system –
Applications – Bluetooth
®
telephone
Contents
First steps 1
Steering mounted controls 2
Menus 3
Applications 5
Radio 5
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 7
Media 8
Telephone 10
Settings 14
Frequently asked questions 16
The various functions and settings
described differ according to the version
and configuration of the vehicle.
For safety reasons and because they
require continued attention on the part of
the driver, the following operations must
be carried out with the vehicle stationary
and the ignition on:
- Using a smartphone.
- Pairing a Bluetooth mobile phone to
the hands-free Bluetooth system of the
audio system.
- Smartphone connection operations for
CarPlay
®
, MirrorLink
TM
or Android Auto
(certain applications interrupt their
display when the vehicle starts to move
again).
- The configuration of profiles.
The system is protected in such a way that
it will only operate in the vehicle.
The display of the message Energy
Economy Mode signals that a change to
standby is imminent.
The link below gives access to the OSS
(Open Source Software) code for the
system.
https://www.groupe-psa.com/fr/oss/
https://www.groupe-psa.com/en/oss/
First steps
With the engine running, a press
mutes the sound.
With the ignition off, a press turns
the system on.
Increase or decrease the volume using
the wheel or the "plus" or "minus" buttons
(depending on the equipment).
Use the buttons on either side of or below the
touch screen for access to the menus, then
press the virtual buttons in the touch screen.
Depending on the model, use the "Source" or
"Menu" buttons on the left of the touch screen
for access to the menus, then press the virtual
buttons in the touch screen.
At all times it is possible to display the rolling
menus by pressing the screen briefly with three
fingers.
All of the touch areas of the screen are white.
For pages with multiple tabs at the bottom of
the screen, it is possible to switch between
pages either by tapping the tab for the desired
page, or by using a finger, sliding the pages to
the left or to the right.
Press in the grey zone to go back up a level or
to confirm.
2
CITROËN Connect Radio
The touch screen is of the "capacitive"
type.
To clean the screen, use a soft, non-
abrasive cloth (e.g. spectacles cloth) with
no additional product.
Do not use sharp objects on the screen.
Do not touch the screen with wet hands.
Certain information is displayed permanently in
the upper bar of the touch screen:
- Reminder of the air conditioning information
(depending on version), and direct access to
the corresponding menu.
- Reminder of the Radio Media and
Telephone menu information.
- Reminder of the privacy information.
- Access to the Settings of the touch screen
and digital instrument panel.
Selection of the audio source (depending on
equipment):
- FM/DAB/AM radio stations (depending on
equipment).
- Telephone connected via Bluetooth and
Bluetooth multimedia broadcast (streaming).
- USB memory stick.
- Media player connected via the auxiliary
socket (depending on equipment).
- CD player (depending on equipment).
In the "Settings" menu it is possible to
create a profile for just one person or
a group of people with shared interests,
with the possibility of entering multiple
settings (radio presets, audio settings,
ambiences, etc.); these settings are taken
into account automatically.
In very hot conditions, the volume may
be limited to protect the system. It may go
into standby (screen and sound off) for at
least 5 minutes.
The return to normal takes place when
the temperature in the passenger
compartment has dropped.
Press the back arrow to go back a level or
confirm.
Steering mounted controls
Steering mounted controls –
Type 1
Radio:
Select the previous/next preset radio
station.
Select the previous/next item in
a menu or a list.
Media:
Select the previous/next track.
Select the previous/next item in
a menu or a list.
Radio:
Short press: display the list of radio
stations.
Long press: update the list.
Media:
Short press: display the list of
folders.
Long press: display the available
sorting options.
Change audio source (radio; USB;
AUX if equipment connected; CD;
streaming).
Confirm a selection.
3
.
CITROËN Connect Radio
Increase volume.
Decrease volume.
Mute/restore sound by
simultaneously pressing the
increase and decrease volume
buttons.
Steering mounted controls –
Type 2
Voice commands:
This control is located on the
steering wheel or at the end of the
lighting control stalk (depending on
equipment).
Short press, smartphone voice
commands via the system.
Increase volume.
Decrease volume.
Mute by pressing the volume
increase and decrease buttons
simultaneously (depending on
equipment).
Restore the sound by pressing one
of the two volume buttons.
Media (short press): change the
multimedia source.
Telephone (short press): start
telephone call.
Call in progress (short press):
access telephone menu.
Telephone (long press): reject an
incoming call, end call; when no call
is in progress, access telephone
menu.
Radio (rotate): automatic search for
the previous/next station.
Media (rotate): previous/next track,
move in a list.
Short press: confirm a selection; if
nothing selected, access to presets.
Radio: display the list of stations.
Media: display the list of tracks.
Radio (press and hold): update the
list of stations received.
Menus
Applications
Depending on equipment/Depending on version.
Access configurable equipment.
Radio Media
Depending on equipment/Depending on version.
Select an audio source or radio
station.
4
21,518,5
CITROËN Connect Radio
Telephone
Depending on equipment/Depending on version.
Connect a telephone by Bluetooth
®
.
Operate certain applications on
a smartphone connected via
MirrorLink
TM
, CarPlay
®
or Android
Auto.
Settings
Depending on equipment/Depending on version.
Configure a personal profile and/
or configure the sound (balance,
ambience, etc.) and the display
(language, units, date, time, etc.).
Driving
Depending on equipment/Depending on version.
Activate, deactivate or configure
certain vehicle functions.
Navigation
Depending on equipment/Depending on version.
Configure the navigation and select
your destination via MirrorLink
TM
,
CarPlay
®
or Android Auto.
Air conditioning
Depending on equipment/Depending on version.
Manage various temperature and air
flow settings.
5
.
CITROËN Connect Radio
Applications
Viewing photos
Insert a USB memory stick in the USB socket.
To protect the system, do not use a USB
hub.
The system can read folders and image files in
the formats: .tiff; .gif; .jpg/jpeg; .bmp;. png.
Press Applications to display the
primary page.
Press "Photos".
Select a folder.
Select an image to view.
Press this button to display the
details of the photo.
Press the back arrow to go back
a level.
Managing messages
Press Applications to display the
primary page.
Press "SMS".
Select the "SMS" tab.
Press this button to select the
display settings for messages.
Press this button to search for and
select a recipient.
Select the "Quick messages" tab.
Press this button to select the
display settings for messages.
Press this button to write a new
message.
Press the basket alongside the
selected message to delete it.
Press this button alongside the
selected message to display the
secondary page.
Press this button to edit and modify
the existing text.
Press this button to write a new
message.
Press the basket to delete the
message.
Radio
Selecting a station
Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press one of the buttons for an
automatic search for radio stations.
Or
Move the slider for a manual search
for frequencies up or down.
Or
Press the frequency.
Enter the FM and AM waveband
values using the virtual keypad.
6
CITROËN Connect Radio
Press "OK" to confirm.
Radio reception may be affected by the
use of electrical equipment not approved
by the Brand, such as a USB charger
connected to the 12 V socket.
The exterior environment (hills, buildings,
tunnels, basement car parks, etc.)
may block reception, including in RDS
mode. This behaviour is normal in the
propagation of radio waves and does not
indicate any failure of the audio system.
Changing waveband
Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Press "Band" to change waveband.
Press in the grey area to confirm.
Presetting a station
Select a radio station or frequency.
Make a short press on the star
outline. If the star is solid, the radio
station is already preset.
Or
Select a radio station or frequency.
Press "Preset".
Make a long press on one of the
buttons to preset the station.
Activating/Deactivating RDS
Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Activate/deactivate "RDS".
Press in the grey zone to confirm.
RDS, if activated, allows you to continue
listening to the same station by automatically
retuning to alternative frequencies. However,
in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS
station may not be assured throughout the
entire country as radio stations do not cover
100% of the territory. This explains the loss
of reception of the station during a journey.
Displaying text information
The "Radio Text" function allows
information transmitted by the radio
station and related to the station or the
song playing to be displayed.
Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Activate/deactivate "INFO".
Press in the grey zone to confirm.
7
.
CITROËN Connect Radio
Playing TA messages
The TA (Traffic Announcement) function
gives priority to TA alert messages.
To operate, this function needs good
reception of a radio station that transmits
this type of message. While traffic
information is being broadcast, the current
media is automatically interrupted so that
the TA message can be heard. Normal
play of the media previously playing is
resumed at the end of the message.
Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Activate/deactivate "TA".
Press in the grey zone to confirm.
Audio settings
Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Press "Audio settings".
Select the "Tone" or "Balance" or
"Sound" or "Voice" or "Ringtones"
tab to configure the audio settings.
Press the back arrow to confirm.
In the "Tone" tab, the Ambience audio
settings, as well as Bass, Medium and
Treble are different and independent for
each audio source.
In the "Balance" tab, the All passengers,
Driver and Front only settings are
common to all sources.
In the "Sound" tab, activate or deactivate
"Volume linked to speed", "Auxiliary
input" and "Touch tones".
The balance/distribution (or spatialisation
with the Arkamys
©
system) is audio
processing that allows the quality of the
sound to be adapted according to the
number of passengers in the vehicle.
On-board audio: the Arkamys Sound
Staging
©
optimises the distribution of
sound in the passenger compartment.
DAB (Digital Audio
Broadcasting) radio
Terrestrial Digital Radio
Digital radio provides higher quality sound.
The different "multiplexes/ensembles"
offer a choice of radio stations arranged in
alphabetical order.
Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Press "Band" to select the "DAB
band".
Press in the grey zone to confirm.
FM-DAB tracking
"DAB" does not cover 100% of the
territory.
When the digital radio signal is poor,
the "FM-DAB tracking" allows you to
continue listening to the same station,
by automatically switching to the
corresponding "FM" analogue station (if
there is one).
8
CITROËN Connect Radio
Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Activate/deactivate "FM-DAB
tracking".
Press in the grey zone to confirm.
If "FM-DAB tracking" is activated, there
may be a difference of a few seconds
when the system switches to FM analogue
radio with sometimes a variation in
volume.
Once the digital signal quality is restored,
the system automatically changes back
to "DAB".
Media
USB socket
Insert the USB memory stick in the USB socket
or connect the USB device to the USB socket
using a suitable cable (not supplied).
To protect the system, do not use a USB
hub.
Auxiliary socket (AUX)
Depending on equipment
This source is only available if "Auxiliary input"
has been checked in the audio settings.
Connect a portable device (MP3 player, etc.) to
the auxiliary Jack socket using an audio cable
(not supplied).
First adjust the volume on the portable device
(to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the
audio system.
Management of the controls is via the portable
device.
Selecting the source
If the "DAB" station being listened to is
not available on FM, or if the "FM-DAB
tracking" is not activated, the sound will
cut out while the digital signal is too weak.
The system builds playlists (in temporary
memory), an operation which can take from
a few seconds to several minutes at the first
connection.
Reduce the number of non-music files and the
number of folders to reduce the waiting time.
The playlists are updated every time the
ignition is switched off or a USB memory stick
is connected. The lists are memorised: if they
are not modified, the subsequent loading time
will be shorter.
Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press the "SOURCES" button.
Choose the source.
9
.
CITROËN Connect Radio
Bluetooth
®
streaming
Streaming allows you to listen to music from
your smartphone.
The Bluetooth profile must be activated, first
adjust the volume on the portable device (to
a high level).
Then adjust the volume of the system.
If play does not start automatically, it may be
necessary to start the audio playback from the
smartphone.
Control is from the portable device or by using
the system's touch buttons.
Once connected in Streaming mode, the
smartphone is considered to be a media
source.
Connecting Apple
®
players
Connect the Apple
®
player to the USB socket
using a suitable cable (not supplied).
Play starts automatically.
Control is via the audio system.
The classifications available are those of
the portable device connected (artists/
albums/genres/playlists/audio books/
podcasts). It is also possible to use
a classification structured in the form of
a library.
The default classification used is by artist.
To modify the classification used, return
to the first level of the menu then select
the desired classification (playlists for
example) and confirm to go down through
the menu to the desired track.
The version of software in the audio system
may not be compatible with the generation of
the Apple
®
player.
To protect the system, do not use a USB
hub.
The audio system will only play audio files
with ".wav", ".wma", ".aac", ".ogg" and ".mp3"
file extensions and with a bit rate of between
32 Kbps and 320 Kbps.
It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read.
Files of the ".wma" type should be to the wma
9 standard.
Sampling frequencies supported are 11, 22,
44 and 48 kHz.
Information and advice
The system supports USB mass storage
devices, BlackBerry
®
devices or Apple
®
players via the USB sockets. The adapter
cable is not supplied.
Device management is via the audio
system controls.
Other devices, not recognised on
connection, must be connected to the
auxiliary socket using a Jack cable (not
supplied) or via Bluetooth streaming,
depending on compatibility.
10
CITROËN Connect Radio
It is recommended that file names are less
than 20 characters long and do not contain any
special characters (e.g. " ? . ; ù) so as to avoid
any reading or display problems.
Use only USB memory sticks in FAT32 format
(File Allocation Table).
It is recommended that the original USB
cable for the portable device be used.
In order to be able to play a burned CDR or
CDRW, select standards ISO 9660 level 1, 2, or
Joliet, if possible, when burning the CD.
If the disc is burned in another format, it may
not be played correctly.
It is recommended that the same burning
standard be always used on an individual disc,
with the lowest speed possible (4x maximum)
for the best acoustic quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the
Joliet standard is recommended.
Telephone
MirrorLink
TM
smartphone
connection
The "MirrorLink
TM
" function requires
a compatible smartphone and
applications.
Telephone not connected by
Bluetooth
®
Connect a USB cable. The
smartphone charges when
connected by the USB cable.
From the system, press
"Telephone" to display the primary
page.
Press "MirrorLink
TM
" to start the
application in the system.
Depending on the smartphone, it may be
necessary to activate the "MirrorLink
TM
" function.
During the procedure, several
screen pages relating to certain
functions are displayed.
Accept to start and complete the
connection.
When connecting a smartphone
to the system, it is recommended
that Bluetooth
®
be started on the
smartphone.
Telephone connected by
Bluetooth
®
From the system, press
"Telephone" to display the primary
page.
USB sockets
Depending on equipment, for more information
on the USB sockets compatible with the
CarPlay
®
, MirrorLink
TM
or Android Auto
applications, refer to the "Ease of use and
comfort" section.
The synchronisation of a smartphone
allows users to display applications
adapted to the CarPlay
®
, MirrorLink
TM
or Android Auto technology of the
smartphone on the vehicle screen. For
the CarPlay
®
technology, the CarPlay
®
function must be activated on the
smartphone beforehand.
For the communication process between
the smartphone and the system to
work, it is essential in all cases that the
smartphone is unlocked.
As the principles and standards are
constantly changing, it is recommended
that you keep the smartphone's
operating system up-to-date, as well
as the date and time of the smartphone
and of the system.
For the list of eligible smartphones, go to
the Brand's national website.
Connect a USB cable. The
smartphone charges when
connected by the USB cable.
11
.
Press the "TEL" button to display the
secondary page.
Press "MirrorLink
TM
" to start the
application in the system.
Once the connection is established, a page
is displayed with the applications already
downloaded to the smartphone and compatible
with the MirrorLink
TM
technology.
Access to the different audio sources remains
available in the margin of the MirrorLink
TM
display, using the touch buttons located in the
upper bar.
Access to the menus for the system is possible
at any time using the dedicated buttons.
There may be a wait for the availability of
applications, depending on the quality of
the network.
CarPlay
®
smartphone
connection
Connect a USB cable. The
smartphone charges when
connected by the USB cable.
From the system, press Telephone
to display the CarPlay
®
interface.
Or
If the smartphone is already
connected by Bluetooth
®
.
Connect a USB cable. The
smartphone charges when
connected by the USB cable.
From the system, press
"Telephone" to display the primary
page.
Press the "TEL" button to go to the secondary
page.
Press "CarPlay" to display the
CarPlay
®
interface.
On connecting the USB cable, the
CarPlay
®
function deactivates the
system's Bluetooth
®
mode.
When the USB cable is disconnected and
the ignition is switched off then back on,
the system will not automatically switch to
Radio Media mode, a change of source
will have to be done manually.
It is possible to go to the CarPlay
®
navigation at any time by pressing
the system's Navigation button.
Telephone not connected by
Bluetooth
®
Connect a USB cable. The
smartphone charges when
connected by the USB cable.
From the system, press
"Telephone" to display the primary
page.
Press "Android Auto" to start the
application in the system.
Depending on the smartphone, it may be
necessary to activate the "Android Auto" function.
During the procedure, several
screen pages relating to certain
functions are displayed.
Accept to start and complete the
connection.
The "Android Auto" function requires the
use of a compatible smartphone and
applications.
Android Auto smartphone
connection
On the smartphone, download the
Android Auto application.
12
CITROËN Connect Radio
When connecting a smartphone
to the system, it is recommended
that Bluetooth
®
be started on the
smartphone.
Telephone connected by
Bluetooth
®
From the system, press
"Telephone" to display the primary
page.
Press the "TEL" button to display the
secondary page.
Press "Android Auto" to start the
application in the system.
Different audio sources remain accessible in
the margin of the Android Auto display, using
touch buttons in the upper bar.
Access to the menus for the system is possible
at any time using the dedicated buttons.
There may be a wait for the availability of
applications, depending on the quality of
the network.
Pairing a Bluetooth
®
telephone
Activate the Bluetooth function on the
telephone and ensure that it is "visible to
all" (telephone configuration).
Procedure from the telephone
Select the name of the system in the
list of devices detected.
In the system, accept the connection request
from the telephone.
To complete the pairing, whichever
procedure used (from the telephone or
from the system), ensure that the code
is the same in the system and in the
telephone.
Procedure from the system
Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
Press "Bluetooth search".
The list of telephones detected is
displayed.
Select the name of the chosen
telephone in the list.
If the pairing procedure fails, it is recommended
that you deactivate and then reactivate the
Bluetooth function on the telephone.
Depending on the type of telephone, the
option is given to accept or not accept the
transfer of contacts and messages.
Automatic reconnection
On return to the vehicle, if the last
telephone connected is present again, it is
automatically recognised and within about
30 seconds of switching on the ignition,
the pairing is established automatically
(Bluetooth activated).
To modify the connection profile:
Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
Press the "TEL" button to go to the secondary
page.
Press "Bluetooth connection" to
display the list of paired devices.
Press the "details" button of a paired
device.
13
.
CITROËN Connect Radio
The system offers to connect the telephone
with 3 profiles:
- "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone
only),
- "Audio streaming" (streaming: wireless
playing of the audio files on the telephone),
- "Internet data".
Select one or more profiles.
Press "OK" to confirm.
The ability of the system to connect to just
one profile depends on the telephone.
All three profiles may connect by default.
The services available depend on
the network, the SIM card and the
compatibility of the Bluetooth devices
used. Check the user guide for the
telephone and with the service provider
for the available services.
The profiles compatible with the system
are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP,
MAP and PAN.
Go to the Brand's website for more information
(compatibility, additional help, etc.).
Managing paired telephones
This function allows the connection or
disconnection of a device as well as the
deletion of a pairing.
Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
Press the "TEL" button to go to the secondary
page.
Press "Bluetooth connection" to
display the list of paired devices.
Press on the name of the telephone
chosen in the list to disconnect it.
Press again to connect it.
Deleting a telephone
Press the basket at the top right
of the screen to display a basket
alongside the telephone chosen.
Press the basket alongside the
telephone chosen to delete it.
Making a call
Using the telephone is not recommended
while driving.
Parking the vehicle.
Make the call using the steering mounted
controls.
Calling a new number
Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
Enter the phone number using the
digital keypad.
Or
Press "End call".
Receiving a call
An incoming call is announced by a ring and
a superimposed display in the screen.
Make a short press on the steering
mounted PHONE button to accept
an incoming call.
And
Make a long press
on the steering mounted PHONE
button to reject the call.
14
CITROËN Connect Radio
Press "Call" to start the call.
Calling a contact
Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
Or make a long press
on the steering mounted TEL button.
Press "Contacts".
Select the desired contact from the list offered.
Press "Call".
Calling a recently used
number
Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
Or
Make a long press
on the steering mounted button.
Press "Recent calls".
Select the desired contact from the list offered.
It is always possible to make a call directly
from the telephone; as a safety measure,
first park the vehicle.
Setting the ringtone
Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Press "Ring volume" to display the
volume bar.
Press the arrows or move the slider
to set the ring volume.
Settings
Setting the profiles
Press "Profiles".
Select "Profile 1" or "Profile 2" or "Profile 3"
or "Common profile".
Press this button to enter a name for
the profile using the virtual keypad.
Press "OK" to save.
Press the back arrow to confirm.
Press this button to activate the
profile.
Press the back arrow again to
confirm.
Press this button to reinitialise the
profile selected.
Adjusting brightness
Press Settings to display the
primary page.
Press Brightness.
Move the slider to adjust the brightness
of the screen and/or of the instrument
panel (according to version).
Press in the grey zone to confirm.
Press Settings to display the
primary page.
15
.
CITROËN Connect Radio
Modifying system settings
Press Settings to display the
primary page.
Press "Configuration" to go to the
secondary page.
Press "System configuration".
Press the "Units" tab to change the units of
distance, fuel consumption and temperature.
Press the "Factory settings" tab to return to
the initial settings.
Returning the system to factory settings
activates the English language by default
(depending on version).
Press the "System info" tab to display the
versions of the different modules installed in
the system.
Press the "Privacy" tab,
or
Press Settings to display the
primary page.
Press "Privacy" to activate or
deactivate the privacy data mode.
Activate or deactivate:
- "No sharing (data, vehicle
position)".
- "Data sharing only"
- "Sharing data and the vehicle
position"
Press the back arrow to confirm.
Press Settings to display the
primary page.
Press "Configuration" to go to the
secondary page.
Press "Screen configuration".
Press "Brightness".
Move the slider to adjust the brightness
of the screen and/or of the instrument
panel (according to version).
Press the back arrow to confirm.
Press "Animation".
Activate or deactivate: "Automatic
scrolling".
Select "Animated transitions".
Select "Language" to change the
language.
Press the back arrow to confirm.
Setting the time
Press Settings to display the
primary page.
Press "Configuration" to go to the
secondary page.
Press "Date and time".
Select "Time".
Press this button to adjust the time
using the virtual keypad.
Press the back arrow to confirm.
Select the language
Press Settings to display the
primary page.
Press "Configuration" to go to the
secondary page.
16
CITROËN Connect Radio
Press "OK" to save the time.
Press this button to define the time
zone.
Select the display format for the time
(12h/24h).
Activate or deactivate summer time
(+1 hour).
Activate or deactivate
synchronisation with GPS (UTC).
Press the back arrow to save the
settings.
The system does not automatically manage
the change between winter and summer
time (depending on the country of sale).
Setting the date
Press Settings to display the
primary page.
Press "Date and time".
Select "Date".
Press this button to define the date.
Press the back arrow to save the
date.
Select the display format of the date.
Press the back arrow again to
confirm.
Adjustment of the time and date is only
available if "GPS Synchronisation" is
deactivated.
Press "Configuration" to go to the
secondary page.
Frequently asked questions
The following information groups together the
answers to the most frequently asked questions
concerning the system.
17
.
CITROËN Connect Radio
Radio
QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION
The reception quality of the tuned radio station
gradually deteriorates or the stored stations are
not working (no sound, 87,5 MHz is displayed,
etc.).
The vehicle is too far from the transmitter of
the station or no transmitter is present in the
geographical area.
Activate the "RDS" function by means of the
upper band to enable the system to check
whether there is a more powerful transmitter in
the geographical area.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels,
basement car parks, etc.) blocks reception,
including in RDS mode.
This phenomenon is normal and does not
indicate a failure of the audio equipment.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for
example when going through a car wash or into
an underground car park).
Have the aerial checked by a dealer.
I cannot find some radio stations in the list of
received stations.
The name of the radio station changes.
The station is not received or has changed its
name in the list.
Press the round arrow on the "List" tab of the
"Radio" page.
Some radio stations send other information
in place of their name (the title of the song for
example).
The system interprets these details as the
station name.
18
CITROËN Connect Radio
Media
QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION
Playback of my USB memory stick starts only
after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes).
Some files supplied with the memory stick
may greatly slow down access to reading
the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the
catalogue time).
Delete the files supplied with the memory stick
and limit the number of sub-folders in the file
structure on the memory stick.
Some information characters in the currently
playing media are not displayed correctly.
The audio system does not display some types
of characters.
Use standard characters to name tracks and
folders.
Playback of streaming files does not start. The connected device does not automatically
launch playback.
Start playback from the device.
Names of tracks and playing time are not
displayed on the audio streaming screen.
The Bluetooth profile does not allow the
transfer of this information.
19
.
CITROËN Connect Radio
Telephone
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. The telephone's Bluetooth function may be
switched off or the telephone may not be
visible.
Check that the telephone has Bluetooth
switched on.
Check in the telephone settings that it is
"visible to all".
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with
the system.
It is possible to check the compatibility of the
telephone on the Brand's website (services).
Android Auto and CarPlay do not work. Android Auto and CarPlay may not activate if
the USB cables are of poor quality.
Use authentic USB cables to ensure
compatibility.
The volume of the telephone connected in
Bluetooth mode is inaudible.
The sound depends on both the system and
the telephone.
Increase the volume of the audio system, to
maximum if required, and increase the volume
of the telephone if necessary.
Ambient noise affects the quality of the
telephone call.
Reduce the ambient noise level (close
windows, reduce ventilation, slow down, etc.).
The contacts are not listed in alphabetical
order.
Some telephones offer display options.
Depending on the settings chosen, contacts
can be transferred in a specific order.
Change the telephone directory display
settings.
20
CITROËN Connect Radio
Settings
QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION
When changing the setting of treble and bass,
the ambience is deselected.
When changing the ambience setting, the
treble and bass settings are reset.
The selection of an ambience setting imposes
the settings for treble and bass and vice versa.
Modify the treble and bass or ambience
settings to obtain the desired musical
ambience.
When changing the balance setting,
distribution is deselected.
When changing the distribution setting, the
balance setting is deselected.
The selection of a distribution setting imposes
the balance settings and vice versa.
Modify the balance setting or the distribution
setting to obtain the desired sound quality.
There is a difference in sound quality between
the different audio sources.
To allow for optimal listening quality, the
audio settings can be tailored to different
sound sources, which can generate audible
differences when changing source.
Check that the audio settings are adapted
to the sources listened to. Adjust the audio
functions to the middle position.
When the engine is off, the system switches off
after several minutes of use.
When the engine is switched off, the system's
operating time depends on the state of charge of
the battery.
The switch-off is normal: the system automatically
goes into energy economy mode and switches off
to maintain an adequate charge in the battery.
Start the engine to increase the charge of the
battery.
1
.
CITROËN Connect Nav
CITROËN Connect Nav
GPS navigation –
Applications – Multimedia
audio system – Bluetooth
®
telephone
Contents
First steps 1
Steering mounted controls 2
Menus 3
Voice commands 4
Navigation 12
Connected navigation 14
Applications 17
Radio 20
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 22
Media 22
Telephone 24
Settings 28
Frequently asked questions 30
The various functions and settings
described differ according to the version
and configuration of the vehicle.
For safety reasons and because they
require continued attention on the part of
the driver, the following operations must
be carried out with the vehicle stationary
and the ignition switched off:
- Using a smartphone.
- Pairing a Bluetooth mobile phone to
the hands-free Bluetooth system of the
audio system.
- Smartphone connection operations for
CarPlay
®
, MirrorLink
TM
or Android Auto
(certain applications interrupt their
display when the vehicle starts to move
again).
- Watching a video (the video stops
when the vehicle starts to move again).
- The configuration of profiles.
The system is protected in such a way that
it will only operate in the vehicle.
The display of the message Energy
Economy Mode signals that a change to
standby is imminent.
The link below gives access to the OSS
(Open Source Software) code for the
system.
https://www.groupe-psa.com/fr/oss/
https://www.groupe-psa.com/en/oss/
First steps
With the engine running, a press
mutes the sound.
With the ignition off, a press turns
the system on.
Increase or decrease the volume using
the wheel or the "plus" or "minus" buttons
(depending on the equipment).
Use the menu buttons on either side of or
below the touch screen for access to the
menus, then press the virtual buttons in the
touch screen.
Depending on the model, use the "Source" or
"Menu" buttons to access the rolling menus,
then press the virtual buttons in the touch
screen.
Display the rolling menus at any time by
pressing the screen briefly with three fingers.
All of the touch areas of the screen are white.
Press the back arrow to go back a level.
Press "OK" to confirm.
2
CITROËN Connect Nav
The touch screen is of the "capacitive"
type.
To clean the screen, use a soft, non-
abrasive cloth (e.g. spectacles cloth) with
no additional product.
Do not use sharp objects on the screen.
Do not touch the screen with wet hands.
Certain information is displayed permanently
in the side bars or in the upper bar of the touch
screen (depending on equipment):
- Reminder of the air conditioning information
(depending on version), and direct access to
the corresponding menu.
- Go directly to the selection of the audio
source, to the list of radio stations (or list of
titles depending on the source).
- Go to the "Notifications" of messages,
emails, map updates and, depending on the
services, the navigation notifications.
- Go to the settings for the touch screen and
the digital instrument panel.
Selection of the audio source (depending on
equipment):
- FM/DAB/AM radio stations (depending on
equipment).
- Telephone connected via Bluetooth and
Bluetooth multimedia broadcast (streaming).
- USB memory stick.
- Media player connected via the auxiliary
socket (depending on equipment).
- CD player (depending on equipment).
- Video (depending on equipment).
Using the "Settings" menu, create a profile
for just one person or a group of people
with common interests, with the possibility
of entering a multitude of settings (radio
presets, audio settings, navigation history,
contact favourites, etc.); these settings are
taken into account automatically.
In very hot conditions, the volume may
be limited to protect the system. It may go
into standby (screen and sound off) for at
least 5 minutes.
The return to normal takes place when
the temperature in the passenger
compartment has dropped.
Steering mounted controls
Voice commands:
This control is located on the
steering wheel or at the end of the
lighting control stalk (depending on
equipment).
Short press, system voice
commands.
Long press, smartphone voice
commands via the system.
Increase volume.
3
.
FM 87.5 MHz
CITROËN Connect Nav
Decrease volume.
Mute by pressing the volume
increase and decrease buttons
simultaneously (depending on
equipment).
Restore the sound by pressing one
of the two volume buttons.
Media (short press): change the
multimedia source.
Telephone (short press): start
telephone call.
Call in progress (short press):
access telephone menu.
Telephone (long press): reject an
incoming call, end call; when no call
is in progress, access telephone
menu.
Radio (rotate): automatic search for
the previous/next station.
Media (rotate): previous/next track,
move in a list.
Short press: confirm a selection; if
nothing selected, access to presets.
Applications
Depending on equipment/Depending on
version.
Operate certain applications on
a smartphone connected via
CarPlay
®
, MirrorLink
TM
(available
depending on the country) or
Android Auto.
Check the state of the Bluetooth
®
and Wi-Fi connections.
Menus
Connected navigation
Depending on equipment/Depending on
version.
Enter navigation settings and
choose a destination.
Use services available in real time,
depending on equipment.
Radio: display the list of stations.
Media: display the list of tracks.
Radio (press and hold): update the
list of stations received.
Radio Media
Depending on equipment/Depending on
version.
Select an audio source, a radio station,
display photographs.
4
21,518,5
CITROËN Connect Nav
Telephone
Depending on equipment/Depending on version.
Connect a telephone via Bluetooth
®
,
read messages and emails and send
quick messages.
Settings
Depending on equipment/Depending on version.
Configure a personal profile and/
or configure the sound (balance,
ambience, etc.) and the display
(language, units, date, time, etc.).
Vehicle
Depending on equipment/Depending on version.
Activate, deactivate or configure
certain vehicle functions.
Air conditioning
Depending on equipment/Depending on version.
Manage various temperature and air
flow settings.
Voice commands
Steering mounted controls
Voice commands:
Voice commands can be made from
any screen page after a short press
on the "Voice commands" button
located on the steering wheel or
at the end of the lighting control
stalk (depending on equipment), as
long as there is no telephone call in
progress.
To ensure that voice commands are
always recognised by the system, please
follow these recommendations:
- use natural language in a normal
tone without breaking up words or
raising your voice.
- always wait for the "beep" (audible
signal) before speaking.
- for best operation, it is recommended
that the windows and sunroof
be closed to avoid extraneous
interference (depending on version).
- before making a voice command, ask
other passengers not to speak.
5
.
CITROËN Connect Nav
First steps
Example of a "voice command" for
navigation:
"Navigate to address 11 regent
street, London"
Example of a "voice command" for
the radio and media:
"Play artist Madonna"
Example of a "voice command" for
the telephone:
"Call David Miller' "
The voice commands, with a choice of
17 languages (Arabic, Brazilian, Czech,
Danish, Dutch, English, Farsi, French,
German, Italian, Norwegian, Polish,
Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Swedish,
Turkish), are made using the language
previously chosen and set in the system.
For some voice commands, there are
alternative synonyms.
Example: Guide to/Navigate to/Go to/...
The voice commands in Arabic for:
"Navigate to address" and "Display POI in
the city", are not available.
Information – Using the system
Press the Push To Talk button
and tell me what you'd like
after the tone. Remember you
can interrupt me at any time
by pressing this button. If you
press it again while I'm waiting
for you to speak, it'll end the
conversation. If you need to
start over, say "cancel". If you
want to undo something, say
"undo". And to get information
and tips at any time, just say
"help". If you ask to me do
something and there's some
information missing that I need,
I'll give you some examples
or take you through it step by
step. There's more information
available in "novice" mode.
You can set the dialogue mode
to "expert" when you feel
comfortable.
When the voice commands are
activated by briefly pressing the
button, help is displayed on the
touch screen, offering various
menus and allowing interaction with
the system by voice.
After a menu has been selected, some
commands are proposed.
6
CITROËN Connect Nav
Global voice commands
Voice commands Help messages
There are lots of topics I can help you with. You can say: "help with phone", "help with navigation",
"help with media" or "help with radio". For an overview on how to use voice controls, you can say
"help with voice controls".
Say "yes" if I got that right. Otherwise, say "no" and we'll start that again.
Set dialogue mode as novice – expert
Select user 1/Select profile John
Increase temperature
Decrease temperature
7
.
CITROËN Connect Nav
"Navigation" voice
commands
Voice commands Help messages
Navigate home To plan a route, say "navigate to" followed by the address, the contact name or an intersection. For
example, "navigate to address 11 Regent Street, London", "navigate to contact, John Miller", or
"navigate to intersection of Regent Street, London". You can specify if it's a preferred address, or
a Point of Interest. For example, say "navigate to preferred address, Tennis club", or "navigate to
POI Heathrow Airport in London". Or, you can just say, "navigate home". To see Points of Interest
on a map, you can say things like "show POI hotels in Banbury". For more information say "help
with points of interest" or "help with route guidance".
To choose a destination, say something like "navigate to line three" or "select line two". If you can't
find the destination but the street's right, say for example "select the street in line three". To move
around a displayed list, you can say "next page" or "previous page". You can undo your last action
and start over by saying "undo", or say "cancel" to cancel the current action.
Navigate to work
Navigate to preferred address, Tennis club
Navigate to contact, John Miller
Navigate to address 11 regent street,
London
Tell me the remaining distance You can say "stop" or "resume route guidance". To get information about your current route,
you can say "tell me the remaining time", "remaining distance" or "arrival time". To learn more
commands, try saying "help with navigation".
Tell me the remaining time
Tell me the arrival time
Stop route guidance
8
CITROËN Connect Nav
Show POI hotel at the destination To see points of interest on a map, you can say things like "show hotels in Banbury", "show nearby
parking", "show hotel at the destination" or "show petrol station along the route". If you prefer to
navigate directly to a point of interest, you can say "navigate to nearby petrol station". If you feel
you are not being well understood, try to say the word "POI" in front of the point of interest. For
example say "navigate to POI restaurant at the destination".
To choose a POI, say something like "select line 2". If you've searched for a Point of Interest and
don't see the one you're after, you can filter further by saying something like "select POI in line 2",
or "select the city in line 3". You can also scroll through the list by saying "next page" or "previous
page".
Show nearby POI petrol station
Navigate to POI Heathrow Airport in London
Navigate to POI petrol station along the
route
Depending on the country, give the destination instructions (address) in the language used by the system.
9
.
CITROËN Connect Nav
"Radio Media" voice
commands
Voice commands Help messages
Turn on source radio – Streaming Bluetooth
- …
You can select an audio source by saying "turn on source" followed by the device name. For
example, "turn on source, Streaming Bluetooth", or "turn on source, radio". Use the command
"play" to specify the type of music you'd like to hear. You can choose between "song", "artist", or
"album". Just say something like "play artist, Madonna", "play song, Hey Jude", or "play album,
Thriller".
Tune to channel BBC Radio 2 You can pick a radio station by saying "tune to" and the station name or frequency. For example
"tune to channel Talksport" or "tune to 98.5 FM". To listen to a preset radio station, say for example
"tune to preset number five".
Tune to 98.5 FM
Tune to preset number five
What's playing? To choose what you'd like to play, start by saying "play" and then the item. For example, say "play
song Hey Jude", "play line 3" or "select line 2". You can undo your last action and start over by
saying "undo", or say "cancel" to cancel the current action.
Play song Hey Jude I'm not sure what you'd like to play. Please say "play" and then a song title, an album title, or an
artist name. For example, say "play song Hey Jude", "play artist Madonna" or "play album Thriller".
To select a line number from the display, say "select line two". To move around a displayed list,
you can say "next page" or "previous page". You can undo your last action and start over by saying
"undo", or say "cancel" to cancel the current action.
Play artist Madonna
Play album Thriller
Media voice commands are available only for a USB connection.
10
CITROËN Connect Nav
"Telephone" voice
commands
If there is no telephone connected via
Bluetooth, a voice message announces:
"Please first connect a telephone" and the
voice session will be closed.
Voice commands Help messages
Call David Miller* To make a phone call, say "call" followed by
the contact name, for example: "Call David
Miller". You can also include the phone type,
for example: "Call David Miller at home". To
make a call by number, say "dial" followed by
the phone number, for example, "Dial 07776
835 417". You can check your voicemail by
saying "call voicemail". To send a text, say
"send quick message to", followed by the
contact, and then the name of the quick
message you'd like to send. For example,
"send quick message to David Miller, I'll be
late". To display the list of calls, say "display
calls". For more information on SMS, you can
say "help with texting".
To choose a contact, say something like
"select line three". To move around the list
say "next page" or "previous page". You can
undo your last action and start over by saying
"undo", or say "cancel" to cancel the current
action.
Call voicemail*
Display calls*
* This function is available only if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of
contacts and recent calls and if the download has been done.
11
.
CITROËN Connect Nav
"Text message" voice
commands
If there is no telephone connected via
Bluetooth, a voice message announces:
"Please first connect a telephone" and the
voice session will be closed.
The "Text messages" voice commands
function allows you to dictate and send
an SMS.
Dictate the text, taking care to make
a short pause between each word.
At the end of the operation, the voice
recognition system will automatically
create an SMS.
Voice commands Help messages
Send quick message to Bill Carter, I'll be
late
From the list of quick messages, say the
name of the one you'd like to send. To move
around the list you can say "go to start", "go to
end", "next page" or "previous page". You can
undo your last action and start over by saying
"undo", or say "cancel" to cancel the current
action.
Send SMS to John Miller, I'm just arriving Please say "call" or "send quick message to",
and then select a line from the list. To move
around a list shown on the display, you can
say "go to start", "go to end", "next page"
or "previous page". You can undo your last
action and start over by saying "undo", or say
"cancel" to cancel the current action.
Send SMS to David Miller at the office,
don't wait for me
Listen to most recent message* To hear your last message, you can say
"listen to most recent message". When you
want to send a text, there's a set of quick
messages ready for you to use. Just use the
quick message name and say something like
"send quick message to Bill Carter, I'll be late".
Check the phone menu for the names of the
supported messages.
The system only sends pre-recorded
"Quick messages".
* This function is available only if the
telephone connected to the system supports
downloading of contacts and recent calls
and if the download has been done.
12
CITROËN Connect Nav
Select "My destinations".
Select the "Recent" tab.
Select the address chosen in the list to display
the "Guidance criteria".
Press "OK" to start navigation.
Select "Position" to visualise the arrival
point geographically.
To "My home" or "My work"
Press Navigation to display the
primary page.
Press the "MENU" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "My destinations".
Select the "Preferred" tab.
Select "My home".
Or
Select "My work".
Or
Select a preset favourite destination.
To a contact
Press Navigation to display the
primary page.
Press the "MENU" button to go to the
secondary page.
Navigation
Choice of a destination
To a new destination
Press Navigation to display the
primary page.
Press the "MENU" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Enter address".
Select the "Country".
Enter the "City", the "Street" and the
"Number" and confirm by pressing
on the suggestions displayed.
Press "OK" to select the "Guidance
criteria".
And/or
Select "See on map" to select the
"Guidance criteria".
Press "OK" to start navigation.
Zoom out/in using the touch buttons or
with two fingers on the screen.
In order to be able to use the navigation,
it is necessary to fill in the "City", the
"Street" and the "Number" on the
virtual keyboard or take it from the
list in "Contact" or in the "History" of
addresses.
Without confirmation of the house number,
the navigation system will show one of the
ends of the street.
To a recent destination
Press Navigation to display the
primary page.
Press the "MENU" button to go to the
secondary page.
13
.
CITROËN Connect Nav
Select "My destinations".
Select the "Contact" tab.
Select a contact in the list to start navigation.
To points of interest (POI)
Points of interest (POI) are listed in different
categories.
Press Navigation to display the
primary page.
Press the "MENU" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Points of interest".
Select the "Travel", or "Leisure"
or "Commercial" or "Public" or
"Geographic" tab.
Or
Select "Search" to enter the name
and address of a POI.
Press "OK" to start calculation of
the route.
To a point on the map
Press Navigation to display the
primary page.
Explore the map by sliding a finger on the
screen.
Select the destination by pressing on the map.
Tap the screen to place a marker
and display the sub-menu.
Press this button to start navigation.
Or
Press this button to save the
address displayed.
A long press on an item opens a list of
POIs nearby.
To GPS coordinates
Press Navigation to display the
primary page.
Explore the map by sliding a finger on the
screen.
Touch the screen with a finger to go to the next
image.
Press this button to display the world
map.
Using the grid, select the desired
country or region by zooming.
Press this button to display or enter
the GPS coordinates.
A marker is displayed in the middle
of the screen, with the "Latitude"
and "Longitude" coordinates.
Choose the type of coordinates:
DMS for: Degrees, Minutes, Seconds.
DD for: Degrees, Decimals.
Press this button to start navigation.
Or
Press this button to save the
address displayed.
OR
Press this button to enter the value
for "Latitude" using the virtual
keypad.
14
CITROËN Connect Nav
And
Press this button to enter the value
for "Longitude" using the virtual
keypad.
TMC (Traffic Message
Channel)
TMC (Traffic Message Channel)
messages are linked to a European
standard on the broadcasting of traffic
information via the RDS system on FM
radio, transmitting traffic information in
real time.
The TMC information is then displayed
on a GPS Navigation system map and
taken into account straight away during
navigation, so as to avoid accidents, traffic
jams and closed roads.
The display of danger zones depends on
the legislation in force and subscription to
the service.
Connected navigation
Depending on version
Depending on the equipment level of the
vehicle
Network connection provided by
the vehicle
OR
Network connection provided by
the user
For the list of eligible smartphones, go to
the Brand's national website.
Connected navigation
connection
Network connection provided by
the vehicle
The system is automatically
connected to the internet, to the
connected services, and does not
require a connection provided by the
user via their smartphone.
Network connection provided by
the user
Connect a USB cable.
The smartphone charges when
connected by the USB cable.
USB connection
Activate the Bluetooth function on
the telephone and ensure that it is
visible to all (see the "Applications"
section).
Bluetooth connection
This function is only available if it has been
activated either via the "Notifications" or
via the "Applications" menu.
Press "Notifications".
Select Wi-Fi to activate it.
Activate and enter settings for sharing
the smartphone connection.
Wi-Fi connection
Select a Wi-Fi network found by the
system and connect.
15
.
CITROËN Connect Nav
OR
Press Applications to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Wi-Fi network
connection".
Select the "Secured" or "Not
secured" or "Stored" tab.
Select a network.
Using the virtual keypad, enter the
"Key" for the Wi-Fi network and the
"Password".
The services offered with connected
navigation are as follows.
A Connected Services pack:
- Weather,
- Filling stations,
- Car park,
- Traffic,
- POI local search.
A Danger zone pack (as an option).
Settings specific to
connected navigation
Press the "MENU" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Settings".
Select "Map".
Press "OK" to start the connection.
Usage restrictions:
- With CarPlay
®
, connection sharing is
only with a Wi-Fi connection.
- With MirrorLink
TM
, connection sharing
is only with a USB connection.
The quality of services depends on the
quality of the network connection.
With the arrival of "TOMTOM
TRAFFIC", the services will be
available.
Processes and standards are constantly
changing; for the communication process
between the smartphone and the system
to work correctly, it is recommended to
update the operating system of the
smartphone as well as the date and
time of the smartphone and of the
system.
Press Navigation to display the
primary page.
Activate or deactivate:
- "Allow declaration of danger
zones".
- "Guidance to final destination
on foot"
- "Display recommended
speed"
These settings must be made
according to each profile.
Select "Alerts".
Activate or deactivate:
- "Advise of car park nearby",
"Filling station alert", "Risk
areas alert", "Accident black
spot alert" then select the
alert symbol, "Give an audible
warning", "Advise proximity
of POI 1", "Advise proximity of
POI 2".
To have access to connected navigation,
select the option: "Authorise sending
information" in "Settings".
16
CITROËN Connect Nav
Notification of "Danger
zones"
To issue notification of danger zones,
select the option: "Allow notification of
danger zones".
Press Navigation to display the
primary page.
Press the "Report a new danger
zone" button located in the side bars
or the upper bar of the touch screen
(depending on equipment).
Select the option "Type" to choose
the type of "Danger zone".
Select the "Speed" option and enter
it using the virtual keypad.
Press "OK" to save and distribute
the information.
Authorising sending
information
Press Settings to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "System settings".
Select the "Privacy mode" tab.
Activate or deactivate:
- "No sharing (data, vehicle
position)".
- "Data sharing only"
- "Sharing data and the vehicle
position"
"Danger zones" pack
updates
Press Settings to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "System settings".
Select the "System info" tab.
Select "View" to display the versions
of the different modules installed in
the system.
Select "Update(s) due".
It is possible to download system and map
updates from the Brand's website.
The update procedure is also available
there.
After the updates have downloaded,
installation on the vehicle must be done with
the engine running and vehicle stationary.
Displaying the weather
Press Navigation to display the
primary page.
Press this button to display the list of
services.
Select "View map".
It is possible to access the "Notifications"
at any time in the upper bar.
The display of danger zones depends on
the legislation in force and subscription to
the service.
17
.
CITROËN Connect Nav
Select "Weather".
Press this button to display primary
information.
Press this button to display the
detailed weather information.
The temperature displayed at 6 a.m. will
be the maximum temperature for the day.
The temperature displayed at 6 p.m. will
be the minimum temperature for the night.
Applications
Connectivity
Press Applications to display the
primary page.
Press "Connectivity" to go to the CarPlay
®
,
MirrorLink
TM
or Android Auto functions.
CarPlay
®
smartphone
connection
USB sockets
Depending on equipment, for more information
on the USB sockets compatible with the
CarPlay
®
, MirrorLink
TM
or Android Auto
applications, refer to the "Ease of use and
comfort" section.
The synchronisation of a smartphone
allows users to display applications
adapted to the CarPlay
®
, MirrorLink
TM
or Android Auto technology of the
smartphone on the vehicle screen. For
the CarPlay
®
technology, the CarPlay
®
function must be activated on the
smartphone beforehand.
For the communication process between
the smartphone and the system to
work, it is essential in all cases that the
smartphone is unlocked.
As the principles and standards are
constantly changing, it is recommended
that you keep the smartphone's
operating system up-to-date, as well
as the date and time of the smartphone
and of the system.
For the list of eligible smartphones, go to
the Brand's national website.
Connect a USB cable. The
smartphone charges when
connected by the USB cable.
Press "Telephone" to display the
CarPlay
®
interface.
Or
Connect a USB cable. The
smartphone charges when
connected by the USB cable.
From the system, press
"Applications" to display the
primary page.
Press "Connectivity" to go to the CarPlay
®
function.
Press "CarPlay" to display the
CarPlay
®
interface.
On connecting the USB cable, the
CarPlay
®
function deactivates the
system's Bluetooth
®
mode.
When the USB cable is disconnected and
the ignition is switched off then back on,
the system will not automatically switch to
Radio Media mode, a change of source
will have to be done manually.
18
CITROËN Connect Nav
MirrorLink
TM
smartphone
connection
The "MirrorLink
TM
" function requires
the use of a compatible smartphone and
compatible applications.
From the system, press
"Applications" to display the
primary page.
Press "Connectivity" to go to the MirrorLink
TM
function.
Press "MirrorLink
TM
" to start the
application in the system.
Depending on the smartphone, it may be
necessary to activate the "MirrorLink
TM
" function.
During the procedure, several
screen pages relating to certain
functions are displayed.
Accept to start and complete the
connection.
Once the connection is established, a page
is displayed with the applications already
downloaded to the smartphone and compatible
with the MirrorLink
TM
technology.
Access to the different audio sources remains
available in the margin of the MirrorLink
TM
display, using the touch buttons located in the
upper bar.
Access to the menus for the system is possible
at any time using the dedicated buttons.
There may be a wait for the availability of
applications, depending on the quality of
the network.
Android Auto smartphone
connection
The "Android Auto" function requires
the use of a compatible smartphone and
applications.
During the procedure, several
screen pages relating to certain
functions are displayed.
Accept to start and complete the
connection.
Different audio sources remain accessible in
the margin of the Android Auto display, using
touch buttons in the upper bar.
Access to the menus for the system is possible
at any time using the dedicated buttons.
In Android Auto mode, the function to
display the menus by pressing the screen
briefly with three fingers is deactivated.
There may be a wait for the availability of
applications, depending on the quality of
the network.
When connecting a smartphone
to the system, it is recommended
that Bluetooth
®
be started on the
smartphone.
Connect a USB cable. The
smartphone charges when
connected by the USB cable.
Connect a USB cable. The
smartphone charges when
connected by the USB cable.
Vehicle apps
Press Applications to display the
primary page.
Press "Vehicle apps" to display the
applications home page.
From the system, press
"Applications" to display the
primary page.
Press "Connectivity" to go to the "Android
Auto" function.
Press "Android Auto" to start the
application in the system.
19
.
CITROËN Connect Nav
Internet browser
Press Applications to display the
primary page.
Press "Connectivity" to go to the "Internet
browser" function.
Press "Internet browser" to display the
browser home page.
Select the country of residence.
Press "OK" to save and start the
browser.
Connection to the internet is via one of
the network connections provided by the
vehicle or the user.
Bluetooth connection
®
Activate the Bluetooth function on the
telephone and ensure that it is "visible to
all" (telephone configuration).
Procedure from the telephone
Select the system name in the list of
devices detected.
In the system, accept the connection request
from the telephone.
To complete the pairing, whichever
procedure used (from the telephone or
from the system), ensure that the code
is the same in the system and in the
telephone.
Procedure from the system
Press Applications to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Press "Bluetooth connection".
Select "Search".
The list of telephones detected is
displayed.
If the pairing procedure fails, it is recommended
that you deactivate and then reactivate the
Bluetooth function on the telephone.
Select the name of the chosen
telephone in the list.
Depending on the type of telephone, the
option is given to accept or not accept the
transfer of contacts and messages.
Connection sharing
The system offers to connect the telephone
with 3 profiles:
- "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone
only),
- "Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of
the audio files on the telephone),
- "Mobile internet data".
The "Mobile internet data" profile
must be activated for connected
navigation (where the vehicle does not
have "Emergency and assistance call"
services), having first activated sharing of
this connection on the smartphone.
Select one or more profiles.
Press "OK" to confirm.
Wi-Fi connection
Network connection by the smartphone's Wi-Fi.
Press Applications to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
20
CITROËN Connect Nav
Select "Wi-Fi network
connection".
Select the "Secured" or "Not
secured" or "Stored" tab.
Select a network.
Using the virtual keypad, enter the
"Key" for the Wi-Fi network and the
"Password".
Press "OK" to start the connection.
The Wi-Fi connection and the sharing of
the Wi-Fi connection are exclusive.
Wi-Fi connection sharing
Creation of a local Wi-Fi network by the
system.
Press Applications to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Wi-Fi connection sharing".
Select the "Activation" tab to activate or
deactivate sharing of the Wi-Fi connection.
And/or
Select the "Settings" tab to change the name
of the system network and the password.
Press "OK" to confirm.
To protect against unauthorised access
and to make the set of systems as secure
as possible, the use of a security code or
a complex password is recommended.
Managing connections
Press Applications to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Manage connection".
With this function, you can view the access
to connected services, the availability of
connected services and modify the connection
mode.
Radio
Selecting a station
Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press "Frequency".
Press one of the buttons for an
automatic search for radio stations.
Or
Move the slider for a manual search
for frequencies up or down.
Or
Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Radio stations" in the
secondary page.
Press "Frequency".
Enter the values using the virtual
keypad.
First enter the units then click on the
decimals zone to enter the figures
after the decimal point.
21
.
CITROËN Connect Nav
Press "OK" to confirm.
Radio reception may be affected by the
use of electrical equipment not approved
by the Brand, such as a USB charger
connected to the 12 V socket.
The exterior environment (hills, buildings,
tunnels, basement car parks, etc.)
may block reception, including in RDS
mode. This behaviour is normal in the
propagation of radio waves and does not
indicate any failure of the audio system.
Presetting a station
Select a radio station or frequency.
(refer to the corresponding section)
Press "Presets".
Make a long press on one of the
buttons to preset the station.
Changing waveband
Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
To change the waveband, press "Band…"
displayed at the top right of the screen.
Activating/Deactivating RDS
Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Radio settings".
Select "General".
Activate/deactivate "Station
tracking".
Press "OK" to confirm.
RDS, if activated, allows you to continue
listening to the same station by automatic
retuning to alternative frequencies. However,
in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS
station may not be assured throughout the
entire country as radio stations do not cover
100% of the territory. This explains the loss
of reception of the station during a journey.
Displaying text information
The "Radio Text" function allows
information transmitted by the radio
station and related to the station or the
song playing to be displayed.
Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Radio settings".
Select "General".
Activate/deactivate "Display radio
text".
Press "OK" to confirm.
Playing TA messages
The TA (Traffic Announcement) function
gives priority to TA alert messages.
To operate, this function needs good
reception of a radio station that carries
this type of message. While traffic
information is being broadcast, the current
media is automatically interrupted so that
the TA message can be heard. Normal
play of the media previously playing is
resumed at the end of the message.
Select "Announcements".
Activate/Deactivate "Traffic
announcement".
Press "OK" to confirm.
22
CITROËN Connect Nav
DAB (Digital Audio
Broadcasting) radio
Terrestrial Digital Radio
Digital radio provides higher quality sound.
The different "multiplexes/ensembles"
offer a choice of radio stations arranged in
alphabetical order.
Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press "Band…" at the top right of the screen to
display the "DAB" waveband.
DAB-FM tracking
"DAB" does not cover 100% of the
territory.
When the digital radio signal is poor,
"DAB-FM auto tracking" allows you to
continue listening to the same station,
by automatically switching to the
corresponding FM analogue station (if
there is one).
Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Radio settings".
Select "General".
Activate/deactivate "FM-DAB
tracking".
Activate/deactivate "Station
tracking".
Press "OK".
If "DAB-FM auto tracking" is activated,
there may be a difference of a few
seconds when the system switches to
"FM" analogue radio with sometimes
a variation in volume.
Once the digital signal quality is restored,
the system automatically changes back
to "DAB".
If the "DAB" station being listened to is not
available on FM ("DAB-FM" option greyed
out), or "DAB-FM auto tracking" is not
activated, the sound will cut out while the
digital signal is too weak.
Media
USB socket
Insert the USB memory stick in the USB socket
or connect the USB device to the USB socket
using a suitable cable (not supplied).
To protect the system, do not use a USB
hub.
The system builds playlists (in temporary
memory), an operation which can take from
a few seconds to several minutes at the first
connection.
Reduce the number of non-music files and the
number of folders to reduce the waiting time.
The playlists are updated every time the
ignition is switched off or a USB stick is
connected. The lists are memorised: if they are
not modified, the subsequent loading time will
be shorter.
23
.
CITROËN Connect Nav
Auxiliary socket (AUX)
Depending on equipment
This source is only available if "Auxiliary input"
has been checked in the audio settings.
Connect a portable device (MP3 player, etc.) to
the auxiliary Jack socket using an audio cable
(not supplied).
First adjust the volume on the portable device
(to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the
audio system.
Management of the controls is via the portable
device.
CD player
Depending on equipment
Insert the CD in the player.
Selecting the source
Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Select "Source".
Choose the source.
Watching a video
Insert a USB memory stick in the USB socket.
Select "Sources".
Select Video to start the video.
To remove the USB memory stick,
press the pause button to stop the
video, then remove the memory
stick.
Bluetooth
®
audio streaming
Streaming allows you to listen to music from
your smartphone.
The Bluetooth profile must be activated; first
adjust the volume on the portable device (to
a high level).
Then adjust the volume of the audio system.
If play does not start automatically, it may be
necessary to start the audio playback from the
telephone.
Control is from the portable device or by using
the system's touch buttons.
Once connected in streaming mode, the
telephone is considered to be a media
source.
Connecting Apple
®
players
Connect the Apple
®
player to the USB socket
using a suitable cable (not supplied).
Play starts automatically.
Control is via the audio system.
The classifications available are those of
the portable device connected (artists/
albums/genres/playlists/audio books/
podcasts).
The default classification used is by artist.
To modify the classification used, return
to the first level of the menu then select
the desired classification (playlists for
example) and confirm to go down through
the menu to the desired track.
The version of software in the audio system
may not be compatible with the generation of
the Apple
®
player.
Video control commands are accessible
only through the touch screen.
Press Radio Media to display the
primary page.
24
CITROËN Connect Nav
Information and advice
The system supports USB mass storage
devices, BlackBerry
®
devices or Apple
®
players via the USB sockets. The adapter
cable is not supplied.
Device management is via the audio
system controls.
Other devices, not recognised on
connection, must be connected to the
auxiliary socket using a Jack cable (not
supplied) or via Bluetooth streaming,
depending on compatibility.
To protect the system, do not use a USB
hub.
The audio system will only play audio files
with ".wma", ".aac", ".flac", ".ogg" and ".mp3"
file extensions and with a bit rate of between
32 Kbps and 320 Kbps.
It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read.
Files of the ".wma" type should be to the wma
9 standard.
The sampling rates supported are 32, 44 and
48 kHz.
It is recommended that file names are less
than 20 characters long and do not contain any
special characters (e.g. " ? . ; ù) so as to avoid
any reading or display problems.
Use only USB memory sticks in FAT32 format
(File Allocation Table).
It is recommended that the original USB
cable for the portable device be used.
CD player (depending on equipment).
In order to be able to play a burned CDR or
CDRW, select standards ISO 9660 level 1, 2, or
Joliet, if possible, when burning the CD.
If the disc is burned in another format, it may
not be played correctly.
It is recommended that the same burning
standard be always used on an individual disc,
with the lowest speed possible (4x maximum)
for the best acoustic quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the
Joliet standard is recommended.
Telephone
Pairing a Bluetooth
®
telephone
Activate the Bluetooth function on the
telephone and ensure that it is "visible to
all" (telephone configuration).
Procedure from the telephone
Select the system name in the list of
devices detected.
In the system, accept the connection request
from the telephone.
To complete the pairing, whichever
procedure used (from the telephone or
from the system), ensure that the code
is the same in the system and in the
telephone.
Procedure from the system
Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
Press "Bluetooth search".
Or
25
.
CITROËN Connect Nav
Select "Search".
The list of telephones detected is
displayed.
If the pairing procedure fails, it is recommended
that you deactivate and then reactivate the
Bluetooth function on the telephone.
Select the name of the chosen
telephone in the list.
Connection sharing
The system offers to connect the telephone
with 3 profiles:
- "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone
only),
- "Audio streaming" (streaming: wireless
playing of the audio files on the telephone),
- "Mobile internet data".
Activation of the "Mobile internet
data" profile is obligatory for connected
navigation having first activated sharing of
this connection on the smartphone.
Select one or more profiles.
Press "OK" to confirm.
Depending on the type of telephone, the
option is given to accept or not accept the
transfer of contacts and messages.
Automatic reconnection
On return to the vehicle, if the last
telephone connected is present again, it is
automatically recognised and within about
30 seconds of switching on the ignition,
the pairing is established automatically
(Bluetooth activated).
To modify the connection profile:
Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Bluetooth connection" to
display the list of paired devices.
Press the "details" button.
Select one or more profiles.
Press "OK" to confirm.
The ability of the system to connect to just
one profile depends on the telephone.
All three profiles may connect by default.
The services available depend on
the network, the SIM card and the
compatibility of the Bluetooth devices
used. Check the user guide for the
telephone and with the service provider
for the available services.
The profiles compatible with the system
are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP,
MAP and PAN.
Go to the Brand's website for more information
(compatibility, additional help, etc.).
Managing paired telephones
This function allows the connection or
disconnection of a device as well as the
deletion of a pairing.
Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
26
CITROËN Connect Nav
Select "Bluetooth connection" to
display the list of paired devices.
Press on the name of the telephone
chosen in the list to disconnect it.
Press again to connect it.
Deleting a telephone
Select the basket at top right of the
screen to display a basket alongside
the telephone chosen.
Press the basket alongside the
telephone chosen to delete it.
Receiving a call
An incoming call is announced by a ring and
a superimposed display in the screen.
Make a short press on the steering
mounted telephone button to accept
an incoming call.
And
Make a long press
on the steering mounted telephone
button to reject the call.
Or
Select "End call" on the touch
screen.
Making a call
Using the telephone is not recommended
while driving.
Park the vehicle.
Make the call using the steering mounted
controls.
Calling a new number
Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
Enter the phone number using the
digital keypad.
Press "Call" to start the call.
Calling a contact
Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
Or make a long press
on the steering mounted telephone
button.
Select "Contact".
Select the desired contact from the list offered.
Select "Call".
Calling a recently used
number
Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
Or
Make a long press
on the steering mounted telephone
button.
Select "Calls".
Select the desired contact from the list offered.
It is always possible to make a call directly
from the telephone; as a safety measure,
first park the vehicle.
27
.
CITROËN Connect Nav
Managing contacts/entries
Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
Select "Contact".
Select "Create" to add a new
contact.
In the "Telephone" tab, enter the telephone
numbers for the contact.
In the "Address" tab, enter the addresses for
the contact.
In the "Email" tab, enter the email addresses
for the contact.
The "Email" function allows email
addresses to be entered for a contact, but
the system is not able to send emails.
Managing messages
Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Messages" to display the list
of messages.
Select the "All" or "Received" or
"Sent" tab.
Select the detail of the message
chosen in one of the lists.
Press "Answer" to send a quick
message stored in the system.
Press "Call" to start the call.
Press "Play" to hear the message.
Access to "Messages" depends on the
compatibility of the smartphone and the
integral system.
Depending on the smartphone, access to
messages or email may be slow.
The services available depend on
the network, the SIM card and the
compatibility of the Bluetooth devices
used.
Check the user guide for the smartphone
and with the service provider for the
available services.
Managing quick messages
Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Quick messages" to display
the list of messages.
Select the "Delayed" or "My arrival"
or "Not available" or "Other" tab
with the possibility of creating new
messages.
Press "Create" to write a new
message.
Select the message chosen in one
of the lists.
Press "Transfer" to select the
addressee(s).
Press "Play" to start playing the
message.
Managing email
Press Telephone to display the
primary page.
28
CITROËN Connect Nav
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Email" to display the list of
messages.
Select the "Received" or "Sent" or
"Not read" tab.
Select the message chosen in one of the lists.
Settings
Audio settings
Press Settings to display the
primary page.
Select "Audio settings".
Select "Ambiences".
Or
"Position".
Or
"Sound".
Or
"Voice".
Or
"Ringtone".
Press "OK" to save the settings.
The balance/distribution (or spatialisation
with the Arkamys
©
system) is audio
processing that allows the quality of the
sound to be adapted according to the
number of passengers in the vehicle.
Available only with the front and rear
speakers configuration.
The Ambience (6 optional ambiences)
and Bass, Medium and Treble audio
settings are different and independent for
each audio source.
Activate or deactivate "Loudness".
The settings for "Position" (All
passengers, Driver and Front only) are
common to all sources.
Activate or deactivate "Touch tones",
"Volume linked to speed" and "Auxiliary
input".
On-board audio: the Arkamys Sound
Staging
©
optimises the distribution of
sound in the passenger compartment.
Setting the profiles
Press Settings to display the
primary page.
Press "Play" to start playing the
message.
Access to "Email" depends on the
compatibility of the smartphone and the
integral system.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Setting of the profiles".
Select "Profile 1" or "Profile 2" or "Profile 3"
or "Common profile".
Press this button to enter a name for
the profile using the virtual keypad.
Press "OK" to confirm.
Press this button to add
a photograph to the profile.
Insert a USB memory stick containing
the photograph in the USB socket.
Select the photograph.
Press "OK" to accept the transfer of
the photograph.
Press "OK" again to save the
settings.
29
.
CITROËN Connect Nav
The location for the photograph is
square; the system reshapes the original
photograph if in another format.
Press this button to reinitialise the
profile selected.
Reinitialisation of the profile selected
activates the English language by default.
Select "Audio settings".
Select "Ambiences".
Or
"Position".
Or
"Sound".
Or
"Voice".
Or
"Ringtone".
Press "OK" to save the settings.
Select a "Profile" (1 or 2 or 3) to associate the
"Audio settings" with it.
Modifying system settings
Press Settings to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Screen configuration".
Select "Animation".
Activate or deactivate: "Automatic
text scrolling".
Select "Brightness".
Move the slider to adjust the
brightness of the screen and/or of
the instrument panel.
Press Settings to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "System settings".
Select "Units" to change the units of distance,
fuel consumption and temperature.
Select "Factory settings" to return to the initial
settings.
Resetting the system to "Factory settings"
activates English by default, as well as
degrees Fahrenheit, and turns off summer
time.
Select "System info" to display the versions of
the different modules installed in the system.
Selecting the language
Press Settings to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Languages" to change the
language.
Setting the date
Press Settings to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Set time-date".
30
CITROËN Connect Nav
Select "Date".
Press this button to define the date.
Press "OK" to confirm.
Select the display format of the date.
Adjustment of the time and date is only
available if "GPS synchronisation" is
deactivated.
Setting the time
Press Settings to display the
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select "Set time-date".
Select "Time".
Press this button to adjust the time
using the virtual keypad.
Press "OK" to confirm.
Press this button to define the time
zone.
Select the display format for the time
(12h/24h).
Activate or deactivate summer time
(+1 hour).
Activate or deactivate
synchronisation with GPS (UTC).
Press "OK" to confirm.
The system does not automatically manage
the change between winter and summer
time (depending on the country of sale).
Colour schemes
Depending on equipment/Depending on version.
As a safety measure, the procedure
for changing the colour scheme is only
possible when the vehicle is stationary.
Press Settings to display the
primary page.
Select "Colour schemes".
Select a colour scheme in the list
then press "OK" to confirm.
Every time the colour scheme is changed,
the system restarts, temporarily displaying
a black screen.
Frequently asked questions
The following information groups together the
answers to the most frequently asked questions
concerning the system.
31
.
CITROËN Connect Nav
Navigation
QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION
The route calculation is not successful. The guidance criteria may be in conflict with
the current location (exclusion of toll roads on
a toll road).
Check the route settings in the "Navigation"
menu.
The POIs do not appear. The POIs have not been selected. Select the POIs in the list of POIs.
The audible warning of "Danger zones" does
not work.
The audible warning is not active or the volume
is too low.
Activate the audible warning in the "Navigation"
menu and check the voice volume in the audio
settings.
The system does not suggest a detour around
an incident on the route.
The guidance criteria do not take account of
TMC messages.
Select setting for the "Traffic info " function in
the list of route settings (Without, Manual or
Automatic).
I receive a "Danger zone" alert which is not on
my route.
Other than navigation instructions, the system
announces all "Danger zones" positioned in
a cone located in front of the vehicle. It may
provide an alert for "Danger zones" located on
nearby or parallel roads.
Zoom in on the map to see the exact position
of the "Danger zone". Select "On the route" to
no longer receive alerts other than navigation
instructions or to reduce the time for the
announcement.
Certain traffic jams along the route are not
indicated in real time.
On starting, it is several minutes before the
system begins to receive the traffic information.
Wait until the traffic information is being
received correctly (display of the traffic
information icons on the map).
In certain countries, only major routes
(motorways, etc.) are listed for the traffic
information.
This is perfectly normal. The system is
dependent on the traffic information available.
32
CITROËN Connect Nav
Radio
QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION
The reception quality of the tuned radio station
gradually deteriorates or the stored stations are
not working (no sound, 87.5 MHz is displayed,
etc.).
The vehicle is too far from the transmitter of
the station or no transmitter is present in the
geographical area.
Activate the "RDS" function by means of the
short-cut menu to enable the system to check
whether there is a more powerful transmitter in
the geographical area.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels,
basement car parks, etc.) blocks reception,
including in RDS mode.
This phenomenon is normal and does not
indicate a failure of the audio equipment.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for
example when going through a car wash or into
an underground car park).
Have the aerial checked by a dealer.
The altitude is not displayed. On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may
take up to 3 minutes to receive more than
4 satellites correctly.
Wait until the system has started up completely
so that there is GPS coverage by at least
4 satellites.
Depending on the geographical environment
(tunnel, etc.) or the weather, the conditions of
reception of the GPS signal may vary.
This behaviour is normal. The system is
dependent on the GPS signal reception
conditions.
My navigation is no longer connected. During start-up and in certain geographical
areas, the connection may be unavailable.
Check that the connected services are
activated (settings, contract).
33
.
CITROËN Connect Nav
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
Playback of my USB memory stick starts only
after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes).
Some files supplied with the memory stick
may greatly slow down access to reading
the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the
cataloguing time).
Delete the files supplied with the memory stick
and limit the number of sub-folders in the file
structure on the memory stick.
The CD is ejected every time or is not played. The CD is upside down, cannot be read, does
not contain audio files or contains audio files of
a format not recognised by the audio system.
The CD has been recorded in a format that is
not compatible with the player (udf, etc.).
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating system
not recognised by the audio system.
Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
right way up.
Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot be
played if it is too badly damaged.
Check the content if it is a burned CD: consult the
advice in the "AUDIO" section.
The audio system CD player does not play DVDs.
Due to poor quality, certain burned CDs will not
be played by the audio system.
Media
I cannot find some radio stations in the list of
stations received.
The name of the radio station changes.
The station is not received or has changed its
name in the list.
Some radio stations send other information
in place of their name (the title of the song for
example).
The system interprets these details as the
station name.
Press on the "Update list" button in the "Radio
stations" secondary menu.
34
CITROËN Connect Nav
There is a long waiting period following the
insertion of a CD or connection of a USB
memory stick.
Upon insertion of a new external media,
the system reads a certain amount of data
(directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take from
a few seconds to a few minutes.
This is perfectly normal.
The CD sound is of poor quality. The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in
suitable conditions.
The audio settings (bass, treble, ambience) are
unsuitable.
Return bass and treble settings to 0, without
selecting an ambience.
Some information characters in the currently
playing media are not displayed correctly.
The audio system does not display some types
of characters.
Use standard characters to name tracks and
folders.
Playback of streaming files does not start. The connected device does not automatically
launch playback.
Start playback from the device.
Names of tracks and playing time are not
displayed on the audio streaming screen.
The Bluetooth profile does not allow the
transfer of this information.
35
.
CITROËN Connect Nav
Telephone
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. The telephone's Bluetooth function may be
switched off or the telephone may not be
visible.
Check that the telephone has Bluetooth
switched on.
Check in the telephone settings that it is
"visible to all".
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with
the system.
It is possible to check the compatibility of the
telephone on the Brand's website (services).
The sound from the telephone connected in
Bluetooth mode is inaudible.
The sound depends on both the system and
the telephone.
Increase the volume of the audio system, to
maximum if required, and increase the volume
of the telephone if necessary.
Ambient noise affects the quality of the
telephone call.
Reduce the ambient noise level (close
windows, reduce ventilation, slow down, etc.).
Some contacts are duplicated in the list. The options for synchronising contacts are:
synchronise the contacts on the SIM card, the
contacts on the telephone, or both. When both
synchronisations are selected, some contacts
may be duplicated.
Select "Display SIM card contacts" or "Display
telephone contacts".
The contacts are not listed in alphabetical
order.
Some telephones offer display options.
Depending on the settings chosen, contacts
can be transferred in a specific order.
Change the telephone directory display
settings.
The system does not receive SMS. The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending
SMS text messages to the system.
36
CITROËN Connect Nav
Settings
QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION
When changing the setting of treble and bass,
the ambience setting is deselected.
When changing the ambience setting, the
treble and bass settings are reset.
The selection of an ambience setting imposes
the settings for treble and bass and vice versa.
Modify the treble and bass or ambience
settings to obtain the desired musical
ambience.
When changing the balance setting,
distribution is deselected.
When changing the distribution setting, the
balance setting is deselected.
The selection of a distribution setting imposes
the balance settings and vice versa.
Modify the balance setting or the distribution
setting to obtain the desired sound quality.
There is a difference in sound quality between
the different audio sources.
To allow for optimal listening quality, the
audio settings can be tailored to different
sound sources, which can generate audible
differences when changing source.
Check that the audio settings are adapted to
the sources listened to. It is recommended that
the audio settings (Bass:, Treble:, Balance:)
be adjusted to the middle position, select the
"None" musical ambience and set the loudness
correction to the "Active" position in CD mode
or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.
When the engine is off, the system switches off
after several minutes of use.
When the engine is switched off, the system's
operating time depends on the state of charge of
the battery.
The switch-off is normal: the system automatically
goes into energy economy mode and switches off
to maintain an adequate charge in the battery.
Start then vehicle's engine to increase the
charge of the battery.
The date and time cannot be set. Setting of the date and time is only available
if the synchronisation with the satellites is
deactivated.
Settings menu/Options/Time-Date setting.
Select the "Time" tab and deactivate the "GPS
synchronisation" (UTC).
225
.
Alphabetical index
A
Accessories ....................................................89
Access to rear seats .......................................55
Active Safety Brake.................. 17, 156-157, 159
AdBlue
®
..................................... 16, 28, 194-195
AdBlue
®
tank .................................................196
Additive, Diesel ......................................191-192
Adjusting headlamps ......................................84
Adjusting head restraints .......................... 54-55
Adjusting seats ..........................................55-56
Adjusting the air distribution ..................... 64-67
Adjusting the air flow ...........................63, 65-67
Adjusting the date ...............................34, 16, 29
Adjusting the height and reach of the
steering wheel ..............................................58
Adjusting the lumbar support .......................... 55
Adjusting the seat belt height .........................98
Adjusting the temperature ........................63, 65
Adjusting the time ...............................34, 15, 30
Advanced Grip Control .............................95-96
Advice on care and maintenance .................194
Advice on driving ................................... 116 -117
Airbags .................................... 19, 101, 103, 106
Airbags, curtain ...................................... 102-103
Airbags, front..................................101-103, 106
Airbags, lateral .......................................102-103
Air conditioning ................................... 62-64, 67
Air conditioning, automatic .......................65, 68
Air conditioning, dual-zone automatic ......64, 67
Air conditioning, manual ...........................63-64
Air intake ...................................................65-66
Air vents ..........................................................61
Alarm ......................................................... 49-51
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) ................ 91-92
Anti-slip regulation (ASR) ................... 18, 91-96
Anti-theft/Immobiliser ............................. 40, 118
Apple CarPlay connection ........................ 11, 17
Armrest, front .............................................73-74
Assistance call .......................................... 90-91
Assistance, emergency braking ....... 91-92, 158
Audio streaming (Bluetooth) ................... 8-9, 23
Cable, audio ....................................................23
Cable, Jack .....................................................23
Capacity, fuel tank ........................................180
Cap, fuel filler ................................................180
CD ...............................................................8, 23
CD, MP3 ...................................................... 8, 23
Central locking ..........................................36, 39
Changing a bulb ..................... 206-207, 210-211
Changing a fuse ............................. 212-213, 215
Changing a wheel ......................... 198-199, 203
Changing a wiper blade ..................................87
Changing the remote control battery ..............42
Charger, induction ......................................72-73
Charger, wireless .......................................72-73
CHECK ............................................................ 29
Checking the engine oil level .......................... 27
Checking the levels ................................189-191
C
B
Battery .................................... 186, 215, 217-218
Battery, 12 V ...................................192, 215-217
Battery, charging ...........................................217
Battery, remote control ....................... 41- 43, 70
Blind .......................................................... 52-53
Blind spot monitoring system, active ............ 165
Blind spot sensors ................................ 164-166
BlueHDi ............................... 14, 28-29, 192, 197
Bluetooth (hands-free) ........................ 12, 24-25
Bluetooth (telephone) ..................... 12-13, 24-26
Bonnet ....................................................188-189
Boot ............................................... 44-45, 47, 78
Brake discs ....................................................193
Brake lamps ..................................................210
Brakes .....................................................13, 193
Braking assistance system ....................... 91-92
Braking, automatic emergency
... 17, 156-157, 159
Brightness ....................................................... 14
Bulbs .............................................................207
Bulbs (changing) .................... 206-207, 210-211
Checking tyre pressures (using the
kit) ............................................... 199-200, 202
Checks ...........................................189, 192-193
Checks, routine ......................................192-193
Child lock ....................................................... 115
Children .................................................. 110 -114
Children (safety) ............................................ 115
Child seats .............100, 104-105, 107, 109-110
Child seats, conventional ....................... 109-110
Child seats, i-Size ......................................... 114
Child seats, ISOFIX ................................111-114
Cigarette lighter ..............................................72
CITROËN Connect Nav ....................................1
CITROËN Connect Radio ................................. 1
Cleaning (advice) ..........................................194
Closing the boot .................................. 39, 44-45
Closing the doors ......................................39, 44
Coffee Break Alert ........................................160
Collision Risk Alert.................................156-158
Configuration, vehicle .....................................33
Connection, Bluetooth ..............12-13, 19, 24-26
Connection, MirrorLink ........................10-11, 18
Connection, Wi-Fi network .............................19
Control stalk, lighting ................................79, 81
Control stalk, wipers ...........................85-86, 88
Controls, steering mounted ...................125-129
Control, back-up boot release ..................45, 48
Control, back-up door ................................41-42
Control, heated seats ......................................57
Courtesy lamp ............................................... 211
Courtesy lamps ............................................... 75
Cover, load space ...........................................76
Cruise control ..........................140-141, 144-146
Cruise control by speed limit
recognition ...........................................140-141
Cruise control, adaptive ................................ 147
Cruise control, adaptive with Stop
function ................................................140-141
Cup holder .......................................................71
226
Alphabetical index
Gauge, fuel....................................................180
Gearbox, automatic ...8, 125-130, 132, 193, 216
Gearbox, manual ..............8, 125, 130, 132, 193
Gear lever, automatic gearbox .....................129
Gear lever, manual gearbox .........................125
Gear efficiency indicator ............................... 130
Glove box ........................................................71
G
F
Fatigue detection ...................................159-160
Filling the AdBlue
®
tank ........................192, 196
Filling the fuel tank ........................................ 180
Filter, air ........................................................192
Filter, oil ......................................................... 192
Filter, particle .........................................191-192
Filter, passenger compartment ............... 62, 192
Fitting a wheel ....................................... 203-206
Fitting roof bars ...................................... 187-188
Fittings, boot ...................................................76
Fittings, interior ...............................................71
Flap, fuel filler ................................................180
Floor, boot, adjustable ....................................77
Fluid, brake ...................................................191
Fluid, engine coolant .....................................191
Foglamps, front ................................ 79, 85, 209
Foglamps, rear .................................. 22, 79, 211
Folding the rear seats ............................... 60-61
Frequency (radio) ............................................ 21
Fuel................................................................181
Fuel tank........................................................180
Fusebox, dashboard ..............................212-213
Fusebox, engine compartment ...... 212-213, 215
Fuses ..............................................212-213, 215
D
E
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) –
Digital radio ............................................... 7, 22
Date (setting) .......................................34, 16, 29
Daytime running lamps .....................79, 81, 209
Deactivating the front passenger
airbag ..................................................102, 106
Deadlocking .............................................. 37, 40
Defrosting ..................................................68-69
Defrosting, front ..............................................68
Demisting ........................................................68
Demisting, front ............................................... 68
Demisting, rear ................................................ 68
Demisting, rear screen ...................................68
Dials and gauges .......................................... 8-9
Dimensions ...................................................221
Dipstick ....................................................27, 19 0
Direction indicators ................... 80-81, 208, 210
Display screen, instrument panel .................130
Door pockets ................................................... 71
Doors ...............................................................44
Driver Attention Alert ....................................160
Driving .................................................... 116 -117
Driving aids camera (warnings) ....................136
Driving aids (recommendations) ................... 135
Driving positions (storing) ......................... 56-57
Dynamic stability control (DSC) .......... 18, 91-96
Economy mode .............................................186
Electronic brake force distribution (EBFD) ...
91-92
Emergency braking assistance (EBA) ...... 91-92
Emergency call ......................................... 90-91
Emergency switching off ...............................121
Emissions control system, SCR .............29, 194
Energy economy mode ................................. 186
Engine compartment ....................................189
Engines ................................................. 222-224
Engine, Diesel ........... 14, 19, 181, 189, 197, 224
Engine, petrol ........................................189, 223
Environment ..............................................43, 70
ESC (electronic stability control) ....................91
Extended traffic sign recognition .................. 141
Hands-free access ..........................................47
Hands-free tailgate ...................................45, 47
Hazard warning lamps ............................89, 197
Headlamp adjustment .....................................84
Headlamps, automatic dipping ...........24, 83-84
Headlamps, automatic illumination .......... 81-82
Headlamps, dipped beam .........24, 79, 208-209
Headlamps, halogen ...............................84, 207
Headlamps, main beam .......24-25, 79, 208-209
Head restraints, front ................................ 54-55
Head restraints, rear ................................. 60-61
Heating .......................................... 61, 64, 69-70
Heating, additional .................................... 69-70
Heating, programmable ............................ 69-70
Hill Assist Descent Control (HADC) ......... 96-97
Hill start assist ........................................ 129-130
Horn.................................................................90
H
G.P.S . .............................................................. 13
Grab handles ............................................55, 71
I
Ignition ............................................. 119, 121, 27
Ignition on...................................................... 121
Immobiliser, electronic ............................ 41, 118
Indicators, direction ................................80, 208
Indicator, AdBlue
®
range ................................. 28
Indicator, coolant temperature ........................27
Indicator, engine oil level .......................... 27, 29
Inflating tyres ................................................193
Inflating tyres (using the kit) ..........199-200, 202
Infrared camera ............................................136
Instrument panel ......................8-10, 29, 31, 137
Intelligent Traction Control .............................. 92
Internet browser ..............................................19
ISOFIX ....................................................111-112
227
.
Alphabetical index
Jack ......................................... 198-199, 203, 23
Jump starting ................................................216
J
K
Key ......................................................35, 40-42
Keyless Entry and Starting ................ 37-41, 120
Key not recognised .......................................121
Key with remote control .................... 35-36, 118
Key, electronic ............................................37-39
Kit, hands-free .................................... 12, 24-25
Kit, temporary puncture repair ...... 198-200, 202
Load reduction mode ....................................186
Load space cover ............................................76
Locating your vehicle ......................................37
Locking ...................................................... 39 -41
Locking from the inside ...................................41
Locking the doors ...........................................41
Low fuel level ................................................180
Lumbar ............................................................55
L
Labels, identification .....................................221
Lamps, front ..................................................194
Lamps, parking ...............................................81
Lamps, rear ...........................................194, 210
Lamp, boot ..............................................78, 212
Lane departure warning system, active
... 17, 161
Lane Keeping Assist, Active
... 147, 151-153, 156
Leather (care) ................................................ 194
LEDs – Light-emitting diodes
...81, 207, 209-211
Levels and checks .................................189-191
Level, AdBlue
®
..............................................192
Level, brake fluid ...........................................191
Level, Diesel additive ............................. 191-192
Level, engine coolant .............................. 27, 191
Level, engine oil ...................................... 27, 19 0
Level, screenwash fluid .......................... 87, 191
Light-emitting diodes – LEDs
...81, 207, 209-211
Lighting dimmer ..............................................30
Lighting, cornering ..........................................85
Lighting, directional ......................................... 85
Lighting, guide-me home .......................... 37, 82
Lighting, interior ..............................................75
Lighting, ambience ..........................................75
Lighting, welcome ...........................................82
Loading ................................................... 77, 187
M
Maintenance (advice) .................................... 194
Maintenance, routine ............................ 137, 192
Manoeuvring aids (recommendations) .........135
Map reading lamps .........................................75
Markings, identification ................................. 221
Massage function ..................................... 57-58
Massage, multi-point ................................ 57-58
Mat .......................................................... 74, 137
Memorising a speed .....................................146
Menu ............................................................... 11
Menu short cuts ..............................................33
Menus (audio) ........................................3-4, 3-4
Menu, main .....................................................33
Messages ........................................................ 27
Messages, quick .............................................27
Mirrors, door.........................58-59, 68, 164-166
Mirror, rear view ........................................ 59-60
Mirror, vanity ...................................................71
Misfuel prevention .........................................180
Motorised tailgate ..................................... 45-47
Mountings, ISOFIX ....................................... 111
N
Net, high load retaining ................................... 77
Number plate lamps ......................................211
O
Obstacle detection ........................................ 167
Oil change .....................................................190
Oil consumption ............................................190
Oil, engine .....................................................190
On-board tools ................................ 78, 198-199
Opening the bonnet ......................................188
Opening the boot ................................38, 44-45
Opening the doors ....................................38, 44
Opening the fuel filler flap .............................180
Opening the windows .....................................36
P
Pads, brake ...................................................193
Paint ..............................................................221
Paint colour code ..........................................221
Park Assist ..................................... 173-174, 176
Parking brake, electric ..................13, 18, 21-22,
121-124, 193
Parking sensors, audible and visual ............. 167
Parking sensors, front ................................... 167
Parking sensors, rear....................................167
Personalisation ............................................9-10
Plates, identification......................................221
Player, Apple
®
.............................................9, 23
Player, MP3 CD ...............................................23
Player, USB .................................................8, 22
Power steering ................................................23
Pre-heater, Diesel ........................................... 19
Pressures, tyres ....................................193, 202
Pre-tensioning seat belts ..............................100
Priming the fuel system .........................197-198
Profiles ......................................................14, 28
Programmable cruise control .......................144
Programmable speed limiter.........................142
Protecting children ... 101-102, 104-107, 110-114
Puncture .................................199-200, 202-203
228
Alphabetical index
R S
T
Radar (warnings) ...........................................136
Radio ........................................5-6, 8, 20-21, 23
Radio, digital (Digital Audio
Broadcasting – DAB) ................................ 7, 2 2
Range, AdBlue ........................................28, 192
RDS ............................................................. 6, 21
Rear screen, demisting .............................68-69
Recharging the battery .................................217
Recirculation, air ....................................... 65-67
Recovery ....................................................... 219
Reduction of electrical load ..........................186
Regeneration of the particle filter .................192
Reinitialisation of the under-inflation
detection system ..................................133-134
Reinitialising the remote control .....................43
Reminder, key in ignition ............................... 119
Reminder, lighting on ......................................80
Remote control ............................... 35-37, 39-41
Removing a wheel ................................ 203-206
Removing the mat ........................................... 74
Replacing bulbs ..................... 206-207, 210-211
Replacing fuses .....................................212-213
Replacing the air filter ...................................192
Replacing the oil filter ...................................192
Replacing the passenger compartment filter ...
192
Reservoir, screenwash .................................191
Resetting the service indicator ................. 26-27
Resetting the trip recorder ..............................30
Reset trip .........................................................31
Rev counter ................................................... 8-9
Reversing camera ..................136, 168-169, 171
Reversing lamps ...........................................210
Roof bars ................................................187-188
Running out of fuel (Diesel) ................... 197-198
Safety, children ........ 101-102, 104-107, 110-114
Saturation of the particle filter (Diesel) .........192
Screen menu map ........................................... 11
Screenwash, front ...........................................86
Screenwash, rear ............................................ 86
Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) ......29, 194
Seat belts .................................. 13, 98-100, 109
Seats, electric ...........................................56-57
Seats, front ................................................54-57
Seats, heated ..................................................57
Seats, rear ................................................. 60-61
Selector, gear .........................................125-129
Sensors (warnings) .......................................137
Serial number, vehicle ..................................221
Service indicator ..................................26 -27, 29
Service (warning lamp) ................................... 14
Servicing ................................14, 26, 26-27, 192
Settings, equipment ........................................33
Settings, system ........................................15, 29
Sidelamps ................................. 79, 81, 209-210
Side repeater ................................................209
Snow chains .................................................. 186
Socket, 12 V accessory ............................72, 76
Socket, auxiliary ..........................................8, 23
Socket, Jack .................................................... 23
Socket,, USB .........................................72, 8, 22
Speed limiter ..................................140-143, 146
Speed limit recognition ......................... 137, 140
Speedometer ........................................ 8-9, 137
Spotlamps, side ............................................209
Stability control (ESC)....................91-92, 94-96
Starting a Diesel engine ...............................181
Starting the engine ....................................... 118
Starting the vehicle ...
18, 21-22, 118-120, 125-129
Starting using another battery .............. 121, 216
Station, radio ......................................5-6, 20-21
Stay, bonnet ...........................................188-189
Steering mounted controls, audio ............ 2-3, 2
Steering wheel, adjustment ............................58
Stopping the vehicle ...........................18, 21-22,
118-120, 125-129
STOP (warning lamp) ......................................12
Stop & Start ................................. 23, 32, 63, 68,
130, 132, 180, 188, 192, 218
Storage ........................................... 71, 73-74, 76
Storage box ..................................................... 78
Storage compartments ...................................71
Storage wells ............................................76, 78
Storing driving positions ........................... 56-57
Stowing rings ..................................................76
Sunroof, panoramic .................................. 52-53
Sunshine sensor .............................................62
Sun visor .........................................................71
Switching off the engine ............................... 118
Synchronising the remote control ...................43
Tables of engines .................................. 223-224
Tables of fuses ............................... 212-213, 215
Tank, fuel .......................................................180
Technical data ....................................... 223-224
Telephone ........................... 72-73, 12-14, 24-27
Temperature, coolant ................................ 12, 27
Third brake lamp ........................................... 211
Three flashes (direction indicators) ................80
Ticket holder ...................................................71
Time (setting) ......................................34, 15, 30
TMC (Traffic info) ............................................14
Tool kit ............................................. 78, 198-199
Top 360 Vision ......................................168, 171
Topping up AdBlue
®
......................................196
Top Rear Vision..................................... 168-169
Total distance recorder ...................................30
Touch screen.................................................1, 1
Towbar ..................................................... 94, 182
Towbar with quickly detachable towball
...183-185
Towed loads ..................................................222
Towing another vehicle .................................219
Traffic information (TMC) ................................14
Trailer ......................................................94, 182
229
.
Alphabetical index
W
V
U
Trailer stability assist (TSA) ............................94
Trajectory control systems ........................ 91-92
Triangle, warning...........................................197
Trip computer .............................................31-32
Trip distance recorder .....................................30
Tyres ..............................................................193
Tyre under-inflation detection .........19, 132, 202
Warning lamp, STOP ......................................12
Washing ........................................................137
Washing (advice)...........................................194
Weights .........................................................222
Welcome lighting....................................... 37, 82
Wheel, spare ......................... 193, 198-199, 203
Window controls .............................................51
Windscreen, heated ........................................68
Wiper blades (changing) .................................87
Wipers ................................................ 25, 85, 88
Wipers, automatic rain sensitive ...............86, 88
Wiper, rear.......................................................86
Warning and indicator lamps .................... 11, 12
Warning lamps ..........................................11, 29
Warning lamp, airbag ...................................... 19
Warning lamp, braking system .......................13
Warning lamp, Diesel engine pre-heater .......19
Warning lamp, driver's seat belt not fastened
...99
Warning lamp, low fuel level ...........................20
Warning lamp, parking brake .......................... 13
Warning lamp, seat belts ................................99
Warning lamp, Service....................................14
Ventilation ................................61-62, 64, 69-70
Visibility ...........................................................68
Vision, 180° forward ..................................... 171
Vision, 180° rear ........................................... 171
Voice commands ..................................4 -7, 9-11
Under-inflation (detection) ..............19, 132, 202
Unlocking ............................................35-36, 38
Unlocking from the inside ...............................41
Unlocking the boot ....................................36, 38
Unlocking the doors ........................................ 41
Unlocking the tailgate ...............................36, 38
Updating the date ................................34, 16, 29
Updating the time ................................34, 15, 30
USB ....................................................... 8, 22-23
10-18
CONDUENT
4Dconcept
Xerox
Reproduction or translation of all or part of
this document is prohibited without written
authorisation from Automobiles CITROËN.
Automobiles CITROËN declares, by application
of the provisions of the European legislation
(Directive 2000/53) relating to End of Life
Vehicles, that it achieves the objectives set by
this legislation and that recycled materials are
used in the manufacture of the products that it
sells.
Printed in the EU
Anglais
ANG. 18C84.0040*18C84.0040*
